<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" >

<channel>
	<title>Client Software &#8211; XVRAID XVR-DVR-NVR CCTV DESK</title>
	<atom:link href="https://www.xvraid.com/tag/client-software/feed" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://www.xvraid.com</link>
	<description>security and surveillance blog</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Mon, 06 Jan 2025 18:12:45 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=7.1</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/ipcam.png</url>
	<title>Client Software &#8211; XVRAID XVR-DVR-NVR CCTV DESK</title>
	<link>https://www.xvraid.com</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
	<item>
		<title>EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/eseecloud-cms-v3-user-manual.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/eseecloud-cms-v3-user-manual.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 06 Jan 2025 18:12:45 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[alarm management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CMS (Central Management Software)]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud central management software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 alarm management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 camera management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 configuration guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 device management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 installation guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 login]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 manual PDF]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 map integration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 motion detection setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 multi-site management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 PTZ control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 quick start guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 recording settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 remote viewing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 setup guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 system configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 troubleshooting guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 user guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 user management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 user manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 video playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[event management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[how to install EseeCloud CMS V3]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP camera system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[map integration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[multi-site monitoring]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[network security]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PTZ control (Pan-Tilt-Zoom)]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Quick Start Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[recording schedule]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Remote Access]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[remote monitoring]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security camera system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[server software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[software installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[system configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[technical support]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[troubleshooting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[user management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[video analytics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[video management software (VMS)]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[video playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Surveillance]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=6347</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual, Welcome to use our products! We are very honored to gain your trust.In order to provide you...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual, Welcome to use our products! We are very honored to gain your trust.In order to provide you with a comprehensive understanding of our product CMS and to facilitate its use, we have specially prepared this manual for you. It includes function introductions, operation steps, precautions, and more, serving as essential guidance for using this product.</p>
<p>Please read the instruction manual carefully before use. We believe it will greatly assist you in effectively utilizing this product. Additionally, if you have any questions during use, please feel free to contact us. We are here to serve you.</p>
<h3>Applicable Model</h3>
<p>This manual is for the <a href="https://eseecloud.app/download/" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener">Camera Monitoring System CMS</a>.</p>
<h3>Statement</h3>
<p>This manual may contain areas where the product functions or operations do not match, or where the technology is inaccurate, or typographical errors occur. In such cases, our company will update the manual content according to product updates. We will regularly update the hardware and software products described in this manual. Updated content will be added to the new version of this manual without prior notice.</p>
<p>The contents of this manual are for reference guidance only and may not be identical to the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.</p>
<h3>Agreement</h3>
<p>To simplify the description in this manual, the following conventions are made:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• The Camera Monitoring System CMS is referred to as CMS or software for short.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• DVR, NVR, IPC, VR CAM, WIFI, IPC equipment, etc., are collectively referred to as equipment.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• “Click” refers to clicking the left mouse button. “Double click” refers to double-clicking the left mouse button.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Some pictures are schematic; please refer to the actual software interface.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• A “note” hint text may appear in this manual to indicate that the operation is potentially risky. Ignoring the text may result in errors or unpredictable results.</div>
</div>
</div>
<div></div>
<blockquote>
<h3>EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual</h3>
</blockquote>
<h2>1. Introduction to CMS</h2>
<h3>1.1 Function Introduction</h3>
<p>CMS, short for Camera Monitor System, is a camera monitoring client that offers online preview images, video storage, remote playback, device management, video/screen download, and other functions. It is suitable for DVR, NVR, IPC, VR CAM, Wifi IPC, and other devices.</p>
<p>CMS boasts the following characteristics:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Interface Containerization Processing Mode: The client component adopts careful containerized processing in interface design. This simplifies the processing mode of multi-screen and single-screen switching, greatly enhancing the multi-screen operation feeling and adapting to the development trend of multi-screen PCs.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Channelized Management Mode: The client component design incorporates a channelized management mode, abandoning the traditional design mode with the device as the core subject. This approach aligns better with the development direction of IP monitoring.</div>
</div>
</div>
<h3>1.2 Operating Environment</h3>
<p>Operating System:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Microsoft Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows 10 (32/64 bit Chinese and English operating system)</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• OSX 10.9 or higher (64-bit Chinese and English systems)</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>CPU: I3/2.4GHz or more</p>
<p>Memory: 4GB or more</p>
<p>Graphics Card:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Integrated graphics (Intel HD 4000 and later)</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Discrete graphics (NVIDIA GeForce GTX 460 and later)</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note: Previewing multiple videos or high-resolution videos simultaneously requires higher hardware configuration and network bandwidth.</p>
<h2>2. Installation login</h2>
<h3>2.1 Installation and Operation</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Step 1: Run the EseeCloud_Setup_3.0.1.exe installation package.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Step 2: Select the display language during installation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Step 3: Read and determine whether to accept the agreement.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Step 4: Determine the path for installation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Step 5: Installation is complete, and you can choose to run immediately.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-224-255h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-224-255h.png" alt="image 224 255h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 58"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-225-255h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-225-255h.png" alt="image 225 255h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 59"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-226.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-226.png" alt="image 226" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 60"></a></p>
<p>Running program</p>
<p>Choose a language</p>
<p>Reading agreement</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-227-352w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-227-352w.png" alt="image 227 352w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 61"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-228-352w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-228-352w.png" alt="image 228 352w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 62"></a></p>
<p>Determine the path</p>
<p>The installation is complete</p>
<h3>2.2 User Login</h3>
<h4>2.2.1 Local Login</h4>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Enter Account + Password</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click to Login</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Local login can be accessed using the default account admin (the initial password is blank).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Local login mode allows for remembering passwords or automatic login (automatic login is not possible when auto-lock status is enabled).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Clicking the string in the login “forgot password” encrypts it. Different accounts correspond to different encrypted passwords.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• The account number box can display three accounts that are mostly used recently.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Switch to Cloud Login</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-229.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-229.png" alt="image 229" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 63"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-230-515w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-230-515w.png" alt="image 230 515w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 64"></a></p>
<p>Login account</p>
<p>forget password</p>
<p>Note:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• The current CMS version only allows the username “admin” with an initial empty password. To prevent potential safety hazards, please ensure to modify the initial password after the first login to prevent unauthorized access to your device or other adverse consequences.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• For better protection of your privacy and product security improvement, we strongly recommend setting up complex passwords based on the following rules: greater than 8 characters, including uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, special characters, etc. Please understand that it is your responsibility to properly configure all passwords and other related product security settings.</div>
</div>
</div>
<h4>2.2.2 Cloud Login</h4>
<p>User Login:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Enter ‘account + password’</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Remember the password and automatic login (optional)</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click to Login</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Register an Account:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Enter ‘new account + password + email’</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click to register now</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Retrieve Password:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Enter ‘Account + Mailbox’</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click to get the verification code and enter</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Enter a new password</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Click to complete</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Cloud login should use the registered account (the account registered by the mobile app can also be used).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.It’s recommended to use a valid mailbox for the registered account, facilitating password retrieval in special circumstances.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.After registering an account, you need to log in to the email address provided during registration to activate the email address (click the received link to verify).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.If the mailbox status is not activated, password retrieval won’t be possible after forgetting the password (the activation period is two days).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>5.The first time you use EseeCloud_CMS, the software’s time zone will automatically sync with your computer, and you can change it later in the advanced settings.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-232.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-232.png" alt="image 232" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 65"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-233.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-233.png" alt="image 233" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 66"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-234.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-234.png" alt="image 234" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 67"></a></p>
<p>Login account</p>
<p>Register a new account</p>
<p>Retrieve password</p>
<h2>3. Live Preview</h2>
<h3>3.1 Connection/Disconnection</h3>
<p>List Style: Tree Shape</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Connection:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Double-click on the selected device/channel to enter the connected video state.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.After selecting the device/channel, right-click and select “Connect Video” to enter the connected video state (Figure 1).</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Disconnection:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Double-click to disconnect the current connection after selecting the connected device/channel.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.After selecting the device/channel, right-click and select ‘Disconnect’ to disconnect the current connection.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-241.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-241.png" alt="image 241" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 68"></a></p>
<p>Figure 1</p>
<p>List Style is Graphic:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.After selecting the device/channel, click the play button on the device list to enter the connected video status.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.After selecting the device/channel, click the stop button on the device list to disconnect the current connection status.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Right-click operation connection/disconnection is consistent with the tree list style. The specific operation can be referenced.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note: Poor performance of the computer will directly affect the smoothness of the preview video. It is recommended that the number of channels connected to the device be gradually increased.</p>
<h3>Video/Screenshot:</h3>
<p>Video:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click the Record button on the toolbar to enter the video recording status (as shown in Figure 1 below).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.After the video operation, click the record button again to stop recording.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.The actual recording duration is not equal to the time difference between the start recording time and the end recording time.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.If the device network is interrupted, the recording will succeed but no video file will be saved.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.The channel is maximized or minimized during recording, and the recording will stop.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Screenshot:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Click the screenshot button on the toolbar to enter the screenshot status (as shown in Figure 1 below).</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.If the switching stream video is not loaded, the screenshot operation will be saved.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.The screenshot does not have the function of continuous screenshots. Clicking the screenshot button once will capture an image.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-242.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-242.png" alt="image 242" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 69"></a></p>
<p>Figure 1</p>
<h3>Panorama Mode</h3>
<p>Panorama Mode:</p>
<p>Enter:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Double-click the channel screen to enter the maximized state, right-click, and select “panoramic mode” to switch to the panorama mode. Entering panorama mode automatically switches the code stream to HD.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.In 1 split-screen mode, the panorama mode option is available on the right toolbar. Click to select and switch to panorama mode.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Drop Out:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click on Panorama mode on the right toolbar and select ‘Exit panorama’ to exit panorama mode.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Exit the panorama mode by exiting the screen from the split-screen state.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-237-680w411h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-237-680w411h.png" alt="image 237 680w411h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 70"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-238-680w410h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-238-680w410h.png" alt="image 238 680w410h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 71"></a></p>
<p>Panorama mode</p>
<p>Cylindrical mode</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-239-680w412h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-239-680w412h.png" alt="image 239 680w412h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 72"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-240-680w411h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-240-680w411h.png" alt="image 240 680w411h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 73"></a></p>
<p>Expand mode</p>
<p>Split screen mode</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-243-680w411h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-243-680w411h.png" alt="image 243 680w411h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 74"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-244-680w412h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-244-680w412h.png" alt="image 244 680w412h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 75"></a></p>
<p>Quad screen mode</p>
<p>Six-screen mode</p>
<p>Note:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.In the local login mode, you can select 6 display modes in the panorama mode, including: panorama, cylinder, expand, 2 split screen, 4 split screen, 6 split screen.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.In the cloud login mode, you can select 4 display modes in the panorama mode, including: panorama, cylinder, split screen, quad screen.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Installation Mode:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Suspension: The direction of the cruise is clockwise.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Wall-mounted: The direction of the cruise swings left and right.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Cruise Mode:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Speed: Cruise provides speed 3S / speed 40S / speed 60S options, corresponding to slow / medium / fast speeds.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Stop: Pause the current state of the cruise. Left-click on the channel in the cruise or select the stop cruise button in the cruise mode to click.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-245.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-245.png" alt="image 245" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 76"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-246.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-246.png" alt="image 246" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 77"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-247.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-247.png" alt="image 247" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 78"></a></p>
<p>Panorama mode</p>
<p>Installation mode</p>
<p>Cruise mode</p>
<h3>3.4 PTZ Control</h3>
<p>Cruise / PTZ / Zoom / Focus / Aperture / Preset:</p>
<p>The PTZ control function can be used only when the PTZ device (such as a ball machine) is connected to the main control device (such as NVR or DVR).</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Cruise: Directly perform the screen cruise operation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Pan/Tilt: Adjust the lens direction.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Zoom: Replace the mirror multiple.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-248.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-248.png" alt="image 248" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 79"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-249.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-249.png" alt="image 249" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 80"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-250-121h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-250-121h.png" alt="image 250 121h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 81"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-251.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-251.png" alt="image 251" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 82"></a></p>
<p>PTZ speed level control</p>
<p>control</p>
<p>Zoom, focus</p>
<p>Preset</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Adjust the PTZ control speed (default level is 6).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Adjust lens direction and cruise.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Adjust the zoom and focus of the PTZ camera.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Set and call the set bit, adjust the lens to the specified position, set the preset position, input the preset position later, click to call, and the lens will automatically move to the specified position.</div>
</div>
</div>
<h3>3.5 Split Screen Number</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• The client provides 1 split screen, 4 split screens, 6 split screens, 8 split screens, 9 split screens, 16 split screens, 25 split screens, 36 split screens, and 49 split screens. These nine split screens can be switched at will.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>When the number of connected device channels is greater than the current number of split screens, the displayed split screen will automatically increase, reaching up to 49 split screens.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-252.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-252.png" alt="image 252" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 83"></a></p>
<p>Split screen number</p>
<h3>3.6 Other Functions</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Sharpness Switching: Use the SD SD and HD HD toggle buttons.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Sound:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select the screen channel.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click to turn off/on the sound.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Intercom:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click the intercom button to open the intercom.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Left-click and hold the connection to talk, click the exit button to exit the intercom.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Help: The help buttons under each interface provide the corresponding function instructions.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Recording: When the live preview channel is recording, the icon will flash.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Shut Down:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click to exit the login button.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click OK to log out and return to the login screen.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-254-417w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-254-417w.png" alt="image 254 417w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 84"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-255.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-255.png" alt="image 255" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 85"></a></p>
<p>Other functions</p>
<p>Intercom</p>
<h2>4. Video Playback</h2>
<h3>4.1 Video Playback</h3>
<p>Playback Steps:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select device channel.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Select video type.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Select playback date.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Confirm search video.</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Retrieving the video requires three conditions: ‘device channel + recording type + playback date’.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Video types include: motion detection, timing detection, alarm detection, and manual detection. Generally, all types of videos can be retrieved by default.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• The selection of the device channel can directly affect the retrieval result. Be sure to confirm the online status of the device before recording.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-256.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-256.png" alt="image 256" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 86"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-257.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-257.png" alt="image 257" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 87"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-258-343w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-258-343w.png" alt="image 258 343w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 88"></a></p>
<p>Device channel</p>
<p>Video type</p>
<p>Date selection</p>
<h3>4.2 Timed Playback</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Timed Playback: Select the timed playback operation, enter the recording effective time point in the time frame, and confirm that it can be played immediately (effective time point refers to the time retrieved by video playback).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Time Drag Playback: Adjust the time scale and drag the cursor on the timeline to the corresponding time (as shown in Figure 2 below).</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-259-121h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-259-121h.png" alt="image 259 121h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 89"></a></p>
<p>Timed playback</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/5001f136.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/5001f136.png" alt="5001f136" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 90"></a></p>
<p>Timeline</p>
<h3>4.3 Video Sync</h3>
<p>Steps:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Retrieve video.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Check sync.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Switch time point.</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Date: Check the synchronization switching time point; the channel synchronization will not take effect.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Time: Check the synchronous switching time point; the recording time of each channel will not take effect at the same time.</div>
</div>
</div>
<h3>4.4 Video Download</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Batch Download: Enter the time period to be downloaded at the start time + end time according to the needs of the retrieved recording time range.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Time Period Download: The time period of the video recording will also be displayed in the download resource. Click the download button for any time period that fits your needs.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-260.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-260.png" alt="image 260" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 91"></a></p>
<p>Custom bulk download</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-261-64h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-261-64h.png" alt="image 261 64h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 92"></a></p>
<p>Select time period to download</p>
<h3>4.5 Other Functions</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Playback Control: Support playback/pause/stop control in video playback, select the screen form in playback and click operation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Time Scale Adjustment: The settings in the Setup Wizard are not set. The playback timeline scale will default to 60 minutes. You can also modify the scale value by clicking ‘Reduction’ or ‘Magnify’ during video playback.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-262.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-262.png" alt="image 262" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 93"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-263-42h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-263-42h.png" alt="image 263 42h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 94"></a></p>
<p>Playback control</p>
<p>Adjustment scale</p>
<h2>5. Equipment Management</h2>
<h3>5.1 Add Device</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Add a LAN Device:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Enter the device management interface.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Refresh LAN device.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Check the device and click Add (LAN device can be filtered by entering IP/ID in the filter box).</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Add Cloud ID Device:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Manually enter the device ‘cloud ID number + channel number’, select ‘type’ according to the actual situation of the device, and click to confirm (the password can be selected according to the actual settings of the device).</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Add an IP/DDNS Device:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Manually enter the device ‘IP/DDNS + port + channel number’, select ‘type’ according to the actual situation of the device, and click OK.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-264-868w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-264-868w.png" alt="image 264 868w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 95"></a></p>
<p>LAN add</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-265.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-265.png" alt="image 265" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 96"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-266-265w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-266-265w.png" alt="image 266 265w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 97"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-267-265w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-267-265w.png" alt="image 267 265w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 98"></a></p>
<p>Manual input addition</p>
<h3>5.2 Modify Device</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Device Modification: In the device management or preview interface, after selecting the device and clicking Modify, the device interface will be loaded.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Regional Modification: In the modify device interface, click the area drop-down box.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Group Modification: After selecting the group under the device management interface, click the modify button to load the modified group information interface.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note: Modify the channel name, panorama, and channel type corresponding to the channel number in the device. The panorama or channel type corresponding to each serial number is independent. The channel device in the device needs to be in the panoramic state. You can select the corresponding channel serial number to modify the panorama and channel type.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-268-505w330h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-268-505w330h.png" alt="image 268 505w330h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 99"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-269-199h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-269-199h.png" alt="image 269 199h" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 100"></a></p>
<p>Device modification</p>
<p>Grouping</p>
<h3>5.3 Remote Setting</h3>
<h4>5.3.1 VR CAM/Gateway Remote Setting</h4>
<p>Setup Steps:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Selected device</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click Settings / Connect Device and click the Remote Settings button (as shown in Figure 1)</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Device Information: Content includes device model, device ID, OEM serial number, firmware version (providing check updates).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Function Setting: The audio, prompt tone, prompt language, and display mode and resolution can be set on the configuration.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Alarm System: The content includes motion detection, message push, motion detection sensitivity, and synchronization time function. If daylight saving time setting is available, you can set daylight saving time.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• TF Card Settings: TF card status, available / total capacity, TF card formatting function</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Alarm message push is not supported in local login. You need to check to switch to cloud login status.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Currently supports VR CAM/gateway devices for remote setup.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-270.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-270.png" alt="image 270" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 101"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-271.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-271.png" alt="image 271" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 102"></a></p>
<p>Figure 1           Figure 2              Figure 3 Remote setting interface</p>
<h3>5.3.2 D82 Series NVR Remote Setting</h3>
<p>Setup Steps:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Selected device</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click Settings / Connect Device and click the Remote Settings button</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• General Settings: Set the device’s time zone, date format, date, time, button sound, OSD transparency, VGA resolution.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Channel Setting:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Coding Settings: Can set the encoding mode of each channel, the resolution of the primary and secondary streams, the code stream control, the code stream rate, the video frame rate, and the encoding format.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Color Adjustment: The tone, contrast, brightness, and saturation of each channel can be adjusted and copied to other channels.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Channel OSD: The title, display status, and communication quality of each channel can be modified.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Video Detection: Each channel alarm duration, detection type, sensitivity, whether to enable various alarm information push, detection area selection, deployment time selection can be modified, and can be copied to other channels.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Code Stream Value: Monitor real-time stream for each channel.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Channel Details: View the primary stream, secondary stream, and software version for each channel.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Recording Settings: You can set the recording type and time of each channel. There are three types of timing, movement, and alarm.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Network Settings:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Network Settings: You can modify whether to use DHCP. If you choose No, you can modify the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, DNS address, and WEB port of the NVR.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Dynamic Domain Name: You can modify whether to use DDNS. If yes, you can modify the provider, domain name, username, password.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• PPPOE: Select whether to enable PPPOE. If yes, you can modify the PPPOE protocol, username, and password. You can view the PPPOE status and PPPOE IP address.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Wireless Setting: Can view ESSID, modify Wireless Channel, area.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• System Settings:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Device Information: View device name, device model, device serial number, software version, release time, cloud ID.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Log Information: Select the input type, start time, and end time and click Search to display the log number, time, and content that meet the conditions.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• User Management: Display serial number, username, whether it is super user, create new user, edit user, delete user, change password.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Factory Settings: Choose simple restore (ignore channel and network configuration), restore all (restore all configurations).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Online Upgrade: Select the local upgrade file and click on Upgrade Firmware.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<h3>5.4 Device Grouping</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Create a Group:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click the ‘Create Group’ button.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Enter the content in the group name box and click OK.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Add Channel:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Enter:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select the created group.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click the Add Channel button.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Import Selection:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select the channel.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Select the group.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click the import selection button.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Import All:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select the group.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click to import all buttons.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Modify/Delete:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Edit: Select the group and click the Modify button to modify it.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Delete: Delete the selected group or channel and click the delete button to delete.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-273.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-273.png" alt="image 273" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 103"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-274-321w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-274-321w.png" alt="image 274 321w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 104"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-275.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-275.png" alt="image 275" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 105"></a></p>
<p>Create a group</p>
<p>Add channel</p>
<p>Modify group</p>
<h2>6. User Parameter</h2>
<h3>6.1 Basic Settings</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Split Screen Number: The selected split screen number is displayed after re-login. The CMS provides split screen options in 1, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16, 25, 36, and 49 forms.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Display Language: CMS currently defaults to 9 display languages, such as Simplified Chinese and English. When you choose to log in again, it will switch to the corresponding language.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Login Method: The cloud login mode is online. You need to connect to the external network when you log in. The local login does not have this requirement.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• List Style: The list style includes tree shape and graphics. The replacement is only in the real-time preview interface and the display of the device list under the playback interface. The device list under other interfaces is unified into the tree list style.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Path Modification:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Screenshot Path: The screenshot file is saved in the snapshot folder by default and can be saved in other paths according to your needs.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Local Recording Path: The local recording file is saved in the record folder by default and can be saved in other paths according to your needs.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Video Download Path: The files downloaded by the playback video are saved in the video_download folder by default and can be saved in other paths according to your needs.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Preview Sync Time: Check the time when the device is previewed, and the computer will be automatically synchronized (only IPC is supported).</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Note: After modifying the settings, click “Finish,” and you will need to log in again. (It is best not to modify it to a directory containing Chinese.)</p>
<h3>6.2 Advanced Settings</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Time Zone Setting: The local time zone can be selected according to the actual situation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Automatic Lock: Check the auto lock and enter the integer in minutes in the time frame. If no operation is performed on the CMS within the input time, the CMS will automatically lock.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Automatically Connect Video: After logging in to the auto-connect video, log in to the CMS and automatically connect to the device added to the device list. The number of connected channels is the number of split screens in the basic settings.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-276-868w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-276-868w.png" alt="image 276 868w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 106"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-277-868w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-277-868w.png" alt="image 277 868w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 107"></a></p>
<p>Basic Settings</p>
<p>advanced settings</p>
<h2>7. More Features</h2>
<h3>7.1 User Management</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• New User:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click New User.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Enter username (required) + note name (optional).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click to confirm.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Modify Permissions:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Default: The default permissions include screenshot, video, PTZ settings, video playback, and remote download.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Modify:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click edit permission.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Check the permissions and devices/channels that need to be assigned to new users (you can click to select all).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click to confirm.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Other Functions:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Clear Password: If the login password of the new user is forgotten, you can log in to the newly created user again by directly clearing the password, and the internal setting data can be retained.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Modify the Note: Add a note, change the note, or delete the note, go to the modify note operation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Delete User: If you feel that the newly created user is not necessary, click delete user to delete the user.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-278.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-278.png" alt="image 278" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 108"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-279.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-279.png" alt="image 279" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 109"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-280-236w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-280-236w.png" alt="image 280 236w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 110"></a></p>
<p>New user</p>
<p>Modify permissions</p>
<p>Modify user</p>
<h3>7.2 Log Query</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Inquire:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Confirm ‘start time + end time.’</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Confirm ‘log type’ (including alarm log, log in log, and operation log).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Selected area.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Click to query.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-281-868w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-281-868w.png" alt="image 281 868w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 111"></a></p>
<h3>7.3 Resource Management</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Screenshot:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Search for:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select ‘start time + end time’.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click search.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Preview:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Method one: Select ‘preview’ for right-click operation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Method two: Click the screenshot file retrieved.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Delete:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Method one: Select ‘Delete’ for the right-click operation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Method two: Enter the screenshot preview state and click to select ‘delete’.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Location:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Method one: Select ‘Open location’ for right-click operation.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Method two: Click ‘Save Location’ in the resource information.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Resource Information: ‘user, resource size, resolution, device name, associated channel, screenshot time, save location’, including the above content (as shown in Figure 2).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Replacement Size: ‘Original size, maximize, zoom in, zoom out, resource information, delete’, the screenshot preview status includes the above status/functions that can be switched to.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Video:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Search for:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Select ‘start time + end time.’</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Select the recording type (including preview video, playback video, and default all types).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click search.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Resource Information: ‘user, resource size, recording type, device name, associated channel, recording time, save location’, including the above.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Other Functions: The operation steps of ‘preview, resource information, location, delete’ function are the same as the screenshots. For details, please refer to the operation in the screenshot.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-282.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-282.png" alt="image 282" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 112"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-283.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-283.png" alt="image 283" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 113"></a></p>
<p>Figure 1 Right click operation</p>
<p>Figure 2 Resource information</p>
<h3>7.4 System Info</h3>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Version Information: The content is displayed as follows: ‘version number, date’.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Change Password:</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Enter ‘original password + new password + confirm new password’.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click to confirm.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Re-login to verify the password.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Sign Out: Click the ‘Exit Login’ button to quit the login status of the current account.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-284-553w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/image-284-553w.png" alt="image 284 553w" title="EseeCloud CMS V3 User Manual 114"></a></p>
<h2>8. Frequently Asked Questions</h2>
<p>Question One: After installation, open the CMS and display “Cannot load plugin”?</p>
<p>Answer One:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Please confirm whether the installation path uses Chinese when installing, as the plugin is temporarily not compatible with Chinese paths.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.After confirming the non-Chinese path, if the problem persists, you can contact technical support for assistance.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Question Two: After connecting multiple channels of video (more than 30 channels), videos stop for a few seconds, all channels are automatically disconnected into the black screen. The device connected again has no response. Do we need to restart the CMS?</p>
<p>Answer Two: The new version of CMS3.0.1 runs with higher memory. If you connect many channels using a lower configuration computer, the computer system will run out of memory, causing the CMS to run abnormally. If the computer configuration is slightly lower, it is recommended not to connect too many channels. Optimization work has been planned for this situation.</p>
<p>Question Three: When CMS is installed on the OSX system, it displays “File is corrupted” or “Unable to open” when it is opened?</p>
<p>Answer Three:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Open “System Settings” → “Security and Privacy” → “Allow applications to be downloaded from the following location”, check “any source” (applies to versions prior to OSX10.12.X).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Open “Terminal”, enter the string “sudo spctl –master-disable”, press the “Enter” key, enter the sudo password (applies to versions after OSX10.12.X). If the above method still does not work, please contact us to help you solve it.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Question Four: After starting a window and flashing, it will not start or XP will appear. Open the software to indicate 0a00000000 memory referenced by 0x00000000 instruction. The memory cannot be ‘written’.</p>
<p>Answer Four: This is likely a video card driver problem. Updating the graphics card driver can solve it.</p>
<p>Question Five: It shows mfc100u.dll lost when opening computer.</p>
<p>Answer Five: Install the VC++2010 library to solve the problem.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/eseecloud-cms-v3-user-manual.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-installation-and-setup.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-installation-and-setup.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 12 Aug 2024 18:33:51 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Administrator Password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[default password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud app configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud camera pairing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud connection issues]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud DVR setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud installation guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud mobile app setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud network setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud remote viewing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud security camera setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud setup tips]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud step-by-step guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud troubleshooting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FLIR Cloud video tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How to set up FLIR Cloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lorex]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software Downloads]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=5961</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[FLIR PC-NVR is software bundled with the FLIR Cloud Client software download. It is a completely separate software, and one does not require the other...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>FLIR PC-NVR is software bundled with the FLIR Cloud Client software download. It is a completely separate software, and one does not require the other to function.</p>
<p>FLIR PC-NVR turns the computer into an NVR and will use your hard disk drive (HDD) on your PC to store recorded video.</p>
<p>IMPORTANT: If you install PC-NVR and want to remove it afterwards, you must uninstall FLIR Cloud Client software entirely and re-install it with the PC-NVR option not selected. Uninstalling FLIR Cloud Client will require the administrator password. If you do not have this password, you must contact technical support for assistance in recovering your password.</p>
<p>The following instructions require you to access your system using the FLIR Cloud Client software and a PC.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-installation-window-680w442h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-installation-window-680w442h.png" alt="flir cloud client installation window 680w442h" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 125"></a></p>
<p>REMINDER: FLIR PC-NVR can be installed while installing FLIR Cloud Client. However, if it is not initially installed, FLIR Cloud will need to be uninstalled and re-installed to install FLIR PC-NVR at a later date.</p>
<p>Prerequisites:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Ensure FLIR Cloud Client software and FLIR PC-NVR are downloaded on your PC.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Record the device ID and IP address of the camera or DVR / NVR system you want to add to PC-NVR.</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>◦ Accessing system information on your ECO Series DVR</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Accessing system information on your LHV / LNR Series DVR / NVR</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Ensure your PC is connected to the same network as your DVR / NVR system.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Manually add your camera or DVR / NVR system to FLIR Cloud Client software</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>To add a channel from the DVR / NVR in FLIR PC-NVR:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Launch FLIR Cloud Client software on your computer, then click PC-NVR.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Click the Plus icon (<a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-add-channel-button.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-add-channel-button.jpeg" alt="flir cloud client add channel button" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 126"></a>) to open the Add Channel window.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Enter the device ID or IP address of the system you want to add.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Select the channel you want to add using the checkbox, then click Import.</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-add-channel-callout-680w422h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-add-channel-callout-680w422h.png" alt="flir cloud pc nvr add channel callout 680w422h" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 127"></a></p>
</div>
</div>
<p>Once you have added the channel, you can configure your hard disk drive (HDD) settings for your PC.</p>
<p>To configure your HDD settings:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• Click PC-NVR &gt; Disk Management, then configure the following:</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/imageb992e6121d3b4822a93e47a39ce13d57-680w280h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/imageb992e6121d3b4822a93e47a39ce13d57-680w280h.png" alt="imageb992e6121d3b4822a93e47a39ce13d57 680w280h" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 128"></a></p>
<div>
<div>
<div>◦ When disk is full: Select Stop Recording or Overwrite.</div>
<p>CAUTION: Overwrite will save recorded video over the oldest saved files when your hard drive is full.</p>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Allocate: Enter hard drive space you would like FLIR PC-NVR to use.</div>
<p>TIP: FLIR PC-NVR is compatible with an external USB HDD.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<h3>FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup</h3>
<p>You can set a recording schedule for each connected camera in FLIR PC-NVR.</p>
<p>To set a recording schedule for a camera:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Click Record Plan.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Select the channel you want to set a recording schedule for.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Select Continuous, Motion, or Alarm, then click and drag in the timeline of each day to customize the recording schedule.</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-checkboxes.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-checkboxes.png" alt="flir cloud pc nvr" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 129"></a></p>
<div>
<div>
<div>◦ Continuous: Your camera will record continuously.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Motion: Your camera will record when it detects motion.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Alarm: Your camera will alert you when it detects motion.</div>
<p>TIP: Setting a recording schedule in FLIR PC-NVR does not affect the recording schedule set on your DVR / NVR system.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>Your PC-NVR will behave as a virtual NVR system and save your recorded video to your PC. FLIR PC-NVR shows in the Device list and behaves like any other DVR / NVR system in the FLIR Cloud Client software.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/pc-nvr-in-device-list-493h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/pc-nvr-in-device-list-493h.png" alt="pc nvr in device list 493h" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 130"></a></p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Adding your DVR / NVR using IP address</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>.</p>
<p>Your LHV / LNR Series DVR / NVR system can be manually added to the FLIR Cloud Client software by entering the system IP address.</p>
<p>Prerequisites:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/1342/Locating-downloads-and-documentation" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Download and install the FLIR Cloud Client software</a></div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• Ensure you have the IP address of your LHV / LNR Series DVR / NVR system.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>• The following instructions require you to access your system using the FLIR Cloud Client software and a PC / Mac. The instructions below are shown using a Windows 10 operating system.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>To manually add the LHV / LNR Series DVR / NVR using an IP address:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Launch FLIR Cloud Client software on your computer to open the Login window.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Enter your login information. Refer to your user manual for your default Username and Password.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click Login to open the Home window.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Click the Devices icon (<a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/devices-icon.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/devices-icon.png" alt="devices icon" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 131"></a>) to open the Devices tab.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>5.Click Manual Add on the bottom-left corner to open the Manual Add window.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>6.In the Manual Add window, enter the following information:</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-log-in-screen.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-log-in-screen.jpeg" alt="flir cloud client log in screen" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 132"></a></p>
<div>
<div>
<div>◦ Device Name: Enter the Device Name of your choice to identify the DVR / NVR.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ IP/Domain Name: Ensure the IP/Domain checkbox is checked to enable connection using the IP address. Enter the IP address of the DVR / NVR.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Client Port: Enter the Client Port value (default: 35000).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ User Name: Enter the DVR / NVR User Name.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Password: Enter the DVR / NVR Password.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>7.Click Add to connect the DVR / NVR. The connection may take a few minutes.</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Adding your DVR / NVR using Device ID</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>.</p>
<p>Your DVR / NVR can be manually added to the FLIR Cloud Client software by entering the device ID. FLIR Cloud Client software is available for download on PC / Mac. Click here for more information on locating software downloads.</p>
<p>Prerequisite:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>• The following instructions require you to access your system using the FLIR Cloud Client software and a PC / Mac. The instructions below are shown using a Windows 10 operating system.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>To manually add the DVR / NVR using a device ID:</p>
<div>
<div>
<div>1.Launch FLIR Cloud Client software on your computer.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>2.Enter your login information. Refer to your user manual for your default Username and Password if needed.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>3.Click Login to open the Home window.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>4.Click the Devices icon (<a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/devices-icon-1.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/devices-icon-1.png" alt="devices icon 1" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 133"></a>) to open the Devices tab.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>5.Click Manual Add on the bottom-left corner to open the Manual Add window.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>6.In the Manual Add window, enter the following:</div>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-manual-add-window-474w.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/flir-cloud-client-manual-add-window-474w.png" alt="flir cloud client manual add window 474w" title="FLIR Cloud PC-NVR installation and setup 134"></a></p>
<div>
<div>
<div>◦ Device Name: Enter the Device Name of your choice to identify the DVR / NVR.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Device ID: Enter the device ID or scan the QR code located on the top of the DVR / NVR.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Client Port: Enter the Client Port value (default: 35000).</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ User Name: Enter the DVR / NVR User Name. Refer to your user manual for your default Username if needed.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>◦ Password: Enter the DVR / NVR Password. Refer to your user manual for your default Password if needed.</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>7.Click Add to connect your DVR / NVR. The connection may take a few minutes.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>8.Click Home, and then double-click Default Group to load your connected cameras.</div>
</div>
</div>
<p>If you are not able to connect to your DVR / NVR using the device ID on the same network, you may be experiencing a NAT Loopback issue. Routers recognize and connect to DVR / NVR via IP address. To connect your system from the same network, use the IP address of the DVR / NVR. <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/2669/FLIR-Cloud-Client-Software-Adding-your-DVR-NVR-using-IP-address" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener">Click here</a> for details on using the IP address to manually connect your DVR / NVR.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/flir-cloud-pc-nvr-installation-and-setup.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/how-to-connect-ip-camera-guide-2024.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/how-to-connect-ip-camera-guide-2024.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sun, 09 Jun 2024 17:25:44 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[access]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[admin]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[android]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[browser]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Config Tool]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[device]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[factory]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[google]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How to use]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[interface]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Internet Explorer]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP address]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip cam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP Camera Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iphone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Monitor]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network cables]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network Video Recorder]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[opera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PC Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[poe]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PoE injector]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PoE switch]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Power]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Recorder]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[security camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security camera system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[smart camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Switch]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[troubleshoot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[video]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[with]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[XVR]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=5842</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024, How to Connect IP Camera to Computer, Many consumers find the need for a professional...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024, How to Connect IP Camera to Computer, Many consumers find the need for a professional IP based security camera system for their home, business, or property, but are under the assumption that IP systems are complicated and too tech-heavy.  This discourages them from purchasing one, preventing them the security they require. The truth is, though, that setting up an IP camera is easier than you think. It involves a basic understanding of networking, and by following some simple steps, you’ll have your IP cameras functioning in no time.</p>
<p>Our IP camera can connect directly to your network or computer, and there are three ways to do so. The three ways listed below do not require a NVR. A NVR, or Network Video Recorder, is the device that IP cameras connect to.  The NVR records video provided by the IP cameras to a hard drive, either in HD (720p, 1080p), 2K HD, or Ultra HD (4K) depending on the type of NVR and type of camera that&#8217;s being used with it.</p>
<p>IP cameras are network-based cameras, however they don’t require Internet access in order to be used as they are standalone devices that can be used on a local network. A simple local network can be either of the following:</p>
<p>1.An IP network camera connected with a network cable to your desktop computer&#8217;s network port.</p>
<p>2.An IP camera connected to a router that is connected to a desktop or laptop computer, but the router is not connected to the internet.</p>
<p>Only if you want to view your system remotely from the internet then you would have to connect the system to the Internet.</p>
<h2>Do I need a NVR for my IP security camera system?</h2>
<p>A NVR is not necessary in order to view your network cameras or even record video. If you are testing cameras, looking for a temporary setup or want to set up something inexpensive then using a computer with an IP camera is a good alternative to a NVR.  SmartPSS is our computer software program that allows PCs to view and record IP cameras. However, this kind of processing will demand a lot from the computer. Most likely, you wouldn’t be able to use that computer for personal use as it would be bogged down processing video from high resolution IP network cameras.  Also, computers can be unreliable and crash, potentially leaving you with no recorded video.</p>
<p>NVR products are standalone devices using a Linux operating system which is known to be rock-solid and crash free, and designed to be operate 24/7 and maintain system security with user account access permissions. For a complete security camera system, you will want to use a NVR along with cameras. SmartPSS software can be used as a client software to connect from a computer to a NVR to watch cameras connected to the NVR and to playback/download recorded security footage.</p>
<h2>How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024</h2>
<h2>Three ways to connect an IP camera to a computer</h2>
<p>Before we begin, it is important to understand that network camera systems require the ability to transport video and power to work correctly. Power Over Ethernet (PoE) is a technology that transmits video/data signal and power over one Ethernet cable. In situations where PoE isn’t available, a 12V DC power adapter will be necessary to supply power to the camera.</p>
<p>Secondly, you will need to use our <a href="https://drive.google.com/file/d/19cChBOY8tFjLbGAEbbIfN2-uFWrYQ_Pe/view" target="_blank" rel="noopener">IP finder Config Tool</a> to find cameras on your network. For more info on basic networking knowledge as to how IP addresses matter when deploying network cameras, please read our guide about connecting security cameras to the internet.</p>
<p>Now, let’s discuss the three ways to to connect to an IP camera from your computer.</p>
<p>1.12V DC power adapter with a network cable straight into a PC</p>
<p>2.12V DC power to camera + network cable to router</p>
<p>3.Camera to PoE Switch or PoE Injector</p>
<h2>How to Connect IP Camera to Computer</h2>
<h2>1) 12V DC power adapter with a network cable straight into a PC</h2>
<p>a) For this method we will provide power to the camera using a 12V DC 1amp power adapter that plugs into a 110V AC outlet. Below is a picture of our trusty power adapter.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-331.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" width="600" height="490" class="wp-image-5843 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-331.jpeg" alt="Picture 331" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 150" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-331.jpeg 600w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-331-300x245.jpeg 300w" sizes="(max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">b) Next, connect a network cable from the camera to your computer.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-332.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" width="450" height="300" class="wp-image-5844 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-332.jpeg" alt="Picture 332" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 151" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-332.jpeg 450w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-332-300x200.jpeg 300w" sizes="(max-width: 450px) 100vw, 450px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-333.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" width="450" height="313" class="wp-image-5845 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-333.jpeg" alt="Picture 333" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 152" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-333.jpeg 450w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-333-300x209.jpeg 300w" sizes="(max-width: 450px) 100vw, 450px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">c) Set your computer&#8217;s network port to a static IP address like 192.168.1.200 so you can talk to the camera. Here&#8217;s how you do it on a Windows Computer:</p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="Changing the IP Address of Your Computer&amp;apos;s Network Port" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/3ECFMFQK8-o?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p>d) All newer cameras with firmware from 2018 and onward have stringent password rules that require initialization before making any configuration changes to the camera including the IP address. In order to set the password and password recovery email address you must login to the web interface of the camera. Be sure to note down and keep the credentials you are setting in a safe place that you will remember.</p>
<p>There are no master reset passwords for our equipment. If you forget your password, recovery email address, and security questions that you set on the camera at time of initialization, resetting the camera requires factory service which will incur out-of-warranty costs to reflash the camera.</p>
<p>.</p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Initialize an IP Camera Using Web Service" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/qv7A_79D4Yo?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p>e) Once you have a static IP address assigned to your computer&#8217;s wired network port, turn off WiFi on your computer. You can find the camera’s current IP address by using the <a href="https://www.cctvcameraworld.com/ip-camera-configuration-tool/" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener">Config Tool</a> as shown. Our test camera has a current IP address of 10.1.1.65. If you need to change the IP address to let&#8217;s say 192.168.1.120, you can do that by clicking on the pencil icon to edit.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-334.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="680" height="314" class="wp-image-5846 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-334.jpeg" alt="Picture 334" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 153" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-334.jpeg 680w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-334-300x139.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 680px) 100vw, 680px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">Note: if you have a password other than admin set on the cameras, then you will need to enter that in the &#8220;search settings&#8221; options before attempting to edit the IP address. See the illustration below on how that is done.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-335.gif" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="680" height="476" class="wp-image-5847 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-335.gif" alt="Picture 335" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 154"></a></span></p>
<p>f) As explained in our article connecting security cameras to the internet, for two devices on a network to talk to each other, they must have the same IP address scheme. In 1C we set our computer&#8217;s address to 192.168.1.200, so we need to set change this camera&#8217;s address to 192.168.1.X where X is a number between 2 and 254, and not same as the our computer&#8217;s current address. We picked 12, so below is a screenshot of what to set your camera&#8217;s ip address to if you are following along in our guide. Set the subnet to 255.255.255.0 and gateway to 192.168.1.1.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-336.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="680" height="476" class="wp-image-5848 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-336.jpeg" alt="Picture 336" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 155" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-336.jpeg 680w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-336-300x210.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 680px) 100vw, 680px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">g) After changing your camera’s IP address to one that matches your network, type the new IP address of your camera into the URL of internet explorer. Here&#8217;s a brief example:</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-337.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="640" height="480" class="wp-image-5849 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-337.jpeg" alt="Picture 337" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 156" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-337.jpeg 640w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-337-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 640px) 100vw, 640px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">You can also view the camera using our PC software. If you don&#8217;t already have it, you can <a href="https://drive.google.com/file/d/0B59CscyVnyBYaWtJdkFhMFBGZUU/view" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #467886; font-size: 12pt;">download</span> <span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #467886; font-size: 12pt;">SmartPSS</span> <span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #467886; font-size: 12pt;">from</span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #467886; font-size: 12pt;"> here</span></a>. Here&#8217;s how if you already have SmartPSS installed.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-338.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="640" height="480" class="wp-image-5850 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-338.jpeg" alt="Picture 338" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 157" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-338.jpeg 640w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-338-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 640px) 100vw, 640px" /></a></span></p>
<p>In summary, the above is a quick and easy way to connect an IP camera to a computer with a hardwired network port. This is great for the following scenarios:</p>
<p>• You don&#8217;t have a router and want to set up a closed circuit system between a computer and a security camera.</p>
<p>• You are trying to test an IP camera or troubleshoot it.</p>
<p>• You are trying to connect to a security video recorder directly from a computer.</p>
<p>Most computers have only one network port, so this method can be problematic as it would use up your only network port, preventing you from having a hard-wired Internet connection. The next 2 methods will demonstrate how to set up a network camera on a network. Method 2 is for setting up a camera with a 12V DC power supply and Method 3 entails using a PoE injector or switch. The only different between these two methods is how power is supplied to the camera.</p>
<h2>2) 12V DC power to camera + network cable to router</h2>
<p>This method will show you how to connect an IP camera to your router and view it over a network, while supplying power to the camera using a 12V DC power adaptor.</p>
<p>a) Connect a 12V DC power supply to your camera and connect the power adaptor to the wall to power the camera.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-339.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="600" height="401" class="wp-image-5851 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-339.jpeg" alt="Picture 339" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 158" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-339.jpeg 600w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-339-300x201.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">b) Connect a network (Ethernet) cable from the camera to the router to establish a data connection between the camera and the router.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-340.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="600" height="371" class="wp-image-5852 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-340.jpeg" alt="Picture 340" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 159" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-340.jpeg 600w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-340-300x186.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">c) Give the camera about 2-3 minutes to boot. Use our IP Finder Config Tool to find the camera on your local area network (LAN).  Below is a screen shot of how it looks in our case.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-341.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="680" height="314" class="wp-image-5853 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-341.jpeg" alt="Picture 341" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 160" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-341.jpeg 680w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-341-300x139.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 680px) 100vw, 680px" /></a></span></p>
<p>The camera currently has an IP address of 10.1.1.65. As explained in our article connecting security cameras to the internet, for the camera to be reachable from the computer on your network, its IP address has to match the IP scheme of your network. In our case our router IP is 192.168.1.1, so we are going to have to change the IP address of the camera. To change the IP simple press the pencil icon to edit.</p>
<p>d) We are going to set the camera to an IP of 192.168.1.X, we chose 192.168.1.12. Before we go ahead and change the IP address, we have to think about duplicate IP addresses on the network which would create networking issues. To see if a specific IP address is available on your LAN, use the command prompt in Windows to ping the address you intend to use. Below is a video explaining how to use the ping command. You can use this command on Mac as well by using the terminal.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-342.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="640" height="480" class="wp-image-5854 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-342.jpeg" alt="Picture 342" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 161" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-342.jpeg 640w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-342-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 640px) 100vw, 640px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">e) Let&#8217;s change the IP address. In our case we set it to 192.168.1.12. Subnet mask is usually 255.255.255.0 on simple networks, and the gateway is the IP address of the router. Press OK.<br />
<span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-343.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="680" height="476" class="wp-image-5855 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-343.jpeg" alt="Picture 343" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 162" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-343.jpeg 680w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-343-300x210.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 680px) 100vw, 680px" /></a></span></p>
<p>f)  Once the camera is assigned a new IP address, you can access the camera using your Web Browser or SmartPSS as shown in 1F above.</p>
<h2>3) Camera to PoE Switch or PoE Injector</h2>
<p>We discussed that PoE supplies power to the camera, so a 12V power adapter is not necessary in this scenario.</p>
<p>In this method you plug an ethernet cable from the camera to a PoE port on a compatible PoE switch or injector. The PoE switch or injector connects to the router.</p>
<p>Here&#8217;s how you connect to a PoE switch.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-344.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="600" height="236" class="wp-image-5856 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-344.jpeg" alt="Picture 344" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 163" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-344.jpeg 600w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-344-300x118.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">Here&#8217;s how you connect to a PoE injector</p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-345.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="600" height="373" class="wp-image-5857 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-345.jpeg" alt="Picture 345" title="How to Connect IP Camera Guide 2024 164" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-345.jpeg 600w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Picture-345-300x187.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></a></span></p>
<p>Again, use the Config Tool to find your camera’s IP address and change it to match your network scheme (if necessary) as described in steps 2C thru 2E. Once the camera is on the same network as your computer you can login and watch the camera as shown in Step 1F.</p>
<p>.</p>
<h2>Summary</h2>
<p>At this point, you now should know a good amount about networking and have used the above mentioned steps to make your very own IP camera system using your computer and IP camera.</p>
<p>Viewing an IP Camera on a Smart TV</p>
<p>Among the many different ways that security cameras are used, we are often asked if it is possible to view an IP camera directly on a Smart TV without using a NVR recorder. With most Smart TVs on the market there is no application that is available to watch IP cameras directly on the TV. In this guide we show how to use an Android TV box by downloading an App to connect an IP camera to a Smart TV or any monitor that has an HDMI input.</p>
<p>All IP cameras from CCTV Camera World support a RTSP video stream that is usable by third party programs and apps. The App that we suggest you use on an Android TV box is called <a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.videolan.vlc&amp;hl=en_US" target="_blank" rel="noopener">VLC Media Player</a>. You can login and access the RTSP stream from an IP camera and have it display on a TV.</p>
<p>Keep in mind any device that can download VLC Media Player can do this process like iPhones, iPads, Android tablets, and phones.</p>
<h2>What equipment is needed?</h2>
<p>Here&#8217;s the list of all the equipment that is needed to connect an IP camera to a Smart TV.</p>
<p>1.IP camera from CCTV Camera World</p>
<p>2.PoE injector or 12V DC Power Adaptor to power the camera</p>
<p>3.Network cables to connect the camera to your computer network</p>
<p>4.Android TV Box from any online shopping marketplace</p>
<p>5.Computer network to connect the camera and Android TV Box</p>
<p>6.Internet connection to setup and install Apps on the Android TV box which can later be removed after the setup process is finished</p>
<p>7.SmartTV or Computer Monitor with HDMI input</p>
<p>.</p>
<h2>How to connect IP security cameras to an Android TV Box</h2>
<p>Before you can access the stream from the camera you will need to have it connected to your computer network and verify that it’s accessible. If you purchased a standalone IP camera from CCTV Camera World the camera is likely already configured with an IP address. Check the top of the camera box for the login information label. If the camera has not been configured, or you need to set it up on your network we recommend following our How to Connect an IP Camera guide.</p>
<p>You will also need to set up your Android TV box on your network, consult with the manufacturer of your box to find out how to do this.</p>
<p>You will need your IP address, username, and password that is set on the camera in order to access it. Inside of the VLC Media Player app you can access network streams. Inside of the app navigate to adding a video source and select network stream. Using the example RTSP stream below plug in the information for your camera&#8217;s IP address and type the text into the media player URL.</p>
<p>rtsp://192.168.1.109:554/cam/realmonitor?channel=1&amp;subtype=0</p>
<p>After you’ve typed in the correct RTSP stream for your camera you will be required to login to your camera stream. Type in the username and password for your camera to allow the app to login to your camera stream.</p>
<p>If you receive an error, double check that your camera is connected to the network and you’ve typed the correct username and password. Provided the camera is set up on the network and you are able to login you should now see your camera stream inside of the VLC Media Player App.</p>
<p>Keep in mind that Smart Camera features cannot be used with the RTSP stream. If you would like to use Smart Detection features that your security camera may have, you will want to use an NVR to display the camera on your TV.</p>
<p>Watch our video below that shows the setup process described above on an Android TV box.</p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="Watching IP Cameras with an Android Box" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/IXPNx-WjNM4?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;">.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.39;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/how-to-connect-ip-camera-guide-2024.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
		<media:content url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/3ECFMFQK8-o" medium="video" width="1280" height="720">
			<media:player url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/3ECFMFQK8-o" />
			<media:title type="plain">Changing the IP Address of Your Computer&#039;s Network Port</media:title>
			<media:description type="html"><![CDATA[Changing the IP Address of Your Computer&#039;s Network Port using Windows 10.]]></media:description>
			<media:thumbnail url="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/changing-the-ip-address-of-your-.jpg" />
			<media:rating scheme="urn:simple">nonadult</media:rating>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/how-to/ys-ahd-tvi-security-system-user-guide-v1.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/how-to/ys-ahd-tvi-security-system-user-guide-v1.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 06 May 2024 15:22:05 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[AHD]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[alarm]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[android]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[apple]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cloud Devices]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Download Link]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[enable]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Forgot Password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Google Play]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Google play store]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guard Station]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guard Viewer]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[hiseeu]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mobile App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Monitor]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mouse]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Phone App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[QR code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Remote View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security System]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Serial Number]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Storage]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Surveillance Client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[troubleshoot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=5767</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1, Guard Viewer is a mobile surveillance client app. With this app you can access...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1, Guard Viewer is a mobile surveillance client app. With this app you can access surveillance products(Network Cameras,Network Speed Domes,NVRs) through network and view live or recorded video, receive alarms and manage cloud devices using your mobile phone.</p>
<h1>1.Download the mobile APP (Guard Viewer) and Sign up</h1>
<h1>for an Account</h1>
<p>Further support, plz email us at email <a href="mailto:love@hiseeu.com">love@hiseeu.com</a></p>
<p>Or contact us at +1 917 688 222</p>
<h2>Download the mobile APP and Sign up for an Account</h2>
<p>1. Download and install the app.</p>
<p>Please scan the QR code to download the free APP “Guard Viewer”</p>
<p>You also can visit the Apple Store or the Google Play Store to download the Guard Viewer app for iOS or Android devices. Alter installation, tap the icon to launch the app.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2049.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2049.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\CEB32536.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 207"></a></p>
<p>2.Register an account and login</p>
<p>For first time use, please create a new account and add the following steps:</p>
<p>Please tap Sign up and follow the on-screen prompt to register an account by email.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2050-682w384h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2050-682w384h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\D38C5EB4.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 208"></a></p>
<h1>2.Add Device to APP(Guard Viewer)</h1>
<h2>YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1</h2>
<p>Further support, plz email us at email <a href="mailto:love@hiseeu.com">love@hiseeu.com</a></p>
<p>Or contact us at +1 917 688 2228</p>
<p>Add Device to APP(Guard Viewer)</p>
<p>Auto add is not suggested. Please tap on “Later” if you see this message box.</p>
<p>In this situation, it will Auto Search to discover the NVR device connected to the local network. But once your mobile phone disconnects with LAN WiFi, you will not be able to view it anymore.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2053-679w255h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2053-679w255h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\FD2C9AE2.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 209"></a></p>
<p>Please Add devices in this way</p>
<p>1.  Please Tap on  “ Menu” icon&gt; Tap on “Devices&#8221;&gt; &#8220;Add” ,</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2054-678w322h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2054-678w322h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\59A4DD40.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 210"></a></p>
<p>2.  Tap on “Scan&#8221;&gt; “OK ” to scan the NVR QR code</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2055-681w300h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2055-681w300h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\9372754E.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 211"></a></p>
<p>3.Navigate to &#8220;Menu&#8211; Network&gt; Basic&gt; P2P”</p>
<p>• If the Device Status is “Network connected…” , means device is online   and ready for remote view</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2056-680w416h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2056-680w416h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\23E0DE8C.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 212"></a></p>
<p>• If the Device Status is “Offline” , please check the network connection first, if the problem remains, please feel free to contact us at  <a href="mailto:love@hiseeu.com">Love@Hiseeu.com   </a></p>
<p>After you add the device successful, the “Device status” will be “Online&#8221;, and your APP account username will display here.   • You can check your APP user name by navigate to “Me”</p>
<p>• If the username doesn&#8217;t belong to you, please click on “Delete” and add it again.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2057-679w436h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2057-679w436h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\C226A07A.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 213"></a></p>
<p>4. add NVR by scanning device QR code and click on “save”</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2058-682w344h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2058-682w344h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\1DF52E98.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 214"></a></p>
<p>5.    Please Tap on “Menu ” icon, Tap on “Live View” “Add”</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2059-678w290h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2059-678w290h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\BCF3C866.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 215"></a></p>
<p>6.  Select the device and tap on “Start Live View ”</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2060-677w650h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2060-677w650h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\595D5964.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 216"></a></p>
<h1>3.Device shows &#8220;Offline&#8221; (system kit to app)</h1>
<p>Device shows &#8220;Offline&#8221; (system kit to app)</p>
<p>1. If the device shows offline on the mobile phone app, we need to make sure the NVR is connected to the network perfectly or not</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2069.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2069.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\14B95912.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 217"></a></p>
<p>2. Go to your monitor that is connected to NVR, and check out the network status first navigate to this path first: &#8220;Menu&#8211;Network&#8211;Basic&#8211;P2P&#8221;, also check whether the device status is online or not,</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2070-677w380h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2070-677w380h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\6467AAF0.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 218"></a></p>
<p>3. Also go to &#8220;Menu&#8211;Network&#8211;Advanced&#8221;,to disable the &#8220;PPPoE&#8221;</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2071-683w395h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2071-683w395h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\7E777E7E.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 219"></a></p>
<p>4. if it shows: network disconnected, plz enable the DHCP in this path &#8221; Menu&#8211;Network&#8211;Basic-TCP/IP &#8221; and click &#8220;Apply&#8221;. After that, go back to &#8220;P2P&#8221; and check if the device status is online or not</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2072-680w389h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2072-680w389h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\6C012F3C.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 220"></a></p>
<p>5. if you connect the network cable to the lan port or the lan/wan port of the router</p>
<p>We need to connect it to the lan port of the router,plz take a photo of yours for us to check.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2073.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2073.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\72FB24AA.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 221"></a></p>
<p>.</p>
<p>If the P2P show connect the network ,but the app also show the offline,please delect the device on your APP and re-add it again.</p>
<h1>4.Enable push alerts on APP</h1>
<p>Enable push alerts on APP</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2079-679w445h.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2079-679w445h.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\7441B248.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 222"></a></p>
<h1>5.Why I can&#8217;t remote view when the network is outside？</h1>
<p>Why I can&#8217;t remote view when the network is outside？</p>
<p>.</p>
<p>Cause: Customer doesn&#8217;t follow the instructions on the user manual and add the device in a local adding way, so we suggest them to delete the device first, and re-add the device again like this FAQ</p>
<p><a href="https://www.hiseeu.com/a/help/article/53969" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener">https://www.hiseeu.com/a/help/article/53969</a></p>
<h1>6.APP Share Device</h1>
<h2>APP Share Device</h2>
<p>One device is linked to one user only. The NVR system can only be controlled by one authorized account, which can share the device with others to prevent attack or hacking.</p>
<p>There are 2 ways to share the device with others. For the admin user, please follow the instructions to share the device:</p>
<p>1.Type in &#8220;Menu Icon &#8221; and navigate to &#8220;Devices&#8221;<br />
<a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2081.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2081.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\D349F796.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 223"></a></p>
<p>2. Tape on “&#8230; ” &gt; “Share&#8221;, You can select a single channel to share or select the entire NVR system to share</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2082.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2082.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\B3B7C014.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 224"></a></p>
<p>3.Share the device by typing in the user name you want to share and selecting the function as needed.</p>
<p>• The other user needs to register a Guard Viewer APP account and provide the user name for sharing.</p>
<p>• After that, when this user login the APP will find the device by navigating to “Devices&#8221;.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2083.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2083.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\7DCE6342.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 225"></a></p>
<p>4.Share the device by generating a QR code</p>
<p>• Create a sharing password and set the valid period</p>
<p>• Click “Generate&#8221;, your APP will generate a QR code</p>
<p>• Other users can use the APP to add the device by scanning the QR code you sent</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2084.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2084.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\DD74A4A0.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 226"></a></p>
<h1>7.Add Device on Guard Station PC Client Software</h1>
<h1>Add Device on Guard Station PC Client Software</h1>
<p>Further support, plz email us at email <a href="mailto:love@hiseeu.com">love@hiseeu.com</a></p>
<p>Or contact us at +1 917 688 2228</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h3>Add device to &#8220;Guard Station&#8221; Download link: <a href="https://www.dropbox.com/sh/jeftu4sqwy4y1u8/AAD4PkyEJxg6j4H1n20PxBkZa?dl=0" target="_blank" rel="noopener">https://www.dropbox.com/sh/jeftu4sqwy4y1u8/AAD4PkyEJxg6j4H1n20PxBkZa?dl=0  </a></h3>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>Please sign up for the mobile APP(Guard Viewer) account and add the device first.</p>
<p>Download and run “Guard Station” on the PC</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2089.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2089.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\804393AE.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 227"></a></p>
<p>1) Please Navigate to “Device Management&#8221;&gt; &#8220;Cloud Device&#8221;&gt; Click on “Login”</p>
<p>2) Login with your APP account and password.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2090.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2090.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\E5D86BEC.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 228"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2091.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2091.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\526174DA.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 229"></a></p>
<p>3) After Login, the device you added to the APP will list here</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2092.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2092.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\8E1DE1F8.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 230"></a></p>
<p>Please click on “Control Panel&#8221;&gt; &#8220;Live View&#8221;&gt; Double-Click Camera to load the live view video</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2093.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2093.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\4548B2C6.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 231"></a></p>
<h1>8.Guard Station shows &#8220;offline&#8221;</h1>
<h2>Guard Station shows &#8220;offline&#8221;</h2>
<p>plz check local NVR is connected to network perfectly or not,If your NVR hasn&#8217;t connected to the network yet, it will show &#8220;offline&#8221; in your PC Client &#8220;Guard Station&#8221;</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2099.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%2099.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\C2A692C4.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 232"></a></p>
<p>Plz go to your NVR that is connected to Monitor,</p>
<p>Check out the network status, first navigate to this path first : &#8220;Menu&#8211;Network&#8211;Basic&#8211;P2P&#8221; ,and check the device status is online or not,</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20100.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20100.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\13AEB972.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 233"></a></p>
<p>if it shows: network disconnected, plz enable the DHCP in this path &#8221; Menu&#8211;Network&#8211;Basic-TCP/IP &#8221; and click &#8220;Apply&#8221; , After that, go back to &#8220;P2P&#8221; and check if the device status is online or not</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20101.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20101.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\9806CA50.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 234"></a></p>
<h1>9.Not Recording? HDD not working?</h1>
<h1>Not Recording? HDD not working?</h1>
<p>Right-click the mouse from &#8220;Menu&#8211;Storage&#8211;Hard Disk&#8221;</p>
<p>If there is no hard drive information or Status shows Abnormal, the hard drive is having an issue</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20105.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20105.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\3EC9B4DE.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 235"></a></p>
<h1>10.AHD5 Modify the Camera model</h1>
<h2>AHD5 Modify the Camera model</h2>
<p>（Please notice that AHD5 cameras only the TVI camera model have the audio function，the AHD5 cameras we sell seperately is the AHD model so it should modify the TVI model to have the audio function)</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>1. Click the OSD Menu Control , then click the arrows to the Menu t hen click the icon to select the “VIDEO SETTING ”</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20107.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20107.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\72D1949C.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 236"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20108.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20108.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\A3FC910A.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 237"></a></p>
<p>2.Select the VDEO SETTING and click the arrow to enter.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20109.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20109.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\A624BDA8.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 238"></a></p>
<p>3.Then Select the “TVI ” on the HD, then click the &#8220;APPLY&amp;REBOOT &#8220;and then click the &#8220;RETURN &#8220;and the &#8220;EXlT&#8221; back to the Version</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20110.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20110.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\7742F9F6.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 239"></a></p>
<p>4.Finally Turn Audio On</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20111.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20111.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\94F4D174.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 240"></a></p>
<h1>11.Forget DVR Password</h1>
<h2>Forget DVR Password</h2>
<p>If you forget your current password, please follow the instructions to reset it.</p>
<p>1. In the system login interface, please click on “Enter Password&#8221; &gt; “Forgot Password”</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20117.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20117.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\8E5D5BA2.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 241"></a></p>
<p>2. If you filled in your email address as a reserved email when you set up the system, you can reset the device password via the APP(Guard Viewer)</p>
<p>In NVR interface, tap forgot password.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20118.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20118.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\22191C00.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 242"></a></p>
<p>1. Scan the above QR code by APP &#8220;ME&#8211;General&#8211;Forget Device Password&#8221; , and the security code will be sent to your email address.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>2. If you haven&#8217;t set up an email before, or have any difficulties resetting the password, please take a screenshot of this interface(Serial No. please also make the code is as clear as you can ), and email us at <a href="mailto:love@hiseeu.com">love@hiseeu.com</a> , since we need the serial number to produce a new password by using an internal tool</p>
<h1>12.One or two cameras are not working</h1>
<h1>One or two cameras are not wokring</h1>
<p>(1) BNC Cable connected to Camera is broken</p>
<p>Step: Use another BNC cable to connect the camera to have a try</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20121.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20121.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\A8BCE20E.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 243"></a></p>
<p>(2) The port of the DVR box is broken</p>
<p>Step: After changing the BNC cable, and still there is no camera image, plz insert the camera into another port of the DVR to have a try</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20122.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20122.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\FB17A94C.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 244"></a></p>
<p>(3) Camera is broken after troubleshooting with the steps （1）-（2）</p>
<h1>13.Four cameras or above are not working</h1>
<h2>Four cameras or above are not working</h2>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20125.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20125.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\202F793A.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 245"></a></p>
<p>Four cameras or above not working is an abnormal situation. It&#8217;s not only a camera issue, which could be related to a power supply or power splitter connected to four cameras</p>
<p>If the power supply or power splitter connected to four cameras is broken, which can&#8217;t provide power supply to cameras</p>
<p>Step:</p>
<p>(1）Change to another 12V 2A Power Supply to connect to four cameras to have a try. We wanna make sure if this is related to the power adapter</p>
<p>(2) Change another 1-4 way power splitter to connect four cameras to have a try. We wanna make sure if this is related to the power adapter</p>
<p>( If you do not have another power adapter/splitter, plz use the other power adapter connected to the four normal cameras)</p>
<p>After making sure the power supply or power splitter is doing fine, but still no camera image, which means the DVR box is having issue</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20126.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20126.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\9B14558.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 246"></a></p>
<h1>4.Eight Cameras are not working</h1>
<h3>Eight Cameras are not working</h3>
<p>Please check your camera connection is correct ， if the connection is correct ，</p>
<p>i t&#8217;s mostly possible the DVR box is having issue, and need a new DVR box replacement</p>
<p>Further support, plz email us at email <a href="mailto:love@hiseeu.com">love@hiseeu.com</a></p>
<p>Or contact us at +1 917 688 2228</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20129.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20129.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\2E4BCD26.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 247"></a></p>
<h1>15.How to record the event only？</h1>
<p>How to record the event only ？</p>
<p>Please click the mouse to the Menu then click the “ Storage ” and then click the “ Recording Schedule ”，“ Select Camera ” then click the “ enable Schedule ” click the “ Audio Storage ” then select the color of record type and fill in the corresponding time and date.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20131.png"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Picture%20131.png" alt="C:\Users\msalihaslan\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache\Content.MSO\182D7C24.tmp" title="YS AHD TVI Security System User Guide v1 248"></a></p>
<p>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/how-to/ys-ahd-tvi-security-system-user-guide-v1.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>How to use your Security Camera System</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/how-to-use-your-security-camera-system.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/how-to-use-your-security-camera-system.html#comments</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 25 Mar 2024 20:10:39 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cat5]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cat5e]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cat6]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CVI]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[device]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[enable]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[h.264]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[h.265]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[HDCVI]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How to use]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[interface]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip cam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Monitor]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mouse]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVRs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[opera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Power]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Recorder]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[reset the password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[security camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security camera system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security System]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Snapshot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[USB flash drive]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video recorders]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[with]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[XVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[zoom]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=5150</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[How to use your Security Camera System, In this comprehensive video guide, we demonstrate the plethora of basic functions that our security...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">How to use your Security Camera System, In this comprehensive video guide, we demonstrate the plethora of basic functions that our security camera recorders have to offer. After you purchase your system, this guide is a starting point for learning how to use your security camera system. We start from learning to login to the recorder, and end with downloading video from the recorder and playing it back on your PC. For other functions, feel free to check out our </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">DVR NVR help</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> section.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/maxresdefault-737w415h.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="737" height="415" class="wp-image-5151 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/maxresdefault-737w415h.jpeg" alt="maxresdefault 737w415h" title="How to use your Security Camera System 252" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/maxresdefault-737w415h.jpeg 737w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/maxresdefault-737w415h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 737px) 100vw, 737px" /></a></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #034599; font-size: 11pt;">How To Setup a Security Camera System?</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">The first phase in setup of a security camera system consists of installing the cameras and running the wire. The second phase is completing the connections between the cameras and the recorder, which depends on the type of camera system you have purchased.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">How To Setup a DVR Camera System</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">DVR camera systems</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> consist of security cameras that have BNC jacks to send video over coax wire, and a 12VDC power connector for power. Such coax wire based systems use </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">RG59U siamese cables</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> that have BNC and 12VDC power connectors at each end, which allow video and power to be run together over one “siamese cable.” As shown in the setup video below, </span><a href="https://www.cctvcameraworld.com/bnc-connectors-for-coax-cable.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">BNC connectors</span></a><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> are silver colored metal connectors that twist lock on to the video jacks of a camera and DVR recorder. </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Infrequently, an installer may use network cabling with </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">video baluns</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> instead of coax cabling, which was very common with older CCTV systems to transmit video signal over long distances. Regardless of whether you are using coax wire or video baluns, setup of a DVR camera system is similar as demonstrated in the following video:</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Setup a DVR Camera System" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/PhJitqMDZJQ?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/how-to-add-a-security-system-featured-567w290h.jpeg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="567" height="290" class="wp-image-5152 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/how-to-add-a-security-system-featured-567w290h.jpeg" alt="how to add a security system featured 567w290h" title="How to use your Security Camera System 253" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/how-to-add-a-security-system-featured-567w290h.jpeg 567w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/how-to-add-a-security-system-featured-567w290h-300x153.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 567px) 100vw, 567px" /></a></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">How To Setup a NVR Camera System</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">NVR camera systems</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> use plug-and-play </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">IP Cameras</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> that connect directly to built-in PoE ports on the back of the NVR. Such systems are also commonly referred to as </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">PoE IP camera systems</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> because the cameras use Power over Ethernet technology to send power/video/data all over one </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">network cable</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">. We recommend using CAT5e cable as a minimum, and CAT6 wire is recommended for runs longer than 150ft as its thicker wire gauge allows for improved power transmission.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Our IP camera systems feature plug-and-play compatibility between the NVR and IP camera. Unless otherwise specified, we ensure the cameras and NVR we sell are compatible with each other and allow even a novice user to setup a IP security camera system.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">To gain a good understanding of your purchase, we recommend customers bench test IP cameras with the NVR recorder before installing the cameras. Once it is established that all cameras are operational, continue with mounting the cameras at the desired location and running the camera wire. Since installation errors are common when crimping </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">CAT5e or CAT6 network cable</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">, we recommend using a cable continuity tester to safeguard against wiring related issues.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">As each camera is installed and connected to its wire, follow the video below to learn how to connect each IP camera to the NVR in a NVR camera system.</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="Easy Plug and Play Setup of IP Security Camera Systems by CCTV Camera World" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/x-C9u8floUI?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once cameras are installed and wired to the digital video recorder it is time to login, and start using the system, which leads us to the third phase</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #034599; font-size: 11pt;">How to use your surveillance system</span></h2>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">1. How To Login to a Security Camera System</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Before you are able to login to your camera system over the web, you need to login at the DVR or NVR itself using a mouse. Connect the recorder to a monitor that supports at least 1080P resolution. We recommend using a HDMI input capable monitor. Turn on the recorder and login using two possible login methods.</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">When logging in at the recorder, most of our surveillance video recorders allow quick access using a graphical pattern as a password.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">You can also login using the username and password stated on the sticker located on the top of the unit.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Please watch the video below to learn more from our video tutorial about the two different ways to login to your or security system.</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Log Into Your System at the DVR or NVR   2019 Firmware" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/_5UwnFL4WvU?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">In case you are unable to login due to a forgotten password, it is easy and secure to reset the password and gain entry into the unit. It is required that you be present at the recorder when following the video guide below on how to reset the login password. As shown in the video below, by answering some simple security questions you can quickly reset the login password.</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Reset Password on Your Security DVR" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/OSAkc3T2I_o?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image3-567w319h.png" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="567" height="319" class="wp-image-5153 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image3-567w319h.png" alt="image3 567w319h" title="How to use your Security Camera System 254" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image3-567w319h.png 567w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image3-567w319h-300x169.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 567px) 100vw, 567px" /></a></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">2. Viewing Live Video and Audio on a Security System</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">All of our </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">DVR Systems</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">HD NVR systems</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> allow multiple viewing options. You can view multiple cameras in a grid-view or view one camera at a time in full screen mode. Full screen mode also allows the user to listen to audio from </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">security cameras with built-in microphone</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">. To hear audio from cameras, all of the following conditions must be met:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Security camera has a built-in mic or you have an add-on </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">security camera microphone</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> connected to the DVR</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Audio sensing needs to be enabled on the system from the Encode menu</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">A monitor with speakers is connected to the system using the HDMI video input</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">For a comprehensive guide of the different viewing options offered by our security camera systems, please watch the following video:</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="Viewing Your Cameras on Your Recorder" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/ILRiVJek5FA?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Regardless of whether you have an </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">IP security camera system</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> or </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">DVR camera system</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">, both provide the user with two types of zoom:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Digital Zoom &#8211; digital magnification of the picture in live view or recorded video</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Optical Zoom &#8211; physical zoom using a camera lens to zoom-in when viewing live video</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">It is important to understand the difference between digital zoom and optical zoom, and the fact that optical zoom can only be used in live view mode. Below is a detailed video demonstration of each type of zoom function and how both can be utilized during live view to see objects far away. Using a 4MP security camera mounted 7ft above the object of interest, we show the power of optical zoom provided by a motorized zoom security camera to view objects in fine detail.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">If your system has </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">motorized zoom cameras</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> or a </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">outdoor PTZ camera</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> that you purchased from CCTV Camera World, they can be easily controlled using our surveillance video recorders. Regardless of whether the motorized cameras are HDCVI or IP cameras, or whether your recorder is a DVR, XVR, or NVR, the cameras can be controlled using the friendly GUI interface of our systems as shown in the following video.</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="Digital Zoom vs Motorized Optical Zoom" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/Avg-PFW7myM?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Control a PTZ Camera from your NVR or DVR" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/QqAmYTdfUIQ?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">3. Setting Recording Resolution</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">A common misconception about our camera systems is that all cameras have to be the same resolution, which is not the case. Cameras of different resolutions can be used on the same recorder in any of our systems, granted the cameras are within the maximum resolution limit of the recorder. This is true for systems consisting of Tribrid DVR, </span><a href="https://www.cctvcameraworld.com/cctv-security-dvrs.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">XVR</span></a><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">, or </span><a href="https://www.cctvcameraworld.com/network-video-recorders-ip-cameras.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">NVR</span></a><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> recorders.</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"><br />
Encoding settings can be set individually for each camera channel. Depending on the maximum recording resolution supported by the recorder and the camera, our </span><a href="https://www.cctvcameraworld.com/security-digital-video-recorders.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">surveillance recorders</span></a><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> allow up to 12MP recordings. All of our DVR and NVR recorders also have dual video encoding technology to provide two streams of video for each camera channel:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Main Stream &#8211; high resolution video stream that can be a maximum value equal to the resolution of the camera’s sensor, or a lower value selected by the user if bandwidth is being conserved.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Sub Stream &#8211; a lower resolution stream used when viewing multiple cameras in a grid on the computer or mobile device.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">The Encoding menu has several settings that can be set. A good understanding of the following settings is important in getting the most out of our security camera system purchase from CCTV Camera World.</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Codec &#8211; is the video encoding compression method used. It can be H.265 or H.264 depending on the model of the camera and recorder. H.265 video encoding provides up to 50% bandwidth savings over H.264. To use H.265, both the camera and surveillance recorder have to support H.265.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Resolution &#8211; is the size of the picture in pixels. When comparing video at the same angle of view (zoom length), higher resolution video provides facial detail farther away when using digital zoom for magnification. The resolution option available in this section depends on the camera resolution and whether it is compatible with the DVR or NVR. For example, a 12MP IP camera is not compatible with a </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">4K NVR</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> that supports a maximum of </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">8MP</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">. You would have to set the camera to 8MP or 4K resolution to use it with a 8MP 4K NVR. Likewise, a 4MP HDCVI camera is not compatible with a 1080P DVR unless the camera can be set to 1080P using a 4MP HDCVI DVR.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Frame Rate &#8211; allows for adjusting how many frames per second (fps) are recorded from your camera. It also depends on the capabilities of the camera and DVR. 30fps is Real Time video without any frame skipping. To conserve hard drive space 1080P and higher resolution cameras are commonly recorded at 15fps. You would use 30fps only for quick motion applications like </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">license plate capture cameras</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> or for cameras overlooking a cash register. Here is a quick video demonstrating the differences between video filmed at FPS settings of 30 thru 3fps.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="CCTVCameraWorld Review: Frames Per Second Comparison for CCTV cameras" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/bRmCKCjUX34?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Bitrate &#8211; is the amount of data per second that is saved for each security camera. Having a low bitrate would cause the video to be very pixelated as the video is compressed more. For example, attempting to save H.264 encoded 4MP resolution video of 20fps at 2mbps would cause the video to be pixelated and seem of poor quality. A bit rate that is too high would have diminishing returns as it wouldn’t improve video quality beyond a certain point.</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"><br />
We recommend first selecting the codec, resolution, and frame rate; our digital video recorders will recommend a bit rate based on the selected settings. As a guide, use the below bitrate settings for optimal video recording if hard drive space is of ample capacity in your system.</span></div>
<table style="width: 24.25573192239859cm; margin-left: 36pt;">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><strong><span style="color: #ffffff; font-size: 12pt;">Codec</span></strong></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><strong><span style="color: #ffffff; font-size: 12pt;">Resolution</span></strong></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><strong><span style="color: #ffffff; font-size: 12pt;">Frame Rate</span></strong></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><strong><span style="color: #ffffff; font-size: 12pt;">Bitrate (kbps)</span></strong></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">960H or D1</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">30fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">1024</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">720P</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">30fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">2048</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">1080P</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">30fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">4096</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">3MP</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">20fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">4096</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">4MP</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">20fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">4096</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">8MP</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">15fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">8192</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">H.264</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">12MP</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">15fps</span></p>
</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 12pt;">10240</span></p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">The in-depth video tutorial below discusses encoding settings available in your system and how to configure them.</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Set Camera Encoding Resolution in your DVR NVR 2019 Firmware" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/8wapbyTtBOg?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">4. Customizing Video Settings</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">We manufacture our cameras to produce the best possible picture quality automatically. Sometimes peculiar lighting scenarios in a scene may require customization. Our DVRs and NVRs allow multiple picture quality settings to be modified from the recorder as explained in the detailed video tutorial below. It is important to note that there is a difference in capabilities to modify image settings when comparing coax based cameras versus IP cameras.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Coax based cameras produce video that is encoded by the DVR, thus allowing picture quality to be modified before the video is saved by the DVR. In contrast, IP cameras encode video that is streamed to the NVR for saving the video stream; the video is not encoded by the NVR. Therefore, any changes made in the picture settings on the NVR must be communicated back to the IP security camera. If an incompatible IP camera is used with an NVR, such changes will not be communicated to the IP camera, and changes will not apply before video is encoded by the camera.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Our systems allow a wide variety of picture settings to be toggled depending on the camera specifications. In addition to picture brightness and contrast, the user can toggle image quality features such as backlighting, glare compensation (WDR), and image flip.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><a href="https://youtu.be/zW3g-dTV30w" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #0000ff; font-size: 11pt;">https://youtu.be/zW3g-dTV30w</span></a></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">5. Recording Method Configuration</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">All of our security systems offer a variety of video recording methods. Each security camera can be set to record independently and the user has the option to choose from the following recording methods:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Stop &#8211; no video is recorded at all</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Manual &#8211; continuous recording that is 24/7</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Scheduled &#8211; the user can set different times of the day for each day of the week</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Motion Detection &#8211; when pixel changes in the video are detected, video will be recorded automatically. The user can set different sensitivity settings and specify certain areas of the picture as motion zones for each camera to reduce false positive motion events.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">The </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">digital video recorders</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> in our systems even allow multiple recording methods for each camera. For example, cameras can be set to record all the time or during a portion of the day using the scheduled recording method, while also recording upon motion detection. This preserves video integrity in case a motion event is missed, and is very helpful when reviewing recorded security footage to allow the user to skip to points in the timeline when motion is detected. The video tutorial below is an in-depth guide on how to set the different recording methods for each camera in your surveillance system.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><a href="https://youtu.be/jRfV3N8sAqY" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #0000ff; font-size: 11pt;">https://youtu.be/jRfV3N8sAqY</span></a></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">6. Playback Recorded Video on your Surveillance System</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">CCTV Camera World’s security camera systems have a user-intuitive graphical interface to playback recorded video. Using a mouse connected to your recorder, it is easy to review recorded security footage in the Search menu. It takes 3 simple clicks to playback recorded video:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Select the month and day you would like to review footage from the calendar on the right hand side. The days highlighted in blue have recorded footage.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Select the cameras you would like to playback recorded video from by clicking the select boxes.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Select the point in the video timeline you would like to begin playback from.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Play Back Recorded Video on Your DVR NVR   2019 Firmware" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/D3MuFXhRku0?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">The video above is a comprehensive tutorial on how to playback recorded video, in which we cover:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">How to select a day from which to playback video</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">How to use the recorded video timeline for easy playback and fast-forward</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">How to select multiple camera channels</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">How to use Digital Zoom in recorded security footage to enhance detail</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">You can playback one camera or multiple cameras depending on the resolution of the recording and the playback capability of the recorder that is part of your system. Our 4000 series NVRs support playback of up to eight 1080P channels, while our 5000 series NVR support up to sixteen channel playback at 1080P. Stronger playback capability is available when playing video over the network using our free computer client software to playback video on a PC or Mac workstation.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">7. How to Download Video from a Security Camera System</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">When there is an incident, it’s important to have a camera system that allows easy download of security footage catching the perpetrator in the act. Our security camera systems are based on this simple principle to allow easy video download of a short video segment to a USB drive and playback on a Windows or Mac computer. To download video from any of our standalone recorders you will need a USB flash drive that is formatted with the NTFS or FAT  file system. The flash drive should not be more than 256GB. The video guide below on how to download footage from your security camera system walks you through the process.</span></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Back Up Video to a USB Drive   2019 Firmware" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/eLrseiys_YI?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Briefly, below is a list of simple steps on how to download video from a </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">DVR Camera System</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> or </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">HD IP Camera System</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> purchased from CCTV Camera World.</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Connect a USB flash drive to the USB port on the back of your DVR or NVR</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Go to the Search menu</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Select day, and camera channel you would like to view footage from</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Select the starting point by clicking on the timeline, and click on the snippet tool</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Select the end point by clicking on the timeline, and click on the snippet tool to finish marking a clip</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Click the Save button to download the video to USB</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<h3 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 11.25pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11pt;">8. How To View Downloaded Footage from a Security Camera System</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once security footage has been downloaded from your surveillance system, it can be reviewed on a Windows or Mac OS computer using our free playback software called Smart Player. You can download it here for </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">Windows</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and </span><span style="color: #006bb4; font-size: 11.5pt;">Mac</span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">. Here is a list of features of Smart Player which makes our systems one of the best security camera systems in the industry for video archiving and review:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Video Grid and Timeline reconstruction</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Playback one or multiple video files from one or multiple cameras in a grid</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Synchronous or asynchronous video playback from multiple cameras</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Digital Zoom and Pan</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Video timeline with markers for motion events and video analytics</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Up to 64X video playback speed</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Frame-by-frame review</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Snapshot capture of video of interest</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Video snippet of video of interest</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #070605; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #070605; font-size: 11.5pt;">Video conversion to AVI for playback using popular media players</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Playback Recorded Security Video on a PC" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/7lyJuUv8fgU?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p><iframe loading="lazy" title="How to Playback Recorded Security Video on Mac OS" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/rV9QEgjjjQE?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/how-to-use-your-security-camera-system.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		
		
		<media:content url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/PhJitqMDZJQ" medium="video" width="1280" height="720">
			<media:player url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/PhJitqMDZJQ" />
			<media:title type="plain">How to Setup a DVR Camera System</media:title>
			<media:description type="html"><![CDATA[In this video you will learn how to properly connect and power a DVR camera system using coax wire based security cameras.]]></media:description>
			<media:thumbnail url="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/how-to-setup-a-dvr-camera-system.jpg" />
			<media:rating scheme="urn:simple">nonadult</media:rating>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>LaView NVR setup and user guide</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/how-to/laview-nvr-setup-and-user-guide.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/how-to/laview-nvr-setup-and-user-guide.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Thu, 25 Jan 2024 17:30:49 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR General]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Add Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[alarm]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[android]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[dahua]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Domain Name]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR user]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[enable]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Factory Default Settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[how do]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP address]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip cam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iphone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[LaView DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mobile App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password Reset]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PoE switch]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Remote View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[reset the password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Search Tool]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[security camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security camera system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Storage]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[temporary password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[troubleshoot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[VMS Client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[wifi camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wireless]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=4664</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[LaView NVR setup and user guide, No, unfortunately each port on the back of the NVR is only designed for 1 camera....]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>LaView NVR setup and user guide, No, unfortunately each port on the back of the NVR is only designed for 1 camera. This will only allow about 2 cameras to show up. To use a switch, you’ll have to connect the switch to the same router that the NVR is connected to. Then you’ll proceed to setup the cameras over the network. Please see the Adding cameras over the network FAQ.</p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">Can I add cameras over the network?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes, you can add cameras over the network, they do not have to always be connected directly to the NVR. You can use a switch on the network that connected to the same router as your NVR. Please follow these steps to set this up:</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Connect the camera to your router using an Ethernet cable. Also, use a 12v power supply to power the camera.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Once the camera is powered and connected to the network, use our network search tool pick up the IP address. If you do not have the Search software, you can download it here (Make sure to disable any anti-virus or malware protection software before installation): </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/files/software/UpdateTool_V2.3.2.11.zip" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">https://www.laviewsecurity.com/files/software/UpdateTool_V2.3.2.11.zip</span></a></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">3.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Make sure the computer or laptop you are using is connected to the same network as the cameras and NVR</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">4.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Once the camera is on the network it should show up on the software. Make sure the IP address matches the network IP address of your network.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Log into the NVR and go to Camera&gt;Camera Management, click on Manual Add, and enter the IP information for the camera. Use the default username: admin password: 123456</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">Can I connect all the cameras to a switch, then the switch to one of the NVR ports?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">No, unfortunately each port on the back of the NVR is only designed for 1 camera. This will only allow about 2 cameras to show up. To use a switch, you’ll have to connect the switch to the same router that the NVR is connected to. Then you’ll proceed to setup the cameras over the network. Please see the Adding cameras over the network FAQ.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">Can I use my PC to view my cameras remotely?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes, you can use your external IP address to view your cameras and manipulate configuration via Web Browser. Our plug in will only work on Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. Once one of those browsers are open, type in your external IP address in the URL bar. If the port forwarding is done correctly, it should bring you to your NVR log in page. Log in using the same credentials as you would directly on the system. After you’re logged in, click the link to download and install the plug in. Restart the browser and click the “All Main” button on the left-hand side, and it should bring up your camera streams.</span></p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2>LaView NVR setup and user guide</h2>
<p>Read Also : <a href="https://www.xvraid.com/dvr-general/laview-dvr-user-guide.html">LaView DVR User Guide</a></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">Can I use port forwarding to setup remote viewing for my NVR?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes, you can setup your system via port forwarding. Although, this setup is recommended for more advanced users. You will need to note the IP Address of the NVR/DVR. To obtain this, go to Main Menu&gt;Maintenance&gt;System Info&gt;Network, your IP address will be the IPv4 address at the top. Then you’ll need to log into your router via web browser on a PC. Once logged in, you’ll need to add ports 80, 8000, and 554 to the port forwarding rules. For help with port forwarding for your router, contact the manufacturer or your ISP. There are also guides for a lot of various models of routers here </span><a href="https://portforward.com/" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">https://portforward.com</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">The port forwarding setup should look something like this:</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Application   Start     End         Protocol   IP Address</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">DVR1                 80           80         TCP            192.168.x.x.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">DVR2               8000      8000       TCP            192.168.x.x.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">DVR3                554         554       TCP            192.168.x.x.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To make sure test the ports on </span><a href="http://www.canyouseeme.org/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">www.canyouseeme.org</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">, and if they are open you can add the information to your phone app.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">LaView Net App Setup:</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Tap the Menu icon on the top right then Devices and press the (+) on the top right, choose “Manual Adding”.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Now enter the following for remote view:</span></div>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Alias: Remote View</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Register Mode: IP/Domain</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">3.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Address: IP address shown under “Your IP” at </span><a href="http://www.canyouseeme.org/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">www.canyouseeme.org</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">. (Make sure you are at DVR location for this step)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">4.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Port: 8000</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">5.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">User Name: admin</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">6.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Password: DVR password</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">7.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Camera No.: updates after “Save” on step 3.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">3.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Save on the top right.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">4.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Start Live View.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">*Make sure Wi-Fi is off on the phone when attempting the remote view.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="679" class="wp-image-4665 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-1.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/1-2.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 276" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-1.jpeg 384w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-1-170x300.jpeg 170w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How do I change the camera names on my system?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To change the camera names go to Menu&gt;Camera Management&gt;Advanced&gt;Basic&gt;IP Camera Name. In that section, you can edit the “Camera Name” Option, please click apply at the bottom before selecting another camera.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">How Do I Set up Remote Viewing for My Surveillance System?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Assuming you have the IP address of the NVR/DVR, there is a 4-step process to set up remote viewing. Learn more about </span><a href="https://support.laviewsecurity.com/hc/en-us/articles/115010911227-How-do-I-set-up-Remote-viewing-LV-D21xxxxx" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">remote view camera set-up</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> here.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Are There Any Cameras that Also Allow Me to Monitor the Audio as Well as the Video?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes, we have multiple solutions available to our clients. Here is our most popular </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/video-doorbell-camera-666.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">audio camera</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Does the Surveillance System Come with All of the Wires, Switches, and Accessories I Need?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes. The kit comes with everything you need to install the system and begin recording immediately, including  any necessary wire, </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/poe-switch.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">PoE switch</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">, or </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/5-a-power-adapter.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">AC 12v adapter</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> required for the system to operate.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">How far Apart Can I Set up My Wireless Cameras?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">The environment, particularly barriers such as cement walls, steel structures, or large trees, play a big role in transmission distance. A </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/product/wireless-cameras.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">wifi camera </span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">will typically transmit well for about 150 feet outdoors and 50 feet indoors.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How do I connect my NVR to my Phone?</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">Please download and use LaView Patrol:</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">Note: The app set up is done on an Android device, the iPhone set up will be almost identical.</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">Download then open the LaView Patrol application. Click on Local View to enter IP information.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="411" height="363" class="wp-image-4666 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-3.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Capture-3.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 277" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-3.jpeg 411w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-3-300x265.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 411px) 100vw, 411px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">2. Click on the “BACK” button. Tap the “+ Device” option to add a device.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="409" height="369" class="wp-image-4667 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-4.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Capture-4.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 278" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-4.jpeg 409w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-4-300x271.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 409px) 100vw, 409px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">3. Enter IP address information and click “Save”. Your new device will be on the previous screen. To obtain his IP address go to Main Menu&gt;Configuration&gt;Network. Your IP address will be the “IP address”. (Please note: This setup will only work inside the local network. To enable remote viewing, setup port forwarding and use your WAN IP address from your network. See port forwarding instructions.)</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="410" height="366" class="wp-image-4668 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-5.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Capture-5.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 279" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-5.jpeg 410w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-5-300x268.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 410px) 100vw, 410px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">4. Select new device and choose the channels you wish to see, click the Play/Live button.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="406" height="367" class="wp-image-4669 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-6.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Capture-6.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 280" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-6.jpeg 406w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-6-300x271.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 406px) 100vw, 406px" /></span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How Do I find my system’s IP address?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To find your system’s IP address go to Main Menu&gt;Configuration&gt;Network. The IP Address at the top is your local IP. If your IP address is 0.0.0.0 or 192.0.0.64, this means your system is offline. There are a few causes from this, but usually it’s a bad ethernet cable or the cable is not plugged in properly to either the NVR or Router. If those are checked to be correct, try restarting your router by unplugging it for a minute and restarting the DVR.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Do I Need Internet to Activate My Wireless Security Camera System?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Not exactly. You can set up your </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/product/wireless-cameras.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">wireless security camera system</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> without any internet at all, as this is not a requirement to begin recording. In order to access remote viewing on your mobile devices, you will need a live internet connection.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Does the Surveillance System Come with All of the Wires, Switches, and Accessories I Need?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes. The kit comes with everything you need to install the system and begin recording immediately, including  any necessary wire, </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/poe-switch.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">PoE switch</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">, or </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/5-a-power-adapter.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">AC 12v adapter</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> required for the system to operate.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Are There Any Cameras that Also Allow Me to Monitor the Audio as Well as the Video?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes, we have multiple solutions available to our clients. Here is our most popular </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/video-doorbell-camera-666.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">audio camera</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">What are the Advantages of Installing a Wifi Security Camera System?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">A </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/product/wireless-cameras.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">wifi security camera system</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> is significantly easier to install than a traditional system, because there is no need to run special wires to each wifi camera. This not only helps the day of installation, but also allows clients to position cameras in places they might not otherwise be able to place them.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How Do I format my HDD?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To format your HDD you’ll need to go to the Main Menu&gt;System&gt;Storage&gt;Management Tab. Once in the HDD menu, highlight the HDD information. Then click on “Format” at the bottom. Please note this will delete all information off the HDD.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How do I playback my recordings?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To playback videos go to Main Menu&gt;Playback. In that section choose your camera(s) on the right-hand side. Then double click any of the days on the calendar. This should automatically start playback for that day. Use the bar at the bottom to jump to a specific time during that day.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How Do I set up my recording schedule?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To set the recording schedule you’ll need to go to Main Menu&gt;Configuration&gt;Schedule&gt;Record Plan. In that section, you’ll have access to each channel’s recording schedule. The camera’s will automatically start and stop, recording, at desired times. If you want to set up only motion recording to each camera, select “Setting” on the right-hand side for the desired day. Choose MD for Motion Detection for the day and set a desired time, if not all day. Then you can copy the schedule to other days at the bottom. Click apply then ok, then apply again. You can now click copy at the bottom and copy the schedule to other channels as well. Or choose another channel at the top to setup a different schedule.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How Do I upgrade my system’s Firmware?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Make sure to download your firmware from our website here: </span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/download/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/download/</span></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Once the file is downloaded, extract the file and place it onto a flash drive. Then connect the flash drive to a USB port on the NVR.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><br />
Please go to Main Menu&gt;System&gt;Maintenance&gt;Version and select upgrade. Choose your Firmware file from the list.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="439" height="311" class="wp-image-4670 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-51.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/1-3.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 281" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-51.jpeg 439w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-51-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 439px) 100vw, 439px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="388" height="324" class="wp-image-4671 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-52.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/3-2.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 282" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-52.jpeg 388w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-52-300x251.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 388px) 100vw, 388px" /></span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How to I download videos off my NVR?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To download video footage you’ll need a flash drive inserted into one of the USB ports on the system. Then go to Main Menu&gt;Backup. Once in the Backup page, you’ll need to select the USB device from the list. Then click on “Backup” at the bottom and you’ll have the file selector screen show up. Make sure AVI is checked, then proceed to backup. You can select a specific channel along with date and time you want to backup. Click on Add, then the list should update. Each file will have a start and end time. Check mark the files desired for back up and click backup at the bottom. Once the progress bar finishes, you now have the files on your USB drive.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">I forgot the password for my system, how do I reset it?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Please email us at </span><a href="mailto:info@laviewusa.com"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">info@laviewusa.com</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> to reset the password for this system. In the email please mention you need a password reset along with the model number and date that displays on the main view of the system. A technician will reply with some instructions and a temporary password for your system.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">I have port forwarding setup, but my external IP address keeps changing. Can I fix this?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Yes, you can either contact your ISP and ask them for a static IP address or setup a DDNS. LaView does offer a free DDNS service that you can setup with these instructions:</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">To set up a DDNS please go to </span><a href="http://www.laviewddns.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">www.laviewddns.com</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> and register.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">After registering and creating your domain name we need to enable the DDNS feature.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Please go to Main Menu&gt;App Center&gt;DDNS.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Enable DDNS: √ (Checked)</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">DDNS Type: Laview</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Domain Name: “yourdomainname”.laviewddns.com (“yourdomainname” is the name you created don’t use that or the “ “)</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">User Name: your email account used for www.laviewddns.com</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Password: password used for www.laviewddns.com</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Server IP: Laviewddns.com</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Port: 8000</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Please note, in order for the DDNS to work, port forwarding must be setup. You can now use your Domain name to access your system instead of IP.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">I have some trees in my yard that are triggering my motion detection. How can I fix this?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">You can setup areas for your motion recording within the camera’s configuration. Go to Main Menu&gt;Configuration&gt;Alarm&gt;Set Area “Setting”. In that section, you’ll have a preview of one of the camera along with a red grid over it. You can clear the area and only draw specific areas with motion detection. Or you can just remove the areas by clicking and dragging over the red boxes. Everything in red will trigger motion, anything clear will not.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">Which mobile app do I need?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">-If you have DVR starting from </span><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">LV-N52xxxx</span></strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> please download “LaView Patrol”</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="99" class="wp-image-4672 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-55-100w99h-1.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Capture-62-150x150.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 283"></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vss.laviewpatrol&amp;hl=en" target="&quot;_blank&quot;" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="150" height="50" class="wp-image-4673 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-56-150w50h-1.png" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/GooglePlayStore.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 284"></a></span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">  </span><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/laview-patrol/id1113888683?mt=8" target="&quot;_blank&quot;" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="150" height="50" class="wp-image-4674 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-57-150w50h-1.png" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Apple-AppStore.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 285"></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">-If you have DVR starting from </span><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">LV-N9xxxx, LV-D11xxxx, LV-D21xxx, or LV-T94xxxx, </span></strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">please download “LaView Net”</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="99" class="wp-image-4675 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-58-100w99h.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Capture-61-150x150.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 286"></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.Laview.LaViewNet&amp;hl=en" target="&quot;_blank&quot;" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="150" height="50" class="wp-image-4676 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-59-150w50h.png" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/GooglePlayStore.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 287"></a></span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">  </span><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/laview-net/id932299214?mt=8" target="&quot;_blank&quot;" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="150" height="50" class="wp-image-4677 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-60-150w50h.png" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Apple-AppStore.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 288"></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">-If you have DVR starting from </span><strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">LV-D04xxxx, or LV-D51xxxx</span></strong><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">  please download “LaView Mobile”</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="99" class="wp-image-4678 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-61-100w99h.jpeg" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/laview-mobile-150x150.jpg" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 289"></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vss.laview&amp;hl=en" target="&quot;_blank&quot;" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="150" height="50" class="wp-image-4679 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-62-150w50h.png" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/GooglePlayStore.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 290"></a></span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">  </span><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/laview-mobile/id955357794?mt=8" target="&quot;_blank&quot;" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="150" height="50" class="wp-image-4680 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-63-150w50h.png" alt="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/cms/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Apple-AppStore.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 291"></a></span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">The system worked seamlessly until last week when it suddenly shut off and now won&#8217;t come back on</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Would suggestion you follow the instruction below for troubleshooting,</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Please ensure the cameras are connected, would suggest you to connect them directly to the PoE ports at the back of the system.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">At the day time, try to cover the camera lens with your hands to see if there is a IR red light on the problematic cameras. And please also check if the camera goes hot when it is connected.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">3.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">The camera appears not to get powe if there is no light and heat. We will need to check if it is the camera/port/cable issue.</span></div>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">At first, please switch the problematic camera to the workable PoE ports to test. You can also go to your PoE Configuration setting to check the power.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 30pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">If it still doesn&#8217;t work with another port, please exchange the cable to check again. If possible, you can also add the camera to another system to confirm the problem.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="577" height="330" class="wp-image-4681 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-73.png" alt="image1.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 292" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-73.png 577w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-73-300x172.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 577px) 100vw, 577px" /></span></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Please contact our support team for further support if it does not help.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">What should I do if I connect a LaView Saturn Camera to LV-N96, LV-N95, LV-N98 series NVR but only get 720P maximum resolution in main stream?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">If you only get 720p in mainstream, it means the IP camera is set to H.265. Please use the following instruction to switch the camera to H.264 compression.</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Connect the LaView Saturn Camera to a PoE switch or a Router (12V DC power supply is needed to connect to non-PoE switch or a router)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Install the VMS Client software on your PC (</span><a href="https://dahuawiki.com/images/Software/SmartPSS/General_SMARTPSS-FLIR_Win32_ChnEng_IS_V2.002.0000007.0.T.190122.zip" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">https://dahuawiki.com/images/Software/SmartPSS/General_SMARTPSS-FLIR_Win32_ChnEng_IS_V2.002.0000007.0.T.190122.zip</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">3.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Add the camera in the VMS Client Software</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">4.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Go to Remote Configuration Menu</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">5.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Go to Camera &gt; Encode</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">6.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Change the Encode Type to H.264H for both mainstream and substream</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">7.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Save the setting</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="434" class="wp-image-4682 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-75.png" alt="https://support.laviewsecurity.com/hc/article_attachments/360030375153/mceclip0.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 293" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-75.png 624w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-75-300x209.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">What features are LaView Saturn Series Camera compatible with LaView (LV-N95, LV-N96, LV-N98, LV-N99) Series NVR?</span></h1>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">LaView Saturn Series IP Cameras have many great features designed to work with LaView Saturn Series NVR. If you already have a LaView NVR and wish to add a LaView Saturn IP Camera, you can do so using this instruction. However, we recommend using LaView Saturn Series IP Cameras with a LaView Saturn Series NVR for best performance.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">The following features of LaView Saturn IP Camera are compatible with LaView Series NVR:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Live view (up to 8MP)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Playback (up to 8MP)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Video Recording</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Motion Detection</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Schedule Recording</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Image adjustment (Resolution, Frame Rate etc)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">WDR, BLC (Modified in Camera menu separately)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Mobile App Viewing (Using LaView Net or LaView Connect)</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">The following features may NOT be compatible</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">IVS (or VCA)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">265 and H.265+</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">EPoE</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How to reset LaView Saturn IP Camera</span></h1>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Open the camera case using screwdriver or hex key</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Locate the Reset button</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="335" class="wp-image-4683 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-77.png" alt="https://support.laviewsecurity.com/hc/article_attachments/360029561314/mceclip0.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 294" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-77.png 384w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-77-300x262.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">3. Press and hold the reset button for at least 5 seconds until the camera restarts, and then the camera will be restored to factory default settings.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 24pt;"><span style="color: #434343; font-size: 34pt;">How to connect a LaView Saturn Series IP Camera to a Non-Saturn Series NVR</span></h1>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333; font-size: 12pt;">1.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Connect the LaView Saturn IP Camera to a PoE switch or a Router (12V DC power supply is needed to connect to non-PoE switch or a router)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">2.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Install the IP Search Tool on your PC (</span><a href="https://www.laviewsecurity.com/files/saturn/Saturn%20Series%20General_IP%20Config%20Tool_Eng_V4.09.11.T.20180403.exe" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="color: #158ec2; font-size: 11pt;">https://www.laviewsecurity.com/files/saturn/Saturn%20Series%20General_IP%20Config%20Tool_Eng_V4.09.11.T.20180403.exe</span></a><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">3.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Activate the IP camera in the IP Search Tool</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">4.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Modify the IP address by clicking on ‘Modify IP’</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="433" class="wp-image-4684 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-79.png" alt="https://support.laviewsecurity.com/hc/article_attachments/360029561234/mceclip0.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 295" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-79.png 624w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-79-300x208.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">5a. If you are connecting the camera to the NVR PoE port, set up the Target IP to 192.168.254.xxx (xxx being a random number from 2-254), and Gateway to  192.168.254.1, Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0. Then unplug the camera from the PoE switch or Router and connect it to the NVR using Cat5e cable.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">5b. If you are connecting the camera via LAN, use DHCP or set up the IP address to your network range. For example: Target IP 192.168.0.217, Subnet 255.255.255.0, Gateway 192.168.0.1</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">6. Go the NVR Menu =&gt; Camera =&gt; Camera.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">7. Click on the channel which the camera is connected to (ie if the camera is connected to port 3 on the back of the NVR, click on channel 3). If you are connecting the camera via LAN, Click on any unused channel.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"> </span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="285" class="wp-image-4685 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-80.png" alt="https://support.laviewsecurity.com/hc/article_attachments/360030374773/mceclip1.png" title="LaView NVR setup and user guide 296" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-80.png 624w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/Picture-80-300x137.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">8. Change ‘Plug and Play’ to ‘Manual’ and enter the camera IP address (192.168.254.xxx or 192.168.0.217 as in previous example)</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">9. Change protocol to ONVIF and Management port is 80</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">10. Enter user name and password you set up when you activated the camera in step 3.</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">11.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Apply the setting and wait for the camera to be connected.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 15pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #333333;">12.</span><span style="color: #333333; font-size: 11pt;">Adjust video setting such as resolution and frame rate in Parameter menu.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/how-to/laview-nvr-setup-and-user-guide.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/general/idvr-pro-hd-cctv-dvr-setup.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/general/idvr-pro-hd-cctv-dvr-setup.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Thu, 28 Dec 2023 10:18:12 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[General]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[alarm]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Alarm Input]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[analog]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[android]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[audio record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[enable]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Factory Default Settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Initial Setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iphone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mac Viewer]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mobile App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mobile Apps]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mouse]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Onvif]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Outdoor Security Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password Reset]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[reset the password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[RK IP Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[security camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security camera system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security Cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[tilt]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wireless]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[zoom]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=4457</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Technical Support Articles and How-to Guides for iDVR-PRO DVRs This page contains technical support and setup information for iDVR-PRO CCTV surveillance DVRs...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Technical Support Articles and How-to Guides for iDVR-PRO DVRs<br />
This page contains technical support and setup information for iDVR-PRO CCTV surveillance DVRs from CCTV Camera Pros. You can also find user manuals here. The iDVR-PRO product line contains 4 &#8220;series&#8221; of DVRs which have two different user interfaces. The original iDVR-PRO series includes the iDVR-PRO8 and iDVR-PRO16 which are analog CCTV DVRs (no HD security camera support). The latest iDVR-PRO hybrid HD security camera DVRs and come in an &#8220;A&#8221;, &#8220;M&#8221;, and &#8220;H&#8221; series and support AHD and TVI type cameras (up to 1080p resolution). Before the hybrid versions were released, the &#8220;A&#8221; and &#8220;H&#8221; series was also available in a 960H analog format version. The 960H models and the new hybrid HD iDVR-PROs use a new and improved user interface, however, all 4 series (the original iDVR-PRO, A, and H series) use the same client applications (DVR viewer software apps) for iOS, Android, Mac, and Windows.</p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Getting started guide for </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">-PRO analog CCTV / HD security camera DVRs.</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="715" height="175" class="wp-image-4458 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40-1.jpeg" alt="HD CCTV DVR Setup" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 321" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40-1.jpeg 715w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40-1-300x73.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 715px) 100vw, 715px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">These are the initial setup steps that CCTV Camera Pros recommend that customers follow for </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO HD-CCTV DVRs. These instructions were written for the new </span><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/HD-Security-Camera-DVRs-s/972.htm" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">hybrid </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO DVRs which support CCTV, HD-TVI, and AHD cameras</span></a><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">. This article covers the initial configuration setup that is recommended before getting into any other advanced setup of your new CCTV DVR.</span></p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2>iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup</h2>
<p>Read More : <a href="https://www.xvraid.com/general/best-nvr-camera-systems-2023.html">Best NVR camera systems 2023</a></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Setup Topics</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">Here are the setup topics that are covered in this article in the order they should be performed.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">Connect Monitor, Power Supply, USB Mouse</span><a id="connect-monitor"></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">After you unpack your new DVR, locate the power supply and USB mouse that is included. Connect the mouse to the USB port on the front or back of the DVR. The USB mouse is the easiest way to navigate the user interface of the DVR. You can also use the IR remote control if you prefer. Please note that a wireless remote is not included with </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PROA models.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Next, connect a monitor to your DVR. Even if you do not plan on keeping a monitor connected to your DVR because you will manage your DVR over your network, the initial setup still requires a monitor to be connected.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Supported Monitors</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Please note that all </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PROs models have an HDMI and VGA monitor ports. YOU MUST use a widescreen format HD monitor that supports one of the following video resolutions.</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">1920 x 1080</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">1280 x 720</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">1280 x 1024</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">1080p resolution (1920 x 1080) is recommended for the best experience.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Connect the power supply included with your DVR to the power input on the back of the DVR, then to a power source (wall outlet). The DVR will boot up.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">Test Cameras </span><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">Before</span><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;"> Installing</span><a id="test-cameras"></a></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using any new cameras with your </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">, we highly recommend bench testing them before you mount them. What does bench testing mean? It simply means that you connect each camera to a power supply and monitor before you mount them. This can be accomplished by connecting each camera to your DVR and viewing them on the monitor that you connected to your DVR.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Testing your cameras before installation has the following benefits.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"></span> Confirm all cameras are working properly before mounting them.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"></span> Opportunity to also test all of your cables if you are using <span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">premade CCTV cables</span>.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"></span> Configure video inputs on DVR for CCTV. AHD, or HD-TVI type cameras (details below).</p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"></span> If any of your cameras use an OSD or varifocal lens, it gives you the opportunity to get familiar with these operations, which is much easier to do on the ground rather than up on a ladder.</p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Using Pre-made Cables to Wire Your System</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/Premade-Siamese-Coax-Cable-Wiring-Guide-s/1019.htm" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="231" class="wp-image-4459 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-44.jpeg" alt="CCTV Camera Premade-Cable Installation" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 322" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-44.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-44-300x99.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using pre-made cables to install your system, we have a complete </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">premade Siamese cable wiring guide</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> that you can find here. Please reference it to see many examples of how pre-made cables can be used to wire analog CCTV and </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">HD CCTV cameras</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">. It is a great reference &#8211; especially if this is your first installation.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Using RG59 Cable Spools to Wire Your System</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/RG59-Siamese-Coax-Cable-Wiring-Guide-s/1021.htm" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="231" class="wp-image-4460 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-46.jpeg" alt="CCTV Camera Premade-Cable Installation" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 323" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-46.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-46-300x99.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">spools of RG59 Siamese cable</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> to install your system, we have a complete </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">RG59 Siamese cable wiring guide</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> that you can find here. Please reference it to see how-to use RG59 coax cable to wire an </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO system with analog CCTV and </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">HD security cameras</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> &#8211; with individual power supplies or a </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">power supply box</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">. It is a great reference &#8211; especially if this is your first installation.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">DVR Interface Introduction</span><a id="dvr"></a></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Watch this video to learn how easy it is to navigate the </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO using the USB mouse that is included. This is a great video to get familiar with how to navigate the user interface.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="382" height="287" class="wp-image-4461 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-56-382w287h.jpeg" alt="https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2Fkb1H-E9Ho/hqdefault.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 324" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-56-382w287h.jpeg 382w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-56-382w287h-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 382px) 100vw, 382px" /></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">Time / Date Setup</span><a id="time-date"></a></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">It is important to set up the time, date, and </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">timezone</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> of your DVR before you begin recording operations. Otherwise, you will be unable to figure out the true time that an event occurred. Follow these steps to set up the time and date on your DVR.</span></p>
<div class="ol" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">1.</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Using the USB mouse, click on the menu button and select System Setup.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">2.</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">From the System menu, select Time / Date.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">3.</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">On the time / date setup screen, select your correct time, date, and time zone.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">4.</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">You can also choose to have your DVR&#8217;s time and date automatically synchronized with an online time service.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">5.</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">When you are done, click Apply, then Close.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">CCTV, AHD, HD-TVI Camera Setup</span><a id="HD-setup"></a></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> hybrid surveillance DVRs support analog CCTV and HD-over-Coax cameras (AHD and HD-TVI formats supported). Each channel of an </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO can be configured to use any of those camera types.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Watch this video to see how to specify CCTV, AHD, and HD-TVI camera types for each channel of your DVR. Important Update! The latest </span><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/Surveillance-DVRs-s/23.htm" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO surveillance DVRs</span></a><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> now automatically detect the video format of each camera. The newest models no longer need to be manually configured as the video explains.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="403" height="303" class="wp-image-4462 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-63-403w303h.jpeg" alt="https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nze7QI-VmqI/hqdefault.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 325" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-63-403w303h.jpeg 403w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-63-403w303h-300x226.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 403px) 100vw, 403px" /></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">Video Recording Setup</span><a id="recording"></a></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> surveillance DVRs support the following video recording modes.</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Continuous Recording</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Scheduled Recording</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Motion Detection</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Alarm Triggered</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Panic Recording</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Motion / Alarm Recording</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Watch this video to see how to set up recording on your DVR.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="387" height="290" class="wp-image-4463 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-65-387w290h.jpeg" alt="https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AyE6ZaQ2uQ8/hqdefault.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 326" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-65-387w290h.jpeg 387w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-65-387w290h-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 387px) 100vw, 387px" /></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Additional Setup</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">This article is our recommended starting point to set up a new </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO surveillance DVR. There are many additional configuration options that the </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO is capable of. Please refer to these pages for more support and setup information related to </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-E DVRs.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 16pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 18pt;">Surveillance DVR Dual Monitor / Spot Monitor Live Display Setup</span></h1>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">for</span> <span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">-PRO HD / CCTV Camera DVRs</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="715" height="175" class="wp-image-4464 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-68.jpeg" alt="Surveillance DVR Camera Display" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 327" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-68.jpeg 715w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-68-300x73.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 715px) 100vw, 715px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">This article will go over how to set up the dual monitor / spot monitor feature for </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO HD surveillance DVRs</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">. All </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PROs have high definition HDMI and VGA outputs. </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> A models only support dual monitor mode. The </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO H series DVRs support dual monitor and spot monitor modes. In spot monitor mode, can use the HDMI output as the main monitor and VGA as a spot monitor or vice versa. This is a good solution for users that need to see a continuous live view their security cameras on one monitor and use the other monitor for DVR management such as general viewing, playback, settings, etc. You can </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">watch a demo video here</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Dual Monitor</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/video-display/CCTV-DVR-Dual-Monitor.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="710" height="218" class="wp-image-4465 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-69-710w218h.jpeg" alt="CCTV Surveillance DVR Dual Monitor Display" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 328" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-69-710w218h.jpeg 710w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-69-710w218h-300x92.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 710px) 100vw, 710px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">In dual monitor mode, both the HDMI and VGA outputs the main display (mirror mode). Dual monitor mode is supported by A and H model </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR-PROs</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Spot Monitor</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/video-display/CCTV-DVR-Spot-Monitor.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="710" height="221" class="wp-image-4466 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-71-710w221h.jpeg" alt="CCTV Surveillance DVR Spot Monitor Display" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 329" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-71-710w221h.jpeg 710w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-71-710w221h-300x93.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 710px) 100vw, 710px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR-PRO8H</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> and iDVR-PRO16H models support spot monitor mode, in addition to dual monitor. This allows one monitor to display a customizable continuous live video feed, while the other monitor displays the main monitor for DVR operations such as configuration and recorded video playback.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 13.5pt;">Spot Monitor Setup and Live Camera Display</span><a id="video-demo"></a></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="480" height="360" class="wp-image-4467 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-78.jpeg" alt="https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Bevc_aVF9HM/hqdefault.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 330" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-78.jpeg 480w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-78-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 480px) 100vw, 480px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Watch this video to see the spot monitor setup at CCTV Camera Pros office using an iDVR-PRO16H DVR and 16 HD CCTV cameras (1080p AHD and 1080p HD-TVI type cameras).</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">HD Spot Monitor Setup</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Follow these instructions to select between dual monitor and spot monitor modes.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">1. By default, the </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PROM and H series DVRs are to set to output duplicate displays on both the VGA and HDMI outputs.</span><br />
<span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><br />
To set up one of the displays as a spot monitor, select </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Menu</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> &gt; </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">System Setup</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> &gt; </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Display </span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">&gt; </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Dual Monitor</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span><br />
<span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><br />
Next, change the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Display Mode from Duplicate These Displays</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> to </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Main Monitor + Spot</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span><br />
<span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><br />
Once we have it set to </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Main Monitor + Spot</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">, to the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Display Type</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> and set which monitor you would like to run as the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Main Monitor</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> and select which you would like to use as the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Spot</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">NOTE:</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> We recommend keeping the</span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> Display Resolution set to </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Auto</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">. This way it picks up the best resolution for your monitor&#8217;s spec.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="392" class="wp-image-4468 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-81.jpeg" alt="Surveillance DVR Dual Monitor Setup" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 331" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-81.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-81-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></span><br />
<span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><br />
2. Next, you can setup custom display screens and camera ordering for the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Spot Monitor </span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">display. Click the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Edit </span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">button next to </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Spot</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">. You can now select the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Add View Type</span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> button to select the cameras you would like to display on the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Spot </span></strong><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">monitor. You may configure up to 16 displays that consist of single, quad, 9 channel, and 16 camera screen views.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4469 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-82.jpeg" alt="CCTV DVR Sport Monitor Setup" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 332" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-82.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-82-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></span></p>
<p><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">Once you have the cameras / views setup, you can select the </span><strong><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">Apply </span></strong><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">button. That is it, you have successfully setup the </span><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">-PRO DVR to run Dual Monitors.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Legacy Model Spot Monitor Support</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Our legacy, non HD </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO models (analog CCTV only), use an analog BNC output for the spot monitor. You can refer to this article for </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">analog spot Monitor Output Setup</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> information.</span><br />
<span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><br />
Please, continue below for setup instructions if you have an </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR-PRO8H</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> or </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR-PRO16H</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> that supports </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">HD over coax cameras</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> (AHD and HD-TVI cameras).</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Surveillance Video Recording Setup for </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">-PRO HD H.264 CCTV DVRs</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="715" height="175" class="wp-image-4470 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-88.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/960H-H.264-CCTV-DVR-Recording-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 333" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-88.jpeg 715w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-88-300x73.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 715px) 100vw, 715px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Follow these instructions to set up the surveillance video recording type for </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO HD security camera / H.264 DVRs from CCTV Camera Pros</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Recording Modes</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;">-PRO</span><span style="color: #222222; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"> CCTV DVRs support the following recording modes.</span></p>
<p><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Continuous Recording &#8211; records around the clock 24 hours per day.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Scheduled Recording &#8211; records continuously according to a set schedule.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 10.5pt;">Motion Detection Recording</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;"> &#8211; records when motion is detected by a camera.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Alarm &#8211; records when an external alarm is triggered.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Motion / Alarm &#8211; records when motion is detected or when an alarm is triggered</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Motion &#8211; records continuously and when motion is detected (user can set up different frame rates and resolutions)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Alarm &#8211; records continuously and when an alarm is triggered (user can set up different frame rates and resolutions)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Motion / Alarm &#8211; records continuously and when motion is detected or an alarm is triggered (user can set up different frame rates and resolutions)</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #222222; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 10.5pt;">Panic Recording &#8211; triggered when a user presses the panic button on the DVR. It causes the DVR to record continuously on all cameras.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Setup Instructions</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">To configure the recording mode that you want to use, hover the mouse cursor over the lower part of the screen. The DVR main menu will appear. Click Menu &gt; Record Setup.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Recording-Setup.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4471 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-89-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Recording-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 334" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-89-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-89-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">The following screen will be displayed which shows all of the recording modes that the DVR supports.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4472 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-90-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-Security-DVR-Recording-Mode-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 335" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-90-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-90-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></span></p>
<p><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you want to set up a recording schedule for continuous, motion, or alarm based recording, you must click the drop-down box on the above screen and change the mode from </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">autoconfiguration</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> to manual configuration. </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Autoconfiguration</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> sets all cameras to record at the max resolution and frame rate for continuous, motion, and alarm type of recording.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you select manual configuration, you can set different choose a different frame rate, resolution, and video quality / compression for each camera (even for different time frames). Using the mouse, select the recording type that you want to set up.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Continuous Recording</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you select manual configuration then continuous recording, the following screen is displayed which lets you setup unique configurations for each camera and you can also click on the schedule tab to set a schedule for when each camera will record continuously (effectively making this scheduled recording mode).</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Continuous-Recording.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4473 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-92-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Continuous-Recording.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 336" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-92-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-92-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; font-size: 10.5pt;">Motion Detection Recording</span><a id="motion-detection"></a></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you select manual configuration, then motion recording, the following screen is displayed. One this screen users can choose the resolution, frame rate, quality, and whether audio recording is on or off (surveillance microphone required) for each camera when motion is detected.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Motion-Recording-Setup.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4474 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-94-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Motion-Recording-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 337" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-94-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-94-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Users may configure each camera for motion detection recording by selecting the motion sensor option under the camera menu. Users can turn motion detection on / off, enable an icon to be displayed on the screen when motion is detected (Mark field), and sensitivity level for each camera. Users can also define specific zones within each camera view for motion detection by selecting the edit area button.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/cctv-camera-motion-detection.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4475 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-95-700w394h.jpeg" alt="Motion Detection Recording CCTV Camera" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 338" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-95-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-95-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">The below screenshot shows how to mark the door in this room as the only area that motion detection will be applied to.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/cctv-camera-motion-detection-zone-setup.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4476 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-96-700w394h.jpeg" alt="Motion Detection Recording CCTV Camera Zone Setup" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 339" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-96-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-96-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Alarm Recording</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you select manual configuration, then alarm recording, the following screen is displayed. One this screen users can choose the resolution, frame rate, quality, and whether audio recording is on or off (surveillance microphone required) for each camera when an external alarm (such as door sensor, PIR motion sensor, </span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">etc</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">) is triggered.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-Surveillance-DVR-Alarm-Recording-Setup.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4477 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-98-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-Surveillance-DVR-Alarm-Recording-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 340" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-98-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-98-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 15pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="background: #222; width: 0; height: 0; display: inline-block;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Motion Detection Recording</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">If you select intensive motion recording, then you may configure different recording resolutions, frame rates, and video quality for when each camera is recording continuously and while motion is detected. The idea behind this recording mode is to conserve space when there is no motion (but still record) and record at a higher resolution, higher frame rate, and quality when there is motion detected.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Intensive-Motion-Recording-Setup.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4478 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-100-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Intensive-Motion-Recording-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 341" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-100-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-100-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Alarm Recording</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">This mode is very similar to intensive motion recording. If you select intensive alarm recording, then you may configure different recording resolutions, frame rates, and video quality for when each camera is recording continuously and when an alarm is triggered. The idea behind this recording mode is to conserve space when there is no alarm (by recording at a lower frame rate and resolution) and record at a higher resolution, higher frame rate, and quality when an alarm is triggered.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Intensive Motion / Alarm Recording</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">This mode is also very similar to intensive motion recording. If you select intensive motion / alarm recording, then you may configure different recording resolutions, frame rates, and video quality for when each camera is recording continuously vs. when an alarm is triggered or motion is detected. The idea behind this recording mode is to conserve space when there is no alarm or motion (by recording at a lower frame rate and resolution) and record at a higher resolution, higher frame rate and quality when an alarm is triggered or motion is detected.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #1b60b6; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Intensive-Motion-Alarm-Recording-Setup.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4479 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-101-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/H.264-CCTV-DVR-Intensive-Motion-Alarm-Recording-Setup.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 342" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-101-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-101-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 10.5pt;">Panic Recording</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">The panic recording settings control the video resolution, frame rate (FPS), video quality and whether audio surveillance is on or off when panic recording is triggered on the DVR. Panic recording is enabled when a user presses the panic button on the front of the DVR or from the user interface menu using a mouse. When panics recording is enabled, this overrides any current recording mode (schedule, motion, alarm, etc. and sets all cameras to continuous recording).</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #113d73; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 10.5pt;"><a href="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/960H-CCTV-DVR-Panic-Recording.jpg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="700" height="394" class="wp-image-4480 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-102-700w394h.jpeg" alt="https://www.cctvcamerapros.com/v/images/H.264-DVR/iDVR-PRO/recording/960H-CCTV-DVR-Panic-Recording.jpg" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 343" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-102-700w394h.jpeg 700w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-102-700w394h-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></a></span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 16pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 18pt;">Avoid Security Camera Motion Detection False Alarms</span></h1>
<h2 style="margin-top: 15pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">How-to adjust motion detection sensitivity &amp; mask areas on </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">iDVR</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">-PRO CCTV surveillance DVRs</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="715" height="175" class="wp-image-4481 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-136.jpeg" alt="CCTV Security Camera Motion Detection" title="iDVR-PRO HD CCTV DVR Setup 344" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-136.jpeg 715w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-136-300x73.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 715px) 100vw, 715px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 7.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">Anyone who uses video motion detection with a security camera system knows that it can be tricky to get the motion settings just right in order to avoid false alarms. It is especially tricky with outdoor security cameras because of all the things in nature that create motion. CCTV DVRs typically have sensitivity and motion mask areas to help. This article will guide </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">iDVR</span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">-PRO surveillance DVR</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;"> users of how-to setup the sensitivity settings and motion detection mask areas so that video motion detection can work as effectively as possible with little or no false alarms. You may also be interested in these instructions which explain </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #1b60b6; font-size: 11pt;">how to set up motion detection recording on your DVR using an external alarm input</span><span style="color: #222222; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/general/idvr-pro-hd-cctv-dvr-setup.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		<enclosure url="https://videos.cctvcamerapros.com/downloads/dvr-video-export/AHD-D4W-HD-Dome-Security-Camera.avi" length="0" type="video/avi" />
<enclosure url="https://videos.cctvcamerapros.com/downloads/dvr-video-export/AHD-AD24H-Infrared-Dome-Security-Camera.avi" length="0" type="video/avi" />
<enclosure url="https://videos.cctvcamerapros.com/downloads/dvr-video-export/HD-D180-180-lens-security-camera.avi" length="0" type="video/avi" />
<enclosure url="https://videos.cctvcamerapros.com/downloads/dvr-video-export/HD-TVI-AD8-Vandal-Dome-HD-Security-Camera.avi" length="0" type="video/avi" />
<enclosure url="https://videos.cctvcamerapros.com/downloads/dvr-video-export/PTZ-HD-20-IR-HD-PTZ-Camera.avi" length="0" type="video/avi" />

		<media:content url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/a_kGwJGy2uU" medium="video" width="960" height="720">
			<media:player url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/a_kGwJGy2uU" />
			<media:title type="plain">Audio Surveillance Microphone for CCTV Cameras</media:title>
			<media:description type="html"><![CDATA[http://www.cctvcamerapros.com/Audio-Surveillance-Microphone-p/mic-cctv-02.htm - The MIC-CCTV-02 model audio surveillance microphone from CCTV Camera Pros can...]]></media:description>
			<media:thumbnail url="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/audio-surveillance-microphone-fo.jpg" />
			<media:rating scheme="urn:simple">nonadult</media:rating>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/general/gamut-recorder-installation-and-user-guide.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/general/gamut-recorder-installation-and-user-guide.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 12 Dec 2023 09:05:10 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[DVR General]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[General]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Add IP camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[alarm]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[android]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Config Tool]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Manager]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[enable]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Firmware updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[GAMUT RECORDER]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[h.265]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[hikvision]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How to use]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Initial Setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Internet Explorer]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip cam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[latest firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mobile App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Monitor]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mouse]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[network setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Onvif]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password Reset]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[QR code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Quick Start Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[recorder password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Remote View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[reset the password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[RXCamView]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Surveillance Client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[temporary password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[tilt]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Verification Code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[zoom]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=4309</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide, Gamut are manufacturers of professional-grade security and CCTV solutions, all built to withstand the most demanding...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide, Gamut are manufacturers of professional-grade security and CCTV solutions, all built to withstand the most demanding CCTV trade and commercial applications. Since being founded in Bristol in 2009, Gamut cameras and recorders are used by a wide base of tradesmen and installers, servicing the home, business and local government markets. To ensure reliable build and picture quality, all products are put through a rigorous testing process both in-house and in the field before they allowed to bear the Gamut badge.</p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 33pt;">How to reset the password to your Gamut recorder</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">This article will show you how to find the necessary information you need to send us so that we can help to reset the password for your Gamut recorder.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">First, turn the recorder on and move your mouse to the bottom of the camera live view screen. A blue bar will appear at the bottom; click on the &#8216;i&#8217; symbol that I have marked in red in the screenshot below.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="600" height="342" class="wp-image-4310 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-1-600w.jpeg" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43131312092/original/aR7XH6SBwRUWbVtAJj7Znpv7ydTfwDbjyg.jpeg?1590568098" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 370" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-1-600w.jpeg 600w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-1-600w-300x171.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">This will open up a page of information about the recorder including the MAC address.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="434" height="354" class="wp-image-4311 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-2.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43131311128/original/XiGaoqMkyMAfKnQY9pgp5E3sQhbVmsY6JQ.png?1590567895" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 371" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-2.png 434w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-2-300x245.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 434px) 100vw, 434px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">You will need to send the MAC address and the date and time on the recorder, even if the time/date on the recorder is not actually correct. </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">This is very important, because we will generate a temporary password for you which is created based on the unique MAC address of the device and the time and date on it. If the date and time are accurate, just say that, or if you know it is five hours behind but the date is correct for example, just mention that when you email in and that should be sufficient. </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Otherwise, just send in a picture clearly showing the MAC address and date/time on the device and say exactly when the picture was taken.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><a href="https://spycameracctv.gorgias.help/en-US/contact" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">Get in contact here,</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> set the support status as &#8216;Password reset&#8217; and the email subject as &#8216;Gamut password reset&#8217;. You will also need to send your original order/invoice number and the original delivery postcode to confirm your identity.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">We will try to get back to you as soon as possible.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 8.05pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8.05pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3.6; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 16pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 33pt;">How to set up and view your Gamut PTZ on a Windows or Apple computer (GTIP210PTZ)</span></h1>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Purpose of The Guide</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">This guide will walk you through the initial configuration of your Gamut PTZ and show you how to view the camera on your computer.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Before You Begin</span></h2>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #161616; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Connect your camera to the power.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #161616; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Connect your camera to your internet router using an Ethernet cable. If you are using this camera with a pair of Wi-Fi bridges it is still best to set the camera up first by connecting it directly to your internet router.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #161616; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Ensure you have a computer available that is connected to the same internet router as the camera.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #161616; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using Windows install CMS5 from </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/NCIP9WF/software/CMS5-Gamut-V1.3.zip" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">here,</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> or if you are using an Apple device install VMS from </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/VMS/software/VMS_Mac.dmg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">here</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Let&#8217;s Get Started</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">First we need to make sure that the camera is talking to your network. If you look on the box for the camera and on the side of the camera itself you should see a sticker that looks something like the one shown below.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="300" height="225" class="wp-image-4312 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-5.jpeg" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43055484887/original/LzDG1oIfHgSeLJ-1r8MWa7oWBbSp5ZDynQ.jpg?1562331404" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 372"></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Make a note of the </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">IP Address</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">, </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">User name </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">and any </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Password </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">shown on the sticker.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Next we need to open </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Internet Explorer </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">on the computer. In the address bar at the top of the page enter the </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">IP address</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> that you saw on the sticker. You should then be prompted to log in to the camera, here you need to use the User name and Password shown on the sticker, if there is no password on the sticker then leave the password field blank.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Please make sure that you are using Internet Explorer </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">and not any other browser. The reason for this is that most CCTV systems require the use of software called Active X to be able to display your live video and that software is only supported by Internet Explorer.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are prompted to install any software you need to allow this to happen, this software enables your computer to display the video feed from the camera.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">At this point you should be seeing a live view from your camera and can go ahead and fit your camera wherever you need it. To watch your cameras in future you will simply need to open </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Internet Explorer</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">, go to the </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">IP </span><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Address</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> from before and log in to the camera. From there you can also control the motion of the camera by using the PTZ controls shown below. These features are explained more in depth in other guides which can be found </span><a href="https://spycameracctv.gorgias.help/en-US/articles/gamut-81735" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong><span style="color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">here</span></strong><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="251" height="446" class="wp-image-4313 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-6.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43055479795/original/mjwOkgpwoBEupyT9lO7pIfP4cAwtdeXT0Q.PNG?1562330099" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 373" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-6.png 251w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-6-169x300.png 169w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 251px) 100vw, 251px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you were unable to access your camera this way then it&#8217;s not a problem, we just need to use a different method. Alternatively if you wish to view the system without having to log in through Internet Explorer each time then continue reading and you will see how to view the camera without needing to log in each time.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">First open CMS5/VMS, the program that you installed before we began, and click on </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Device Manager</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">. You will now be presented with a screen that looks like this:</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="607" height="146" class="wp-image-4314 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-7-607w146h.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43055480377/original/7mOiD3Uf4p_pT4fvyLl5XVJzT1vd3DIlIQ.PNG?1562330250" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 374" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-7-607w146h.png 607w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-7-607w146h-300x72.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 607px) 100vw, 607px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">You should see a camera in the list that has the same </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">IP Address </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">as previously seen on the sticker on the camera. If you don&#8217;t then click the </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">IPV4 Search</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> button and after a few moments the camera will appear. Select the camera by ticking the box to the left of it and click </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Add</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">The camera will now be displayed in the bottom half of the window. Towards the right hand side you will see a number of buttons, you need to press the </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Modify IP </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">button as highlighted in the following image.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="174" height="37" class="wp-image-4315 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-8.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43055480876/original/ZmkhB7LPzl1O9s7quMX691tIhas5MOPkAA.PNG?1562330390" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 375"></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">At this point if you wish to use the camera through Internet Explorer rather than CMS5 you are now able to. Make a note of the new IP address that the camera is displaying and follow the steps detailed near the top of this guide for accessing the camera using Internet Explorer.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Now click the </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Home </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">button to return to the main page for CMS5/VMS, then click </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Monitor</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">. On the right hand side you will see your camera in the list of devices. </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Double click</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> on your camera and the video feed will appear in the middle of the screen. If you then double click on the video if will go in to full screen mode so you can see a larger picture. To then control your camera click the button shown below and the PTZ controls will appear. As before more articles about controlling your camera can be found by clicking </span><a href="https://open24seven.freshdesk.com/support/solutions/folders/43000547116" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong><span style="color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">here.</span></strong></a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="224" height="28" class="wp-image-4316 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-9.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43055483315/original/w8bDUJKclkgdH6B7XHsr63NuMuuckrSu2A.PNG?1562331037" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 376"></span></p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 10pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2;"><span style="font-size: 20pt;">GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide</span></h2>
<p>Read More : <a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/unv-recorder-set-up-guide.html">UNV Recorder Set Up Guide</a></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 8.05pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8.05pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3.6; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 16pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 33pt;">How to add your Gamut recorder or camera to a mobile phone or tablet</span></h1>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Purpose of The Guide</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">This guide will show you how to add your </span><a href="https://www.spycameracctv.com/collections/ip-cctv-cameras?_=pf&amp;pf_t_brand=Gamut" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">Gamut camera or recorder</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> to a phone.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Before You Begin</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Your Gamut device will need to be turned on and connected to your internet router. If you have a recorder with a hard drive you will need to use a TV or Internet Explorer to set it up for the first time, follow the </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/DVRGT1/manuals/DVRGT1-quickstart.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">quick start guide</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> to do so.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using a recorder and cameras, make sure that the cameras are connected and working.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using a Wi-Fi bridge system with your camera, make sure that the bridges are turned on, wired correctly and communicating before you begin.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">You will need to download the app RXCamView onto your phone or tablet.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 2.4; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 18pt;">Android</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.client.rxcamview&amp;hl=en_GB&amp;gl=US" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="180" height="180" class="wp-image-4317 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-15.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120500239/original/3xCo1Zou_dp2U6UQcO2tEybpIRDkpxghFA.png?1585755329" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 377" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-15.png 180w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-15-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 180px) 100vw, 180px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 2.4; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 18pt;">Apple</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;"><a href="https://apps.apple.com/gb/app/rxcamview/id1062447553" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="180" height="180" class="wp-image-4318 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-16.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43174675647/original/kI6udFyds6U2xVv-zcOzbfWU1uoYfB8QxA.png?1605805496" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 378" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-16.png 180w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-16-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 180px) 100vw, 180px" /></a></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Let’s Get Started</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Open up RXCamView on your device and tap on the head and shoulders icon to open the side menu.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1535" height="1215" class="wp-image-4319 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-17.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120505052/original/YEp-Gpq0fPIFAH5jp1vzkmLWMgFGy9ybDw.png?1585756514" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 379" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-17.png 1535w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-17-300x237.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-17-1024x811.png 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-17-768x608.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1535px) 100vw, 1535px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Then tap on &#8216;Device List&#8217;.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="641" height="505" class="wp-image-4320 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-18-641w505h.jpeg" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120505353/original/0BkMHyBHGCGIdFi2x1D7ElnzPVjRUc-3oA.png?1585756580" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 380" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-18-641w505h.jpeg 641w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-18-641w505h-300x236.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 641px) 100vw, 641px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">On the Device Manager page, tap on the &#8216;+&#8217; icon then tap on &#8216;IPC/NVR/DVR&#8217;.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="wp-image-4321 " src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-19-1.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120505725/original/cB0HHeGaPiX7AMiLZqdyl0Hv6BYXHrAycA.png?1585756689" width="801" height="243" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 381" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-19-1.png 1535w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-19-1-300x91.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-19-1-1024x310.png 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-19-1-768x233.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 801px) 100vw, 801px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">The app will request permission to use your camera, allow it to. It will open up your camera and you need to point the camera to the QR code on the label on your recorder or camera.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="wp-image-4322 " src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120628786/original/M8vOBTGukTVgJ1vNNerSGsLtveoEcMnohQ.png?1585815360" width="951" height="493" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 382" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20.png 2605w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20-300x156.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20-1024x531.png 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20-768x398.png 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20-1536x797.png 1536w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-20-2048x1062.png 2048w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 951px) 100vw, 951px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Once you have successfully scanned the QR code the app will prompt you to fill in some information. Leave the IP/Address and Media Port fields, the username is </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">admin</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> by default, and the password is blank by default.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="wp-image-4323 " src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-21.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120629427/original/H4yBBJrWR79BIcyr9nzW4bRWv95L6WxSfQ.png?1585815546" width="1051" height="798" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 383" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-21.png 1535w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-21-300x228.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-21-1024x777.png 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-21-768x583.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1051px) 100vw, 1051px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Then the device will appear in the device list, it should say &#8216;Connected&#8217;. If it says &#8216;connect close&#8217; then check the password is correct and that nothing has been disconnected.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="wp-image-4324 " src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-22.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120629677/original/n8sikIQ0noG1aJu-62R7iekV38iJ1Gxqzg.png?1585815620" width="993" height="771" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 384" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-22.png 1535w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-22-300x233.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-22-1024x795.png 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-22-768x596.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 993px) 100vw, 993px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you tap on the play icon underneath the device, you will be taken to the live view window. Just tap on the name of the device to begin live view.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="wp-image-4325 " src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-23.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120629923/original/cpgpyWgx-SfNucGN-bSiASOWzOHWVJBl3w.png?1585815689" width="831" height="1108" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 385" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-23.png 1536w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-23-225x300.png 225w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-23-768x1024.png 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-23-1152x1536.png 1152w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 831px) 100vw, 831px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">To view recordings, just tap on the film reel icon at the bottom right below the live view screen:</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="wp-image-4326 " src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-24.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120631199/original/9LrA8CSIZGMFCTzvbwtA_MPRW5XsVkZfgQ.png?1585816029" width="817" height="156" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 386" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-24.png 1535w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-24-300x57.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-24-1024x195.png 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-24-768x147.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">For more information on the settings of the recorder, please refer to the </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/DVRGT1/manuals/DVRGT1-quickstart.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">quick start guide</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> or </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/DVRGT1/manuals/DVRGT1-manual.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">the manual</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you find that the device only works when you are connected to the same internet router as it, and not when accessing it via another Wi-Fi network or with 4G, </span><a href="https://spycameracctv.gorgias.help/en-US/my-gamut-device-doesnt-work-remotely-276650" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">take a look at this guide</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<h1 style="margin-top: 8.05pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8.05pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3.6; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 16pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 33pt;">How to access your Gamut camera or recorder using a Windows or Mac computer</span></h1>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Purpose of The Guide</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">This guide will show you how to access the live footage, recordings and settings of your Gamut camera or recorder, using a Windows or Mac computer.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Before You Begin</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Your Gamut device will need to be turned on and connected to your internet router. You will need to use a TV to set up the recorder for the first time, follow the </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/DVRGT1/manuals/DVRGT1-quickstart.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">quick start guide</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> to do so. After the initial setup, a TV or monitor is not necessary when accessing the recorder via a network connection.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using a recorder and cameras, make sure that the cameras are connected and working.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using a Wi-Fi bridge system with your camera, make sure that the bridges are turned on, wired correctly and communicating before you begin.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 2pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 24pt;">Let’s Get Started</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Now that you have connected your recorder/camera to your internet router and turned it on, you will be able to view it using a program called Surveillance Client.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">First you will need to download some software called </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Device Config Tool</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">, which will allow you to find out the IP address of the camera/recorder and edit some of the settings.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Download it from </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/GAMUT/software/Gamut_Device_Config_Tool.zip" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">here if you are using Windows</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">, and </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/GAMUT/software/Gamut_Device_Config_Tool.dmg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">here if you are using a Mac</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Once the software has been downloaded and installed, you will see a window like the screenshot below. Make a note of the camera/recorders IP address.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="951" height="589" class="wp-image-4327 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-35-1.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120436068/original/sbklSMiwNc0EqcmtYsJuHgnma8SiKh3Asw.png?1585741427" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 387" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-35-1.png 951w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-35-1-300x186.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-35-1-768x476.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 951px) 100vw, 951px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If the recorder/camera does not appear in the program, first ensure they are turned on and check the connections from the device to your internet router. If you are using a </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Wi-Fi bridge</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> system, make sure that they are configured correctly (if they were not pre-configured) and are both turned on.</span></p>
<h3 style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 2.4; font-weight: bold; font-size: 13.5pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 18pt;">Surveillance Client</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using Windows you can </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/GAMUT/software/Gamut_Surveillance_Client.zip" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">download Surveillance Client from here</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">If you are using a Mac, </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/GAMUT/software/Gamut_Surveillance_Client.dmg" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">download it from here</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">When you have downloaded and installed Surveillance Client you will be presented with a set-up wizard. Click </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Next</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">, then </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Add Online Device</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">. Your recorder/camera should appear in the list; select it then click </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Add Selected Device</span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">. </span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="951" height="786" class="wp-image-4328 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-36.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120466264/original/KHHjyBqW-3TbDMErh5S8eMn1-ChouewgTg.png?1585748624" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 388" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-36.png 951w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-36-300x248.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-36-768x635.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 951px) 100vw, 951px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Now choose a name for the recorder/camera. By default the username is </span><strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">admin </span></strong><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">and the password is blank. Now click &#8216;Add&#8217;.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="309" height="304" class="wp-image-4329 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-37.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120467897/original/cQ934FmbiB3j_SWKXgIz9MIGhcibiJrt-w.png?1585748997" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 389" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-37.png 309w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-37-300x295.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 309px) 100vw, 309px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">You will see the device appear in the left hand pane. Select it, click &#8216;Import&#8217;, then open the &#8216;DefaultGroup&#8217; folder on the right side and you will see it has been added.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="794" height="378" class="wp-image-4330 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-38.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120469003/original/qUqbGcrqoRzlj40VUCAGxhkkXGkZDDMFsA.png?1585749255" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 390" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-38.png 794w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-38-300x143.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-38-768x366.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 794px) 100vw, 794px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">Click &#8216;Next&#8217; then &#8216;Finish&#8217; and you will be taken to the main menu. Now click on &#8216;Main View&#8217;.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="940" height="707" class="wp-image-4331 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-39.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120472680/original/ngBww0M0kN7JehqL6yVQFyhoFWUM7iPXcw.png?1585749968" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 391" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-39.png 940w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-39-300x226.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-39-768x578.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 940px) 100vw, 940px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">When you are taken to Main View, double click on DefaultGroup, then the name of your recorder (if you have one) and the cameras will be shown. In the screenshot I only have one camera connected, which is signified by the green play icon. Double click on the camera name to begin live view. If you want the camera to be in full screen, double click on the live feed.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="940" height="706" class="wp-image-4332 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120471709/original/lwcI2Ai-6EGP2HaPnXufOaJtBcvngX8JzA.png?1585749824" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 392" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40.png 940w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40-300x225.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-40-768x577.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 940px) 100vw, 940px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">To access recordings, go to back to the Control Panel and then click on Remote Playback. Open up DefaultGroup on the left side panel, then select the cameras which you would like to view recordings from and click the play button. You can select the date using the calendar on the bottom right.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="938" height="705" class="wp-image-4333 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-41.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120480312/original/MFQ8nvqAoVGSqOUv37j1Rt6icLVZ2VLURQ.png?1585751325" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 393" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-41.png 938w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-41-300x225.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-41-768x577.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 938px) 100vw, 938px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">To access the settings of the recorder/camera itself, go to the Control Panel, click on Group Device, then click on the spanner icon next to your recorder.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="943" height="709" class="wp-image-4334 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-42.png" alt="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/43120485219/original/oi5oAuJzUrmmIOcoU19nqw4ozhe_3W4zhg.png?1585752235" title="GAMUT RECORDER Installation and user guide 394" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-42.png 943w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-42-300x226.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-42-768x577.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 943px) 100vw, 943px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.8; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">For more information on the settings of the recorder, please refer to the </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/DVRGT1/manuals/DVRGT1-quickstart.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">quick start guide</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;"> or </span><a href="http://downloads.spycameracctv.com/DVRGT1/manuals/DVRGT1-manual.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #4a8df9; font-size: 11pt;">the manual</span></a><span style="color: #161616; font-size: 11pt;">.</span></p>
<h1><span style="color: #ff0000;"><strong>MORE PAGES &gt;&gt;&gt;</strong></span></h1>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/general/gamut-recorder-installation-and-user-guide.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/general/how-to-set-up-the-hikvision-2nd-generation-modular-intercom.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/general/how-to-set-up-the-hikvision-2nd-generation-modular-intercom.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 05 Sep 2023 19:22:23 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[General]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[access]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[alarm]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[AX PRO Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Basic Setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[default]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[device]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[hikvision]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Hikvision AX PRO]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Install]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[intercom]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP address]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[latest firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Monitor]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[poe]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PoE injector]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Power]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Switch]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[video]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[vms]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[VMS Client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[VMS software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[with]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=2850</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom, We get asked a lot of questions by people looking to buy...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom, We get asked a </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">lot</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> of questions by people looking to buy or who have already bought Hikvision’s 2nd Gen modular Intercom solution and for a long time, we have had to take the majority of those questions to Hikvision Support as we just don’t have enough hands-on experience with the intercom solution to answer them confidently. Now we have finally found time to get a demo intercom system set up, test some of the features, and give you a guide of how to get a basic intercom solution up and running.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The below guide will initially** be split into 3 key sections with multiple sub-sections:</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #5e97d4; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Single Module Setup (Video Intercom Module)</span></strong><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Setting up the Video Intercom Module</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Setting up the Indoor Station</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #5e97d4; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Three Module Setup (Video, Indicator, Keypad)</span></strong><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Sub Modules &amp; Dip Switches</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Setting Room Numbers &amp; Unlock Codes</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Six Module Setup (above + Display, RFID, nametag)</span></strong><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Nametag &amp; Display Modules</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; margin-left: 36pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Card Reader Module</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The reason we have decided to cover it this way is that the modular nature of the solution means there are too many variations to cover specifically, so instead we will cover the details of the 3 most common setups and once you know the basics of all 3 any combination of modules should be achievable.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(**IMPORTANT &#8211; This will be a continual work-in-progress thread and we will add new posts with explanations of new features &amp; settings as we test the intercom further and learn things from customers &amp; Hikvision Support, this initial post will basically be a contents page for the entire thread)</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 16.5pt;">Single Module Setup (Video Intercom Module)</span></strong></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The Single Module setup is the entry-level intercom solution for smaller residential &amp; business installs, for this solution you will need:</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x DS-KD8003-IME1 Video Intercom Module Door Station (or -IME1/Surface if you want the surface mount included)</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x Indoor Station</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x iVMS-4200 Client Software</span></p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;">How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom</h2>
<h5 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;">Read More : <a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/hikvision-ax-pro-configuration-full-setup-video.html">Hikvision AX PRO Configuration Full Setup &amp;#8211; Video</a></h5>
<p><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Setting up the Video Intercom Module</span></strong><br />
<strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"><br />
Step 1</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; Connect the Video Intercom Module to a source of PoE (either a PoE Injector or Switch)</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Do </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">NOT</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> directly connect the Intercom to the PoE ports on an NVR as this stops the device being visible on the local network</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Step 2</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; Install &amp; Open iVMS-4200</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Step 3</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; Go to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Maintenance &amp; Management &gt; Device Management &gt; Device</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Online Device</span></strong><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1920" height="1040" class="wp-image-2851 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-9.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (1) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 418" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-9.jpeg 1920w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-9-300x163.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-9-1024x555.jpeg 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-9-768x416.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-9-1536x832.jpeg 1536w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1920px) 100vw, 1920px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Step 4</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; Select the Intercom module from the </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">online</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> device list, click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Activate</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and set a password for the device</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1920" height="1040" class="wp-image-2852 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-10.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (2) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 419" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-10.jpeg 1920w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-10-300x163.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-10-1024x555.jpeg 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-10-768x416.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-10-1536x832.jpeg 1536w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1920px) 100vw, 1920px" /></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="460" height="486" class="wp-image-2853 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-11.png" alt="Intercom Setup (3).png" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 420" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-11.png 460w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-11-284x300.png 284w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 460px) 100vw, 460px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Step 5</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; Once activated you will need to click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Net Info</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> (small world icon) and change intercom’s network details to match your own network</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1694" height="455" class="wp-image-2854 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-12.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (4) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 421" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-12.jpeg 1694w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-12-300x81.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-12-1024x275.jpeg 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-12-768x206.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-12-1536x413.jpeg 1536w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1694px) 100vw, 1694px" /></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="658" height="968" class="wp-image-2855 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-13.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (5) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 422" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-13.jpeg 658w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-13-204x300.jpeg 204w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 658px) 100vw, 658px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(If you know your local network details and have a specific IP address in mind you can manually set the IP and gateway address, if you do not know your network details you can tick </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">DHCP</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">, enter the device password, click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">OK</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and DHCP will automatically assign an open IP address on your network to the device)</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Step 6</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; With the Network details set you can now select the device from the Online device list and click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Add</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> to add the device to the iVMS </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">software</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1920" height="1040" class="wp-image-2856 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-14.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (6) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 423" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-14.jpeg 1920w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-14-300x163.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-14-1024x555.jpeg 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-14-768x416.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-14-1536x832.jpeg 1536w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1920px) 100vw, 1920px" /></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="498" height="527" class="wp-image-2857 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-15.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (7) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 424" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-15.jpeg 498w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-15-283x300.jpeg 283w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 498px) 100vw, 498px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Setting up the Indoor Station</span></strong></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">It is possible to run the Video Intercom without the Indoor Station but that requires all calls from the Intercom to go to the iVMS </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">software</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">, setting up this way means you have to have a dedicated PC running iVMS-4200 24/7 and that PC would need a camera and/or microphone connected to it for calls to be answered. This solution only really makes sense for installs where you will have security staff to monitor the system. (e.g. Shopping centres, large office buildings, etc…)</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">For most setups, especially single module setups, using the Indoor Station is much easier and more discreet (small screen can be wall-mounted or stood on a side table) way of completing your Intercom solution. The Indoor Station can be set up in 2 different ways, using iVMS-4200 or directly using the touchscreen, if you set up and activate using iVMS-4200 then the </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">initial steps are identical to those for the Intercom shown above.</span></strong></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The only different step is after you have activated and added the Indoor Station to the iVMS </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">software</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> you will need to click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Remote Configuration</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> for the Indoor Station and go to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Network &gt; Linked Network Configuration &gt;</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and set the </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(Main) Door Station IP address</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> to the IP address of the Video Intercom to link the 2 devices together.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1920" height="1040" class="wp-image-2858 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-16.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (8) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 425" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-16.jpeg 1920w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-16-300x163.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-16-1024x555.jpeg 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-16-768x416.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-16-1536x832.jpeg 1536w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1920px) 100vw, 1920px" /></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="960" height="750" class="wp-image-2859 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-17.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (9) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 426" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-17.jpeg 960w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-17-300x234.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-17-768x600.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 960px) 100vw, 960px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(If you are planning to use iVMS-4200 instead of the Indoor Station then you need to make sure the </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Master Station IP address</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> is set to the IP address of the PC running iVMS-4200, if you don’t know the PC’s IP address you can use </span><a href="https://www.use-ip.co.uk/forum/threads/how-do-i-find-my-router-and-pcs-ip-address-using-a-windows-pc.1633/" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener"><strong><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #5e97d4; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">this forum guide</span></strong></a><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> to help you find it. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Even if you are not using iVMS as your main access point of the intercom we would still recommend entering the Master Station address.)</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">If you are setting up via the touchscreen then you simply follow the wizard guide (shown below) which is basically just a simplified version of the step discussed above.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(The only step during the touchscreen set up that you won’t automatically see in iVMS set up is step 3 shown below &#8211; </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Indoor Station Type</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; this step is important if you are connecting multiple indoor stations to the intercom and we will discuss this in more detail in the 3-module set up section. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">For now, if you are only using one monitor or this is your first monitor of the set up just leave it as the defaults shown in the picture)</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2860 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-18.jpeg" alt="indoor station(1).jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 427"></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2861 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-19.jpeg" alt="indoor station(2).jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 428"></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2862 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-20.jpeg" alt="indoor station(3).jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 429"></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2863 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-21.jpeg" alt="indoor station(4).jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 430"></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2864 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-22.jpeg" alt="indoor station(5).jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 431"></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once you have both devices activated, added to iVMS, and linked to each other the basic setup is almost complete. The only other things we would mention are to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">check </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">firmware</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">, you can follow these links to find the latest firmware for the Video Intercom and the Indoor Station and once you have downloaded the firmware you can go to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Remote Configuration &gt; System &gt; System Maintenance</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and load the firmware.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="960" height="750" class="wp-image-2865 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-23.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (10) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 432" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-23.jpeg 960w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-23-300x234.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-23-768x600.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 960px) 100vw, 960px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Finally, for now, we would also recommend that you check which device the Intercom is calling, if you go to the Video Intercom in iVMS and click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Remote Configuration &gt; Intercom &gt; Dial &gt;</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> you will see a page with the options to call </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Management Center (iVMS-4200)</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> or </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Call Indoor Station</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">, depending on your specific setup make sure the right option is selected and Save that setting.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="960" height="750" class="wp-image-2866 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-24.jpeg" alt="Intercom Setup (11) edit.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 433" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-24.jpeg 960w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-24-300x234.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-24-768x600.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 960px) 100vw, 960px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 16.5pt;">Three Module Setup (Intercom, Indicator, Keypad)</span></strong></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">A 3 module setup is something you are more likely to find on a small apartment block or a medium-sized office building with multiple businesses inside where you might need a name tag module and/or keypad module to call different flats/offices. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The steps to activate and add a three module intercom to iVMS are exactly the same, the only difference is the steps you perform before powering the Intercom on and a few settings after everything is activated.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">For the specific three-module solution we are talking about in this guide you will need:</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x DS-KD8003-IME1 Video Intercom Module Door Station</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x DS-KD-IN Video Intercom Indicator Module</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x DS-KD-KP Video Intercom Keypad Module</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x DS-KD-ACW3 Surface / -ACF3 Flush Mounting Accessory</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x Indoor Station</span><br />
<span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">1 x iVMS-4200 Client Software</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(Obviously, any of the sub-modules can be used in a 3 module setup but we settled on these 2 as they are a common choice for the examples I mentioned above and are also easier to set up than some other modules as they have no settings of their own)</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Sub Modules &amp; Dip Switches</span></strong></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The first thing you have to do when setting up any multi-module intercom solution (whether that&#8217;s 3, 6, or any number/combination of modules) is to set the Dip Switches on each sub-module.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1994" height="1994" class="wp-image-2868 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41.jpeg" alt="dip switches.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 434" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41.jpeg 1994w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41-300x300.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41-1024x1024.jpeg 1024w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41-150x150.jpeg 150w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41-768x768.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-41-1536x1536.jpeg 1536w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1994px) 100vw, 1994px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">There is a table and instructions in the manual provided with the Intercom as to how to set the Dip switches, but for absolute beginners, these instructions are not all that clear so I will expand upon them here.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="940" height="388" class="wp-image-2869 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-42.png" alt="Screenshot 2020-07-17 at 12.38.31.png" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 435" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-42.png 940w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-42-300x124.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-42-768x317.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 940px) 100vw, 940px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Each Intercom setup can have a maximum of 8 sub-modules connected to the initial Video Intercom module and each module features a set of 8 dip switches/digits on the back. The first 4 switches/digits are used for coding the unique addresses of each module (1-8), digits 5,6,7 are reserved and should be just left OFF and finally, there is digit 8 which is a 120Ω resistor and should be set as ON on all modules.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">As you can see from the above table each sub-module address has a unique layout of ON/OFF switches/digits and each module you add to your setup can only use one of the 8 module addresses once in that setup, so once you add your first module and set it to address 1 no other module connected to the same Video Intercom can also use address 1.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The best way to set the sub-module addresses is sequentially based on how you have them laid out. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">So in our example of a 3 module layout, we have the Indicator module as the 1st sub-module using address 1 (ON/OFF/OFF/OFF) and the keypad module as the 2nd sub-module using address 2 (OFF/ON/OF/OFF).</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once you have the Dip switches set you can link the sub-modules together and connect them all back to the main Intercom module using the Module-Connecting cables that come with the Intercom module and/or the mounting accessory.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(IMPORTANT &#8211; If installing with the Surface mount, make sure before connecting the module cables that you have threaded them underneath the crossbars that divide the different module spaces on the mounting brackets as shown in the user manual and the below image. If you don’t you will trap the cables as you try and fit the modules into the bracket and you won’t be able to secure the modules without damaging the cable.)</span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2870 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-43.jpeg" alt="A" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 436"></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img decoding="async" class="wp-image-2871 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-44.jpeg" alt="incorrect.jpg" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 437"></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><br />
Correct (behind the crossbars) &#8212;&#8212;- | &#8212;&#8212;- Incorrect (in front of the crossbars)​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once you have all the modules connected you can then connect the Video Intercom module to your PoE source, slot all the remaining modules into the mounting bracket, and screw the front cover of the mounting bracket back on to secure the modules.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">At this point, the activation and adding to iVMS process is exactly the same as with the single module set up and so you can just </span><a href="https://www.use-ip.co.uk/forum/threads/how-to-set-up-the-hikvision-2nd-generation-modular-intercom.5133/#post-19598" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #5e97d4; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">follow the steps from the first section of this guide</span></strong></a><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> to activate the Intercom and sub-modules, as well as activating the Indoor Station.</span></p>
<p><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Setting Room Numbers &amp; Unlock Codes</span></strong></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">After all the steps are completed and you have everything added to iVMS-4200 then there are 2 key things you will need to look at in relation to this example 3 module setup that is using the keypad &amp; Indicator modules.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The first thing is </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">room numbers</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">, if you are using one or multiple indoor stations as individual stations that you want the ability to call from the main intercom using the keypad then there are some settings you need to check. Go to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Remote Configuration</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> for each Indoor Station you have in your setup and </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">click Intercom &gt; ID Configuration &gt;</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and you will see the below options:</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="960" height="750" class="wp-image-2872 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-45.png" alt="3-module Intercom Setup (1).png" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 438" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-45.png 960w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-45-300x234.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-45-768x600.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 960px) 100vw, 960px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Device Type</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; There are 2 options, </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Indoor Station</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> or </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Station Extension</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">, for our demo setup we will leave it as Indoor Station as we only have the one station that we need to reach.​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Call/Room No.</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; depending on the number of Indoor Stations you have this can be set to any number between 1-9999, as we only have the 1 station we will leave it as 1.​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Floor No.</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; again this depends on the location of the indoor station so that if you have 2 rooms on different floors that for example are both labelled room 10 you can have both indoor stations set to room 10 but each one have a different floor number set so that both stations still have unique ID numbers. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Again the floor number can be set as any number between 1-9999​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">As mentioned above the stations do support up to 9999 room/floor numbers but this is not the max. Number of stations the </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">software</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> supports, each iVMS client can only support a maximum of 512 Indoor Stations and the room/floor numbers only go higher because the building you are installing the system in may use a certain numbering system and may have room &amp; floor numbers higher than 512. (e.g. an apartment on the 10th floor may have room number 1020 to signify floor No. and room No. on that floor)</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The other Device Type mentioned above is </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Station Extension</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and this makes a chosen Indoor Station slave to the main Indoor station, you link the slave Indoor Station to the master Indoor Station by entering its </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(Main) Door Station address</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> as the IP address of the master Indoor Station and then when the Master Indoor Station is called then all the Station linked to that master via Station Extension will ring at the same time. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">When you select Station Extension you have to set an </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Index No.</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> which has to be between 1-5 as the maximum No. of extensions that can be connected to one master station is 5.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once you have set the room and floor No. for all your indoor stations and all the stations are linked back to the Video Intercom module or are set as extensions to other indoor stations, then you can use the keypad on the intercom to type in </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Call/Room No. + Floor No. + # key</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and the intercom will ring that selected indoor station. (If you only have one floor of indoor stations then just enter the </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Call/Room No. + # key</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> instead)</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The 2nd thing to set up after room numbers is </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">unlock codes/passwords</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">, if you have wired a magnetic door lock, motorised gate, or similar access control device to the intercom then you will want a password you can enter on the keypad to unlock/activate those access control devices.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">There are 2 ways to set these unlocking passwords depending on if you want to set a </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">public password</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> which you can share with multiple people or a </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">private password</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> if you have lots of individual apartments/offices and you want to give each their own access password. For the public password you will need to go to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Remote Configuration</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> of the Video Intercom and click </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Intercom &gt; Permission Password &gt;</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and you will see a drop-down to select 1 of 3 passwords (you can have a max. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">of</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> 3 public </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">passwords) and 2 boxes to enter and save the new public passwords.</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="960" height="750" class="wp-image-2873 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-46.png" alt="3-module Intercom Setup (2).png" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 439" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-46.png 960w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-46-300x234.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-46-768x600.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 960px) 100vw, 960px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">(If you have set any of these passwords before you will also see an Old Password box and will have to enter the old password before changing it to new password)</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once you have saved 1, 2, or all 3 public passwords you can then go to the keypad </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">module and type </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"># + (Public Password 1/2/3) + #</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and you should get an audible confirmation that the door/gate is unlocked and the unlock icon on the indicator module should light up as well.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">The process for setting a </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">private unlocking password</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> is almost exactly the same, the only difference is that the password is set in the Indoor Station settings and not the Video Intercom. When you go to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Remote Configuration &gt; Intercom &gt; Permission Password &gt;</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> for the Indoor Station you will see 3 different </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Password Types</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> to choose from:</span><br />
<span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="960" height="750" class="wp-image-2874 size-full" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-47.png" alt="3-module Intercom Setup (3).png" title="How to Set up the Hikvision 2nd Generation Modular Intercom 440" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-47.png 960w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-47-300x234.png 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Picture-47-768x600.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 960px) 100vw, 960px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Arming/Disarming Password </span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">&#8211; this connects directly to the Zone Alarm setting so that in a scenario where you may have alarm devices linked to the Intercom (e.g. burglar alarm, PIR motion detector, smoke alarm, etc…) you can use this password to quickly arm and disarm the alarm devices connected to the intercom when you leave or arrive at the property.​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Unlocking Password</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; This is the private door/gate unlocking password​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">Duress Code</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> &#8211; In a scenario where someone is threatening you and/or forcing you to enter the unlock code for the door/gate, you can set a duress code that is different to the other 2 passwords and when you enter it the intercom will give you the same audible and visible notification that the door is unlocked. </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">But it doesn’t unlock the door and instead sends a notification to the iVMS </span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;">software</span><span style="color: #1d1d1d; font-size: 11.5pt;"> to alert a member of security staff.​</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">In our demo scenario, we only need to set the unlocking password, by default the unlocking password is set to </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">888999</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> so you will need to enter this in the Old Password box before entering and confirming the new password and saving this password.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">Once the Password is saved you can go to the keypad module and just like with the public password enter </span><strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"># + (Unlocking Password) + #</span></strong><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;"> and the door/gate should be unlocked.</span></p>
<p><span style="color: #1d1d1d; background-color: #ffffff; font-size: 11.5pt;">And that is all the basic functions and settings of a 3-module set up using the Keypad and Indicator modules.</span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/general/how-to-set-up-the-hikvision-2nd-generation-modular-intercom.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/cp-plus-xvr-complete-setup-guide.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/cp-plus-xvr-complete-setup-guide.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 28 Jul 2023 18:39:42 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[4G Solar Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Check for Updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Initialization]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Manager]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR user]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Eseecloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Face Detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Forgot Password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[hilook]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Latest version]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[network setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password Reset]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz activation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[QR code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Remote Access]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[reset the password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[System Settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[View interface]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wireless]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=2037</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide, CP Plus has introduced the new and impactful range of DVRs under the Lite Series which...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide, CP Plus has introduced the new and impactful range of DVRs under the Lite Series which has been integrated with the 4K and H.265 encoding technology that provides you with an outstanding at a reasonably pocket-friendly price.</p>
<p>The 4K resolution processors present in this product help in bringing out every little detail in the image.</p>
<p>Along with that, this <a href="https://www.cpplusworld.com/cp-uvr-0401f1-ic" rel="dofollow noopener" target="_blank">DVR</a> uses the intuitive shortcut operation menu which lets you control and manage the system remotely as well and can work as edge storage, central storage, backup storage .</p>
<h2>CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide</h2>
<p>Read Next :</p>
<ol>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/software/juan-cctv-firmware-software-new.html" rel="nofollow">JUAN CCTV Firmware Software NEW</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/eseecloud-4g-solar-camera-guide.html" rel="nofollow">Eseecloud 4G Solar Camera Guide</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/hilook-dvr-user-manual.html" rel="nofollow">Hilook DVR User Manual</a></li>
</ol>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark0"></a> Introduction
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark2"></a> Overview</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>The Device is an excellent digital monitor product for security industry. The embedded LINUX OS assures the stable operation. The H.264 and G.711 technologies assure the high-quality image and low bit stream. The frame-by-frame play function displays more details for analysis, and provides the functions such as record, playback, and monitor and assures the synchronization for audio and video. The Device also adopts the advanced control technology and great network data transmission capability.</p>
<p>The Device adopts embedded design to achieve high security and reliability. It can work in the local end and, with strong networking capability it can get connected to the professional surveillance software (Smart PSS) to form a security network to show its powerful remote monitoring function.</p>
<p>The Device is applicable to the areas such as bank, telecom, electricity, traffic, intelligent residential district, factory, warehouse, resources, and water conservancy facilities.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark4"></a> Functions</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>The functions might be different depending on the software and hardware version of the model you purchased.</p>
<p><strong>Real-time Surveillance</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support VGA port and HDMI port to realize the surveillance through monitors.</li>
<li>Support HDMI, VGA, and TV output at the same time.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>IoT Management</strong></p>
<p>Provide specific management module for IoT features including humidity and temperature data reports and alarms linkage.</p>
<p><strong>Sensor Integration</strong></p>
<p>Integrate coaxial cameras with diverse array of sensors such as temperature, humidity and wireless alarm devices.</p>
<p><strong>Storage Management</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Special data format to guarantee data security and avoid the risk of modifying data viciously.</li>
<li>Support digital watermark.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Compression Format</strong></p>
<p>Support multiple-channel audio and video signal. An independent hardware decodes the audio and video signal from each channel to maintain video and audio synchronization.</p>
<p><strong>Backup Function</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support backup operation through USB port (such as USB storage disk, portable HDD, and burner).</li>
<li>Client-end user can download the file from local HDD through network to backup.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Record &amp; Playback</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support each channel real-time record independently, and simultaneously support the functions such as search, backward play, network monitor, record search, and download.</li>
<li>Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play.</li>
<li>Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time.</li>
<li>Support zooming in the selected area in the live view.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Network Operation</strong></p>
<p>Support network remote real-time monitor, remote record search and remote PTZ control.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm Activation</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Several relay alarm outputs to realize alarm activation and on-site light control.</li>
<li>The alarm input port and output port have the protection circuit to guarantee the Device safety.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Communication Port</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>RS485 port can realize alarm input and PTZ control.</li>
<li>RS232 port can connect to keyboard, COM port of PC or the matrix control.</li>
<li>Standard Ethernet port can realize network remote access function.</li>
<li>The dual-network port has the multiple-address, fault tolerance, load balance setup mode.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>PTZ Control</strong></p>
<p>Support PTZ decoder through RS485 port.</p>
<p><strong>Intelligent Operation</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support mouse operation function.</li>
<li>Support &#8220;copy and paste&#8221; function for the same settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)</strong></p>
<p>Establish mapping connection between LAN and WAN through UPnP protocol.</p>
<p><strong>Camera Self-adaptive</strong></p>
<p>Auto-recognize and work with the PAL or NTSC camera and HD camera.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark6"></a> Getting Started
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark8"></a> Checking the Components</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>When you receive the Device, please check against the following checking list. If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact the local retailer or after-sales engineer immediately.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Sequence</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Checking items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Requirement</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">1</td>
<td rowspan="2">Package</td>
<td>Appearance</td>
<td>No obvious damage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Packing materials</td>
<td>No broken or distorted positions that could be caused by hit.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Not torn up. EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Do not tear up or throw away the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">2</td>
<td rowspan="2">Labels</td>
<td rowspan="2">Labels on the device</td>
<td>labels; otherwise the warranty</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>services are not ensured. You need</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>to provide the serial number of the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>product when you call the after-sales service.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">3</td>
<td rowspan="2">Device</td>
<td>Appearance</td>
<td>No obvious damage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data cables, power cables, fan cables, mainboard</td>
<td>No connection loose.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark10"></a> Installing HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Please check if the HDD is already installed in the Device when you first time using the Device.</p>
<p>It is suggested to use the HDD recommended officially. Do not use the PC HDD.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2038" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-1.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 1" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 796"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you open the case to replace the HDD.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="276" height="205" class="wp-image-2039" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-2.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 2" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 797"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="272" height="215" class="wp-image-2040" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-3.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 3" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 798"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="187" class="wp-image-2041" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-4.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 4" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 799"></p>
<p>1. Remove the screws to<br />
take off the cover.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>Fix the screws on the HDD but do not fasten them.</p>
<ol>
<li>Match the screws with the holes on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) (WITHOUT HDD) to place the HDD.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="242" height="191" class="wp-image-2042" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-5.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 5" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 800"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="280" height="188" class="wp-image-2043" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-6.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 6" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 801"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="237" height="213" class="wp-image-2044" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-7.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 7" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 802"></p>
<ol>
<li>Turn the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) upside down to see the screws and then</li>
<li>Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</li>
<li>Put back the cover and<br />
fasten the screws.</li>
</ol>
<p>fasten them.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark12"></a> 2.2.2 E Model</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark14"></a> Installing Battery</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The battery is only provided with some models.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="414" height="295" class="wp-image-2045" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-8.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 8" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 803" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-8.jpeg 414w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-8-300x214.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 414px) 100vw, 414px" /></p>
<p>1. Put the battery cable through the hole.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="415" height="301" class="wp-image-2046" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-9.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 9" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 804" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-9.jpeg 415w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-9-300x218.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 415px) 100vw, 415px" /></p>
<p>2. Connect to the cable into the port.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark16"></a> Installing HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>Skip step 6 if the battery is not equipped with the model you purchased.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="175" class="wp-image-2047" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-10.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 10" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 805"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="170" class="wp-image-2048" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-11.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 11" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 806"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="176" class="wp-image-2049" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-12.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 12" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 807" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-12.jpeg 256w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-12-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 256px) 100vw, 256px" /></p>
<p>1. Remove the screws to 2.</p>
<p>take off the cover.</p>
<p>Remove the screws to 3.</p>
<p>Put the HDD onto the bracket.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="182" class="wp-image-2050" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-13.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 13" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 808"></p>
<p>take off the bracket.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="179" class="wp-image-2051" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-14.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 14" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 809"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="185" class="wp-image-2052" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-15.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 15" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 810"></p>
<p>4. Match the holes on the</p>
<p>5. Use screws to fix the</p>
<p>6.</p>
<p>bracket with the screw</p>
<p>HDD onto the bracket.</p>
<p>holes on HDD.</p>
<p>(Optional) Put the battery cable through the hole to connect into the cable port.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="292" height="185" class="wp-image-2053" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-16.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 16" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 811"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="176" class="wp-image-2054" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-17.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 17" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 812"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="167" class="wp-image-2055" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-18.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 18" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 813"></p>
<ol>
<li>Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</li>
<li>Install the bracket back and then fasten the screws.</li>
<li>Put back the cover and fasten the screws.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark18"></a> MINI 1U and Compact 1U</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="176" class="wp-image-2056" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-19.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 19" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 814"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="285" height="226" class="wp-image-2057" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-20.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 20" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 815"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="214" class="wp-image-2058" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-21.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 21" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 816"></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove the screws on the rear panel.</li>
<li>Fix the screws on the</li>
<li>Place the HDD onto</li>
</ol>
<p>HDD but do not be</p>
<p>the Device.</p>
<p>fastened.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="906" height="190" class="wp-image-2059" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 22" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 817" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22.jpeg 906w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22-300x63.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22-768x161.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22-810x170.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 906px) 100vw, 906px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Turn the device to see the back side of it. Aim the screws of the HDD at the holes on the back of the device and fix the screws.</li>
<li>Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</li>
<li>Put back the cover and fix the screws.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark20"></a> 1U</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="295" height="171" class="wp-image-2060" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-23.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 23" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 818"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="295" height="215" class="wp-image-2061" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-24.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 24" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 819"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="295" height="205" class="wp-image-2062" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-25.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 25" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 820" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-25.jpeg 295w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-25-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 295px) 100vw, 295px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove the screws on</li>
<li>Fix the screws onto the</li>
<li>Put the HDD into the</li>
</ol>
<p>the cover.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="290" height="219" class="wp-image-2063" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-26.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 26" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 821"></p>
<p>4. Turn the device to see the back side of it. Aim the screws of the HDD at the</p>
<p>HDD, but do not be Device.</p>
<p>fastened.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="290" height="219" class="wp-image-2064" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-27.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 27" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 822"></p>
<p>5. Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="284" height="154" class="wp-image-2065" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-28.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 28" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 823"></p>
<p>6. Put back the cover and fix the screws.</p>
<p>holes on the back of the</p>
<p>device, and then fix the</p>
<p>screws.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark22"></a> 3 Installing Device into Rack</li>
</ol>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Only 1.5U and 2U Devices support this installation.</p>
<p>To install the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) into Rack, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Check if the in-house temperature is lower than 35°C(95T) and make sure the 15cm (6in.) spacing around the Device for ventilation.</p>
<p>Step 1 Use six screws to fix the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) on each side.</p>
<p>Step 2 Install from the bottom up.</p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>If you want to install more accessories to the rack, take preventive measures to avoid power socket overload.</p>
<p>Step 3 Install more accessories to the rack if needed.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark24"></a> General Details</li>
</ol>
<p>This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations, and typical connection.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark26"></a> Front Panel</li>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark28"></a> .1 Smart 1U</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="157" height="132" class="wp-image-2066" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-29.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 29" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 824"></p>
<p>Figure 3-1</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>0</td>
<td>HDD status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>The indicator is off when the HDD is running normally.</li>
<li>The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in</li>
</ul>
<p>malfunction.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>©</td>
<td>Power status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>The indicator is off when the power is connected</li>
</ul>
<p>abnormally.</p>
<ul>
<li>The indicator glows blue when the power is connected</li>
</ul>
<p>normally.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Network status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>The indicator is off when the network connection is</li>
</ul>
<p>correct.</p>
<ul>
<li>The indicator glows blue when the network connection</li>
</ul>
<p>is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark30"></a> 3.1.2 E Model</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>1 I</td>
<td></td>
<td>2</td>
<td>3</td>
<td>1</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>5 7</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ □ □ e</td>
<td>A</td>
<td>□ □</td>
<td>1 □ 1</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 □ 1</td>
<td>1 □ 1</td>
<td>i □ n n d □ □□□ □□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□! □□□□□</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□ □ □</strong></p>
<p><strong>□ □ □</strong></td>
<td>©</td>
<td></td>
<td>3 »</td>
<td>!»</td>
<td>■I</td>
<td></td>
<td>□ n n □ □□□□□ ei □□□ ei □□□ □ □□ r ^<sub>1</sub><sup>LJLJ</sup>A&#8217; i □ ei □ □</p>
<p>• □□ □□□□□ □ □□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □ □□□</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>□ □ </strong>□ □ □ e</li>
<li>□ □ e</li>
<li>□ □ E</li>
<li><strong>□ □ C</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>□ □ □ E</strong></p>
<p><strong>□ D □</strong></p>
<p>□ □ □ E</p>
<p>□ DDE</p>
<p><strong>□ □ □</strong></p>
<p><strong>□ □ □ E</strong></td>
<td colspan="2">□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ O El □ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ □ □ □</td>
<td>□ □</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□</td>
<td colspan="3">□ □ □ □ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ nr</p>
<p>□ □ □ □</p>
<p>c □ □ □ [</p>
<p>□ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ nr</p>
<ul>
<li>□ □ □</li>
<li>□ □</li>
</ul>
<p>□ □ □ □</td>
<td>inn □ nun onn □□□ □ onn n □□□ □ nnn n uu</p>
<p>□ □ODD □□□□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ D El □ □ El El □</p>
<p>□ □ □ n □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ei □ □ □□□□□ □□□□□ ei □ ei □ □ nnn</p>
<p>□ □□□ □ □ □ □□ El □ □ □ □ □□□ El HDD □ □ El EI □</p>
<p>□ □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ C □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □□□</p>
<ul>
<li>□□□□ □□□□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ o □ □</li>
</ul>
<p>inn o □□□ □□□ □□□ □ □□□ □ nnn □ non □ □□ □ □ □ n □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ei □ □ □ □ n □ □ □□□□□ ei □ □ □ □ □□□ □ nnn □ □ ei □ □ □ ei □□□ □ □□□ □ □ □ ei □ □□□ □ □ □ □ nun ei □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ nnn e □□□ □ uu</p>
<ul>
<li>□□□□ □□□ □□□ □ □ □ □ □ o o □ □ □ □□non □ □ □ Q □</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 3-2</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Button/Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>POWER</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD). The indicator glows blue when the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is turned on.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>HDD status indicator</td>
<td>The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in malfunction.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Network status indicator</td>
<td>The indicator glows blue when the network connection is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4,5,6</td>
<td>Battery status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>When the battery remains full or no less than sixty percent,</li>
</ul>
<p>the No.4 indicator is on, and the No.5 and No.6 are out.</p>
<ul>
<li>When the battery remains between thirty percent and sixty</li>
</ul>
<p>percent, the No.5 indicator is on and the others are out.</p>
<ul>
<li>When the battery remains between one percent and thirty</li>
</ul>
<p>percent, the No.6 indicator is on and the others are out.</p>
<ul>
<li>When the battery is exhausted, the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is</li>
</ul>
<p>turned off, or there is no battery attached to the DVR (WITHOUT HDD), all the three indicators are out.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-2</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark32"></a> 3.1.3 Compact 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="111" class="wp-image-2067" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-30.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 30" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 825" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-30.jpeg 624w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-30-300x53.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-3</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td>Glows blue when HDD status is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>NET</td>
<td>Glows blue when network status is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>POWER</td>
<td>Glows blue when the power is connected properly.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-3</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark34"></a> 3.1.4 MINI 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="612" height="180" class="wp-image-2068" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-31.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 31" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 826" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-31.jpeg 612w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-31-300x88.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 612px) 100vw, 612px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="99" height="23" class="wp-image-2069" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-32.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 32" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 827"></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Icon</td>
<td>Function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Power button</td>
<td><strong>0</strong></td>
<td>Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Up Down</td>
<td rowspan="3"><strong>A, ▼</strong></td>
<td>Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Increase/decrease numeral.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Assistant function such as PTZ menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Left</p>
<p>Right</td>
<td rowspan="2"><strong>◄ ►</strong></td>
<td>Shift current activated control,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar..</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td>Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Enter</td>
<td rowspan="3">ENTER</td>
<td>Confirm current operation</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to default button</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="5">Assistant</td>
<td rowspan="5">Fn</td>
<td>One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant <s> funct</s>i<s>on: PTZ contro</s>l <s>and</s> i<s>man</s>e <s>co</s>l<s>or </s></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Realize other special functions.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>USB port</td>
<td></td>
<td>To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Network abnormal indication light</td>
<td>Net</td>
<td>Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD abnormal</p>
<p>indication light</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td>HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IR Receiver</td>
<td>IR</td>
<td>It is to receive the signal from the remote control.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark36"></a> 3.1.5 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="170" class="wp-image-2070" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-33.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 33" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 828" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-33.jpeg 633w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-33-300x81.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-5</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Icon</td>
<td>Function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Power button</td>
<td><strong>o</strong></td>
<td>Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Up Down</td>
<td rowspan="3"><strong>A, ▼</strong></td>
<td>Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Increase/decrease numeral.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Assistant function such as PTZ menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Left</p>
<p>Right</td>
<td rowspan="2"><strong>◄ ►</strong></td>
<td>Shift current activated control,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar..</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td>Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Enter</td>
<td rowspan="3">ENTER</td>
<td>Confirm current operation</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to default button</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Slow play</td>
<td><strong>h</strong></td>
<td>Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Assistant</td>
<td rowspan="2">Fn</td>
<td>One-window monitor mode, click this button to display <s> ass</s>i<s>stant funct</s>i<s>on: pt</s><sub><s>7</s></sub><s> contro</s>l <s>and</s> i<s>man</s>e <s>co</s>l<s>or </s></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3"></td>
<td rowspan="3"></td>
<td>In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Realize other special functions.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>USB port</td>
<td></td>
<td>To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Network abnormal indication</td>
<td>Net</td>
<td>Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD abnormal indication l^ht</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td>HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IR Receiver</td>
<td>IR</td>
<td>It is to receive the signal from the remote control.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-4</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark38"></a> 3.2 Rear Panel</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark40"></a> 3.2.1 Smart 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="828" height="228" class="wp-image-2071" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 34" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 829" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34.jpeg 828w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34-300x83.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34-768x211.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34-810x223.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 828px) 100vw, 828px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-6</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-5</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark42"></a> 3.2.2 E Model</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="311" class="wp-image-2072" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 35" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 830" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35-300x113.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35-768x289.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35-810x305.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-7</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="313" class="wp-image-2073" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 36" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 831" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36-300x114.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36-768x291.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36-810x307.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-8</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7, 8</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>Power output port</td>
<td>Outputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Ground</td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-6</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark44"></a> 3.2.3 Compact 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="188" class="wp-image-2074" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 37" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 832" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37-300x68.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37-768x175.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37-810x184.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-9</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Power cable fastener</td>
<td>Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) in case there is any loss.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-7</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark46"></a> 3.2.4 MINI 1 U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="229" class="wp-image-2075" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 38" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 833" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38-300x83.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38-768x213.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38-810x224.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-10</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">1</td>
<td>Alarm input port 1-16</td>
<td>4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close).</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the alarm input device and the Device have the same ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm output port 1-3 (NO1-NO3;</p>
<p>C1-C3)</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>3 groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port NO1-C1,</li>
</ul>
<p>Group 2: port NO2-C2, Group 3: port NO3-C3). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to the external alarm device.</p>
<ul>
<li>NO: Normal open alarm output port.</li>
<li>C: Alarm output public end.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>J_</td>
<td>Ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone. It corresponds to video input port 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>DB25 port</td>
<td>Connects to the audio splitter taken from the package to convert to audio input port which receives the audio signal from devices such as microphone. It corresponds to video input ports 2-16.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Power cable fastener</td>
<td>Use a cable tie to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) to prevent loss.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-8</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark48"></a> 3.2.5 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="209" class="wp-image-2076" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 39" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 834" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39-300x76.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39-768x194.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39-810x205.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-11</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">2</td>
<td>Alarm input port 1-16</td>
<td>4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close).</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</p>
<p>When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the alarm input device and the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) connect to the same ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm output port 1-3 (NO1-NO3;</p>
<p>C1-C3)</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1-</li>
</ul>
<p>C1,Group 2:port NO2-C2,Group 3:port NO3-C3) ). These</p>
<p>ports output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to the external alarm device.</p>
<ul>
<li>NO : Normal open alarm output port.</li>
<li>C : Alarm output public end.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to the external devices such as keyboard, mouse, and USB storage device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Power cable fastener</td>
<td>Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) in case there is any loss.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-9</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark50"></a> Remote Control Operations</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>Please note the remote control is not our standard accessory and might not be included in the</p>
<p>accessary bag. It is supplied dependent on the model you purchased.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="532" height="634" class="wp-image-2077" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-40.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 40" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 835" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-40.jpeg 532w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-40-252x300.jpeg 252w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 532px) 100vw, 532px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-12</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Address</td>
<td>Press this button to input device serial number, so that you can control the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Forward</td>
<td>Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Slow motion</td>
<td>Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Next record</td>
<td>In playback state, press this button to play back the next video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Previous record</td>
<td>In playback state, press this button to play back the previous video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>Play/Pause</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>In normal playback state, press this button to pause</li>
</ul>
<p>playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>In pause state, press this button to resume to normal</li>
</ul>
<p>playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>In live view window interface, press this button to enter video</li>
</ul>
<p>search menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">8</td>
<td rowspan="2">Reverse/pause</td>
<td>In the reverse playback state, press this button to pause reverse playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In the reverse playback pause state, press this button to resume to playback reversing state.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>Esc.</td>
<td>Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation (close front interface or control).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Record</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Start or stop record manually.</li>
<li>In record interface, use the direction buttons to select the</li>
</ul>
<p>channel that you want to record.</p>
<ul>
<li>Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the manual</li>
</ul>
<p>record interface will be displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>Direction keys</td>
<td>Switch between current activated controls by going left or right. In playback state, the keys control the playback progress bar. Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Enter/menu key</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Confirms an operation.</li>
<li>Go to the <strong>OK </strong>button.</li>
<li>Go to the menu.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Multiple-window switch</td>
<td>Switch between multiple-window and one-window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td>Fn</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>In single-channel monitoring mode, press this button to</li>
</ul>
<p>display the PTZ control and color setting functions.</p>
<ul>
<li>Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control interface.</li>
<li>In motion detection interface, press this button with direction</li>
</ul>
<p>keys to complete setup.</p>
<ul>
<li>In text mode, press and hold this button to delete the last</li>
</ul>
<p>character. To use the clearing function: Long press this button for 1.5 seconds.</p>
<ul>
<li>In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and other</li>
</ul>
<p>information (as indicated in the pop-up message.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>15</td>
<td>Alphanumeric keys</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Input password, numbers.</li>
<li>Switch channel.</li>
<li>Press Shift to switch the input method.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-10</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark52"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark53"></a> Mouse Operations</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Q3 NOTE</p>
<p>The operations are based on the considerations for right-handed users.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Operation</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="6">Click left mouse button</td>
<td>Password input dialogue box pops up if you have not logged in yet. In live view window interface, you can go to the main menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When you have selected one menu item, click it to view menu content.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Implement the control operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Modify checkbox or motion detection status.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Click combo box to pop up drop-down list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In text box, click the corresponding button on the panel to enter a numeral or English character (small/capitalized).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>In English input mode: Click =1 to enter a backspace and click a</p>
<p><strong>Operation</strong></p>
<p><strong>Function</strong></p>
<p>to delete the previous character.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="125" class="wp-image-2078" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-41.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 41" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 836" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-41.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-41-300x63.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>In numeral input mode: Click =1 to clear and click a to delete</p>
<p>the previous character.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="134" height="135" class="wp-image-2079" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-42.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 42" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 837"></p>
<p>Double-click left</p>
<p>mouse button</p>
<p>Right-click</p>
<p>Implement special control operations such as double-click one item in the file list to play back the video.</p>
<p>In multiple-window mode, double-click one channel to view in full-window. Double-click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window mode.</p>
<p>Right-click in live view window interface, the shortcut menu is displayed. For different series product, the shortcut menu may vary.</p>
<p>Exit current menu without saving the modification.</p>
<p>In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.</p>
<p>Click scroll wheel button</p>
<p>Switch the items in the check box.</p>
<p>Page up or page down.</p>
<p>Point to select and move</p>
<p>Select current control and move it.</p>
<p>Dragging selection with left button</p>
<p>a box</p>
<p>mouse</p>
<p>Select motion detection zone.</p>
<p>Select privacy mask zone.</p>
<p>Table 3-11</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="657" height="488" class="wp-image-2080" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-43.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 43" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 838" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-43.jpeg 657w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-43-300x223.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 657px) 100vw, 657px" /></p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark55"></a> Connecting Basics</li>
</ol>
<p>This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations, and typical connection.</p>
<p>Typical Connection Diagram</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall govern.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="886" height="512" class="wp-image-2081" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 44" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 839" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44.jpeg 886w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44-300x173.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44-768x444.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44-810x468.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 886px) 100vw, 886px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="886" height="592" class="wp-image-2082" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 45" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 840" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45.jpeg 886w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45-300x200.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45-768x513.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45-810x541.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 886px) 100vw, 886px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-2</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="886" height="656" class="wp-image-2083" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 46" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 841" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46.jpeg 886w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46-300x222.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46-768x569.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46-810x600.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 886px) 100vw, 886px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-3</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark57"></a> Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark59"></a> Video Input</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The video input interface is BNC. The input video format includes: PAL/NTSC BNC (1.0VP-P, 75Q.).</p>
<p>The video signal should comply with your national standards.</p>
<p>The input video signal shall have high SNR, low distortion; low interference, natural color and suitable lightness.</p>
<p><strong>Guarantee the stability and reliability of the camera signal</strong></p>
<p>The camera shall be installed in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, inflammable, explosive substances and etc.</p>
<p>The camera and the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) should have the same grounding to ensure the normal operation of the camera.</p>
<p><strong>Guarantee stability and reliability of the transmission line</strong></p>
<p>Please use high quality, sound shielded BNC. Please select suitable BNC model according to the transmission distance.</p>
<p>If the distance is too long, you should use twisted pair cable, and you can add video compensation devices or use optical fiber to ensure video quality.</p>
<p>You should keep the video signal away from the strong electromagnetic interference, especially the high-tension current.</p>
<p><strong>Keep connection lugs in well contact</strong></p>
<p>The signal line and shielded wire should be fixed firmly and in well connection. Avoid dry joint, lap welding and oxidation.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark61"></a> Video Output</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Video output includes a BNC (PAL/NTSC1.0Vp-p, 75Q) output, a VGA output and HDMI output. System supports BNC, VGA and HDMI output at the same time.</p>
<p>When you are using pc-type monitor to replace the monitor, please pay attention to the following points:</p>
<ul>
<li>To defer aging, do not allow the pc monitor to run for a long time.</li>
<li>Regular demagnetization will keep device maintain proper status.</li>
<li>Keep it away from strong electromagnetic interference devices.</li>
</ul>
<p>Using TV as video output device is not a reliable substitution method. You also need to reduce the working hour and control the interference from power supply and other devices. The low- quality TV may result in device damage.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark63"></a> Audio Input</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>These series Product audio input port adopt BNC port.</p>
<p>Due to high impedance of audio input, please use active sound pick-up.</p>
<p>Audio transmission is like video transmission. Try to avoid interference, dry joint, loose contact and it shall be away from high tension current.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark65"></a> Audio Output</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The audio output signal parameter is usually over 200mv 1KQ (BNC or RCA). It can directly connect to low impedance earphone, active sound box or amplifier-drive audio output device. If the sound box and the pick-up cannot be separated spatially, it is easy to arouse squeaking. In this case you can adopt the following measures:</p>
<ul>
<li>Use better sound pick-up with better directing property.</li>
<li>Reduce the volume of the sound box.</li>
<li>Using more sound-absorbing materials in decoration can reduce voice echo and improve acoustics environment.</li>
<li>Adjust the layout to reduce happening of the squeaking.
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark67"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark68"></a> Connecting to Alarm Input and Output</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Please read the followings before connecting.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm input</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Please make sure alarm input mode is grounding alarm input.</li>
<li>Grounding signal is needed for alarm input.</li>
<li>Alarm input needs the low-level voltage signal.</li>
<li>Alarm input mode can be either NC (normal Open) or NO (Normal Close)</li>
<li>When you are connecting two DVR (WITHOUT HDD)s or you are connecting one DVR</li>
</ul>
<p>(WITHOUT HDD) and one other device, please use a relay to separate them.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm output</strong></p>
<p>The alarm output port should not be connected to high power load directly (It shall be less than 1A) to avoid high current which may result in relay damage. Please use the contactor to realize the connection between the alarm output port and the load.</p>
<p><strong>How to connect PTZ decoder</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Ensure the decoder has the same grounding with DVR (WITHOUT HDD), otherwise you may not control the PTZ. Shielded twisted wire is recommended and the shielded layer is used to connect to the grounding.</li>
<li>Avoid high voltage. Ensure proper wiring and some thunder protection measures.</li>
<li>For too long signal wires, 120Q should be parallel connected between A, B lines on the far end to reduce reflection and guarantee the signal quality.</li>
<li>“485 A, B” of DVR (WITHOUT HDD) cannot parallel connect with “485 port” of another</li>
</ul>
<p>device.</p>
<ul>
<li>The voltage between of A, B lines of the decoder should be less than 5V.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark70"></a> Please make sure the front-end device has soundly earthed</p>
<p>Improper grounding may result in chip damage.</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark72"></a> .3.1 Introducing Alarm Port</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The alarm input ports are dependent on the model you purchased.</p>
<p>I 4 NOT C1 4 NO2 C2 4 NO3 C3 4 NO4 C4 4- NO5 C5 NC5 4- <sup>C</sup>&lt;2V~ T* T- R+ R- |</p>
<p>[BBHMBBBBBBiaiilIRffBBBBBïHïBBRI I 1 2 3 445 6 7 8 4 A B 4 9 10 11 12 4 13 14 15 16 4 4 |</p>
<p>Figure 4-4</p>
<p><strong>Icon Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,</p>
<p>7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16</td>
<td>ALARM 1 to ALARM 16. The alarm becomes active in low voltage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3 C3, NO4 C4</td>
<td>There are four groups of normal open activation output (on/off button).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NO5 C5 NC5,</td>
<td>There is one group of normal open activation output (on/off button).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>CTRL 12V</td>
<td>Control power output of the 6<strong><sup>th</sup> </strong>alarm output channel. Voltage current: 500mA.</p>
<ul>
<li>When there is an alarm output, close the power output.</li>
<li>When the alarm is cancelled, open the power output.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>+12V</td>
<td>Rated current.</p>
<p>Voltage current: 500mA.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Ground cable.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>485 A/B</td>
<td>485 communication port. They are used to control devices such as decoder. 1200 should be parallel connected between A, B lines if there are too many PTZ decoders.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>T+,T-,R+,R-</td>
<td>Four-wire full-duplex RS485 port.</p>
<p>T+ T-: output wire.</p>
<p>R+ R-: input wire.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-1</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark74"></a> .3.2 Alarm Input</li>
</ul>
<p>Please refer to the following figure for more information.</p>
<ul>
<li>Grounding alarm inputs which includes Normal open and Normal close type.</li>
<li>Please parallel connect COM end and GND end of the alarm detector (Provide external power to the alarm detector).</li>
<li>Please parallel connect the Ground of the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) and the ground of the alarm detector.</li>
<li>Please connect the NC port of the alarm sensor to the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) alarm input(ALARM)</li>
<li>Use the same ground with that of DVR (WITHOUT HDD) if you use external power to the alarm device.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="521" height="307" class="wp-image-2084" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-47.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 47" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 842" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-47.jpeg 521w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-47-300x177.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 521px) 100vw, 521px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-5</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark76"></a> .3.3 Alarm Output</li>
<li>Provide external power to external alarm device.</li>
<li>To avoid overloading, please read the following relay parameters table carefully.</li>
<li>RS485 A/B cable is for the A/B cable of the PTZ decoder.</li>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark78"></a> .3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Refer to the actual product for relay model information.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Model</strong></td>
<td><strong>HFD23/005-1ZS</strong></td>
<td><strong>HRB1-S-DC5V</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Material of the touch</td>
<td>AgNi+ gold-plating</td>
<td>AuAg10/AgNi10/CuNi30</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="4">Rating (Resistance Load)</td>
<td>Rated switch capacity</td>
<td>30V DC 1A/125V AC 0.5A</td>
<td>24V DC 1A/125V AC 2A</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Maximum switch power</td>
<td>62.5VA/30W</td>
<td>250VA/48W</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Maximum switch voltage</td>
<td>125V AC/60V DC</td>
<td>125V AC/60V DC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Maximum switch currency</td>
<td>2A</td>
<td>2A</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Insulation</td>
<td>Between touches</td>
<td>400VAC 1 minute</td>
<td>500VAC 1 minute</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Between touch and winding</td>
<td>1000VAC 1 minute</td>
<td>1000VAC 1 minute</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Turn-on Time</td>
<td>5 ms max</td>
<td>5ms max</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Turn-off Time</td>
<td>5 ms max</td>
<td>5ms max</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Longevity</td>
<td>Mechanical</td>
<td>1x107times</td>
<td>5&#215;106 times</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Model</strong></td>
<td><strong>HFD23/005-1ZS</strong></td>
<td><strong>HRB1-S-DC5V</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>(300 times/MIN)</td>
<td>(300 times/MIN)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Electrical</td>
<td>1*105 times (30 times/MIN)</td>
<td>2.5*104 times (30 times/MIN)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Working Temperature</td>
<td>-30C-+70C</td>
<td>-40C-+70C</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark80"></a> Connecting to RS485 Port</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Connect the RS485 cable of the PTZ camera to the RS485 port on the Device. Ensure the match of A and B interfaces.</p>
<p>Step 2 Connect the video out cable of the PTZ camera to the video input port on the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Turn on the PTZ camera.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark82"></a> Replacing Battery</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Please make sure to use the same battery model if possible.</p>
<p>We recommend replace battery regularly (such as one-year) to guarantee system time</p>
<p>accuracy.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2085" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-48.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 48" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 843"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>Before replacement, please save the system setup, otherwise, you may lose the data completely!</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark84"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark85"></a> Local Configurations</li>
</ol>
<p>Please read the following notes prior to using your Device.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.</li>
<li>The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.</li>
<li>Conventions for mouse operations on a menu.</li>
</ul>
<p>O Click: On the menu, left-click the mouse once on an option to enter the option setting.</p>
<p>O Right-click: On any interface, right-click the mouse once to return to the previous level. For details about mouse operations, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark52">&#8220;3.4 Mouse Operations.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark87"></a> Initial Settings
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark89"></a> Booting up</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Ensure the input voltage corresponds to the power requirement of the Device. Power on the Device after the power cable is properly connected.</li>
<li>To protect the Device, please connect the Device with the power cable first, and then connect to the power source.</li>
<li>To ensure the stable work of the Device and the external devices connected to the Device and to prolong the batter life, it is recommended to refer to the national related standard to use the power source that provides stable voltage with less interference from ripples. USP power source is recommended.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Connect the Device to the monitor.</p>
<p>Step 2 Plug in the power cable to the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Press the power button to turn on the Device. The power indicator light is on.</p>
<p>On the connected monitor, the live view screen is displayed by default. If you turn on the Device during the time period that is configured for recording, the system starts recording after it is turned on, and you will see the icon indicating recording status is working in the specific channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark91"></a> Initializing the Device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When booting up for the first time, you need to configure the password information for <strong>admin </strong>(by default).</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>To secure the Device, it is strongly recommended for you to properly keep the password for admin and modify it regularly.</p>
<p>Step 1 Turn on the Device.</p>
<p>The <strong>Device Initialization </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark93"> Figure 5-1.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="605" class="wp-image-2086" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 49" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 844" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49.jpeg 866w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-768x537.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-810x566.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark93"></a> Step 2 Configure the password information for admin. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark94"> Table 5-1.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User</td>
<td colspan="4">By default, the user is <strong>admin</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td colspan="4" rowspan="2">In the <strong>Password </strong>box, enter the password for admin.</p>
<p>The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contain at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and &#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Confirm Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Prompt Question</td>
<td colspan="4">In the <strong>Prompt Question </strong>box, enter the information that can remind you of the password.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" rowspan="2">On the login interface, click</td>
<td>Efi</td>
<td rowspan="2">, the prompt will display to help you</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>—</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>find back the password.</td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark94"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The unlock pattern setting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark95"> Figure 5-2.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="565" class="wp-image-2087" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 50" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 845" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-768x527.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-810x556.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-145x100.jpeg 145w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-380x260.jpeg 380w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-2</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark95"></a> Step 4 Draw a unlock pattern.</p>
<p>After the setting is completed, the password protection settings interface is displayed.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark96"> Figure 5-3.</a></p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four points.</li>
<li>If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click <strong>Skip</strong>.</li>
<li>Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock</li>
</ul>
<p>pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for login.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="584" class="wp-image-2088" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 51" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 846" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51.jpeg 837w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-300x209.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-768x536.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-810x565.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 837px) 100vw, 837px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark96"></a> Figure 5-3</p>
<p>Step 5 Configure the protection parameters for password. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark97"> Table 5-2.</a></p>
<p>After configuration, if you forgot the password for admin user, you can reset the password through the reserved email address or security questions. For details about resetting the password, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark98">&#8220;5.1.3 Resetting Password.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>If you do not want to configure the settings, disable the email address and security questions functions on the interface.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Password</strong></p>
<p><strong>Protection Mode</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Email Address</td>
<td colspan="3">Enter the reserved email address.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Email Address </strong>box, enter an email address for password reset. In case you forgot password, enter the security code that you will get from this reserved email address to reset the password of admin.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Security</p>
<p>Questions</td>
<td colspan="3">Configure the security questions and answers.</p>
<p>In case you forgot password, enter the answers to the questions can make you reset the password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Œ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">If you want to configure the email or security questions fucntion later or you want to</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark97"></a> change the configurations, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Account </strong>^ <strong>USER</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-2</p>
<p>Step 6 Click <strong>Save </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>The <strong>End-User License Agreement </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step <em>S</em> Select the <strong>I have read and agree to all terms </strong>check box.</p>
<p>Step 8 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Startup Wizard </strong>interface is displayed. For details about quick settings during startup, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark108">&#8220;5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark98"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark99"></a> 5.1.3 Resetting Password</p>
<p>You can reset the password through the QR code or the security questions.</p>
<ul>
<li>To reset through the QR code, make sure the Enable check box is selected in <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>System </strong>^ <strong>SECURITY &gt; Password Reset</strong>.</li>
<li>To reset through the security questions, make sure the security quesitons is configured. Step 1 Enter the login interface.</li>
<li>If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark101"> Figure 5-4.</a> Click <strong>Forgot Pattern</strong>, the password login interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark102"> Figure 5-5.</a></li>
<li>If you did not configure unlock pattern, the password login interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark102"> Figure 5-5.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>On the unlock pattern login interface, click <strong>Switch User </strong>to login<strong>; </strong>or on the password login interface, in the <strong>User Nam</strong>e list, select other users to login.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="331" height="534" class="wp-image-2089" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-52.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 52" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 847" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-52.jpeg 331w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-52-186x300.jpeg 186w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 331px) 100vw, 331px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-4</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="490" height="274" class="wp-image-2090" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-53.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 53" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 848" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-53.jpeg 490w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-53-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 490px) 100vw, 490px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-5</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark101"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark102"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>□.</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark103"> Figure 5-6.</a> Enter the email address, and then click <strong>Next</strong>, the <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark104"> Figure 5-7.</a></li>
<li>If you have set the reserved email address, the <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark104"> Figure 5-7.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="870" height="611" class="wp-image-2091" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 54" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 849" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54.jpeg 870w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54-768x539.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54-810x569.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 870px) 100vw, 870px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark103"></a> Figure 5-6</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="856" height="600" class="wp-image-2092" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 55" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 850" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55.jpeg 856w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55-768x538.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55-810x568.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 856px) 100vw, 856px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-7</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark104"></a> Step 3 Rest the password.</p>
<ul>
<li>QR code</li>
</ul>
<p>Follow the onscreen instructions to get the security code in your reserved email address. In the <strong>Security code </strong>box, enter the security code.</p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>You are given the limited times to get the security code by scanning the QR code within 24 hours. Please operate carefully.</li>
<li>Please use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.</li>
</ul>
<p>• Security questions</p>
<ol>
<li>On the <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface as shown in<a href="#post-2037-bookmark103"> Figure 5-6,</a> in the <strong>Reset Type </strong>list, select <strong>Security Questions</strong>, the Security Questions interface is displayed, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark105">Figure 5-8.</a></li>
</ol>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>If you did not configure the security questions before, in the <strong>Reset Type </strong>list, there will be no <strong>Security Questions</strong>.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Answer </strong>box, enter the correct answers.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="583" class="wp-image-2093" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 56" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 851" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56-768x541.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56-810x571.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-8</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark105"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The new password resetting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark106"> Figure 5-9.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="605" class="wp-image-2094" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 57" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 852" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57.jpeg 862w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57-768x539.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57-810x569.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark106"></a> Step 5</p>
<p>Step 6</p>
<p>Step 7</p>
<p>Figure 5-9</p>
<p>In the <strong>New Password </strong>box, enter the new password and enter it again in the <strong>Confirm Password </strong>box.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Save</strong>. The password resetting is started.</p>
<p>After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed.</p>
<p>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the remote devices, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark107"> Figure 5-10.</a></p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Cancel</strong>, the resetting is finished.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>, the Sync Info interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark107"> Figure 5-10.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="577" class="wp-image-2095" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 58" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 853" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58-768x542.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58-810x572.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-10</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2096" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-59.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 59" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 854"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark107"></a> This message appears only when there are digital channels instead of complete analog channels.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="576" class="wp-image-2097" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 60" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 855" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-300x209.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-768x535.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-810x564.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-11</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark108"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark109"></a> 5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark111"></a> Entering Startup Wizard</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The Startup Wizard helps you configure the basic settings to set up the Device.</p>
<p>After you have initialized the Device, the <strong>Startup Wizard </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark113"> Figure 5­12.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="571" height="384" class="wp-image-2098" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-61.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 61" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 856" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-61.jpeg 571w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-61-300x202.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 571px) 100vw, 571px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-12</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark113"></a> CD NOTE</p>
<p>If you select the <strong>Auto-check for updates </strong>check box, the system will notify you automatically when updates are available.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark114"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark115"></a> Configuring General Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the general settings for the Device such as Device name, language, and settings for instant playback.</p>
<p>You can also configure general settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> System <em>■+</em> General ^ General</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>Startup Wizard </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>General </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark117"> Figure 5-13.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="878" height="614" class="wp-image-2099" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 62" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 857" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62.jpeg 878w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-768x537.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-810x566.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 878px) 100vw, 878px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-13</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the general settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark118"> Table 5-3.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark117"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>Device Name </strong>box, enter the Device name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device No.</td>
<td>In the <strong>Device No. </strong>box, enter a number for the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Language</td>
<td>In the <strong>Language </strong>list, select a language for the Device system.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Standard</td>
<td>In the <strong>Video Standard </strong>list, select <strong>PAL </strong>or <strong>NTSC </strong>according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Instant Play (Min.)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Instant Play </strong>box, enter the time length for playing back the recoded video. The value ranges from 5 to 60.</p>
<p>On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to play back the recorded video within the configured time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto Logout (Min.)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Auto Logout </strong>box, enter the standby time for the Device. The Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the configured time period. You need to login the Device again.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time for the Device.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Monitor Channel(s) when logout</strong>. You can select the channels that you want to continue monitoring when you logged out.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Navigation Bar</td>
<td>Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen, the navigation bar is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark118"></a> Mouse Sensitivity</td>
<td>Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.</p>
<p>The bigger the value is, the faster the double-clicking speed must be.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-3</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark119"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark120"></a> Configuring Date and Time Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the system time, choose the time zone, set the daylight saving time, and enable the NTP server.</p>
<p>You can also configure date and time settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ System <em>■+</em> General ^ Date &amp;Time</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the general settings, on the <strong>General </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Date &amp; Time </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark122"> Figure 5-14.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="831" height="582" class="wp-image-2100" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 63" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 858" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63.jpeg 831w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63-768x538.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63-810x567.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 831px) 100vw, 831px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-14</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark123"> Table 5-4.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark122"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>System Time</td>
<td>In the <strong>System Time </strong>box, enter time for the system.</p>
<p>Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the system, and the time in adjust automatically.</p>
<p>/K CAUTION</p>
<p>Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to avoid the recoding period or stop recording first before you change the system time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Date Format</td>
<td>In the <strong>Date Format </strong>list, select a date format for the system.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Date Separator</td>
<td>In the <strong>Date Separator </strong>list, select a separator style for the date.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Format</td>
<td>In the <strong>Time Format </strong>list, select <strong>12-HOUR </strong>or <strong>24-HOUR </strong>for the time display style.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DST</td>
<td>Enable the Daylight-Saving Time function. Click <strong>Week </strong>or click <strong>Date</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Time</td>
<td rowspan="2">Configure the start time and end time for the DST.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>End Time</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NTP</td>
<td>Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Server</td>
<td>In the <strong>Server </strong>box, enter the IP address or domain name of the corresponding NTP server.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Manual Update</strong>, the Device starts syncing with the server immediately.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>The system supports TCP protocol only and the default setting is 123.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark123"></a> Interval (Min.)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Interval </strong>box, enter the amount of time that you want the Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges from 0 to 65535.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-4</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark124"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark125"></a> Configuring Network Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the basic network settings such as net mode, IP version, and IP address of the Device.</p>
<p>You can also configure network settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the date and time settings, on the <strong>Date&amp;Time </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark127"> Figure 5-15.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="795" height="562" class="wp-image-2101" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 64" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 859" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64.jpeg 795w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64-768x543.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 795px) 100vw, 795px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-15</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for network parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark128"> 0.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark127"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark128"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Net Mode</td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Multi-address</strong>: Two Ethernet ports work separately through either of which you can request the Device to provide the services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default) to request the services from the device end such as DHCP, Email and FTP. If one of the</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>two Ethernet ports is disconnected as detected by networking testing, the system network status is regarded as offline.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Fault Tolerance</strong>: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address.</li>
</ul>
<p>Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this port fails, the other port will start working automatically to ensure the network connection.</p>
<p>When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Load Balance</strong>: Two network cards share one IP address and they</li>
</ul>
<p>are working at the same time to share the network load averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue working normally. When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Default Ethernet Port</td>
<td>In the <strong>Ethernet Card </strong>list, select an Ethernet port as a default port.</p>
<p>This setting is available only when the <strong>Multi-address </strong>is selected in the <strong>Net Mode </strong>list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Version</td>
<td>In the <strong>IP Version </strong>list, you can select <strong>IPv4 </strong>or <strong>IPv6</strong>. Both versions are supported for access.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>MAC Address</td>
<td>Displays the MAC address of the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DHCP</td>
<td>Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled.</p>
<ul>
<li>If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in the <strong>IP</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Address </strong>box, <strong>Subnet Mask </strong>box and <strong>Default Gateway </strong>box. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you want manually to configure the IP information, disable the</li>
</ul>
<p>DHCP function first.</p>
<ul>
<li>If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask,</li>
</ul>
<p>default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Address</td>
<td rowspan="3">Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask and default gateway.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>IP address and default gateway must be in the same network segment.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Subnet Mask</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Default Gateway</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DNS DHCP</td>
<td>Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preferred DNS</td>
<td>In the <strong>Preferred DNS </strong>box, enter the IP address of DNS.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alternate DNS</td>
<td>In the <strong>Alternate DNS </strong>box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>MTU</td>
<td>In the <strong>MTU </strong>box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Modifying MTU value will cause network interruption and restart,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>which interrupt the network service. There is a pop-up message to</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>let you confirm if you want to save the modification, if yes, the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>modification takes effect.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Suggested MTU values are as below.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>O 1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>This value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>connection, and it is also the default value of some routers,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>network adapters and switches.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>O 1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>O 1468: Optimized value for DHCP.</p>
<p>O 1450: Optimized value for VPN.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Test</td>
<td>Click <strong>Test </strong>to test if the entered IP address and gateway are interworking.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-5</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark129"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark130"></a> Configuring InstaOn Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add the Device into your cell phone client or the platform to manage.</p>
<p>You can also configure InstaOn function by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Network <em>■+</em> InstaOn Cloud</strong>.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Make sure the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is connected into the Internet, and if yes, in the <strong>Status </strong>box of the InstaOn interface, it shows <strong>Online</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the network settings, on the <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>InstaOn Cloud </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark132"> Figure 5-16.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="747" height="524" class="wp-image-2102" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-65.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 65" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 860" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-65.jpeg 747w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-65-300x210.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 747px) 100vw, 747px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-16</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark132"></a> Step 2 Enable the InstaOn function.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>You can start adding the device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.</li>
<li>Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the InstaOn management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the InstaOn operation manual.</li>
</ul>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>You can also enter the QR code of Cell Phone Client and Device SN by clicking<br />
on the top right of the interfaces after you have entered the Main Menu.</p>
<p>PG</p>
<p>To use this function, take adding device into Cell Phone Client as an example.</p>
<p><strong>Adding Device into Cell Phone Client</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Use your cell phone to scan the QR code under Cell Phone Client to download the application.</p>
<p>Step 2 On your cell phone, open the application, and then tap .</p>
<p>The menu is displayed. You can start adding the device.</p>
<ol>
<li>Tap <strong>Device Manager</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Device Manager </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark133"> Figure 5-17.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="428" height="731" class="wp-image-2103" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-66.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 66" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 861" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-66.jpeg 428w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-66-176x300.jpeg 176w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 428px) 100vw, 428px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-17</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark133"></a> Tap on the top right corner.</li>
</ol>
<p>The interface requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message reminding you to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Tap <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>O If the Device has not been initialized, Tap <strong>Device Initialization </strong>to perform initializing by following the onscreen instructions.</p>
<p>O If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.</p>
<ol>
<li>Tap <strong>Add Device</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The Add Device interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark134"> Figure 5-18.</a></p>
<p>LJ NOTE</p>
<p>You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual takes adding wired device as an example.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="408" height="640" class="wp-image-2104" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-67.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 67" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 862" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-67.jpeg 408w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-67-191x300.jpeg 191w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 408px) 100vw, 408px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-18</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark134"></a> 5) Tap <strong>InstaOn</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>InstaOn </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark135"> Figure 5-19.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="370" height="534" class="wp-image-2105" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-68.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 68" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 863" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-68.jpeg 370w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-68-208x300.jpeg 208w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 370px) 100vw, 370px" /></p>
<p><strong>..■Il E 10:39 O 41%</strong></p>
<p>(V) Scan QR Code</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="428" height="458" class="wp-image-2106" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-69.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 69" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 864" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-69.jpeg 428w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-69-280x300.jpeg 280w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 428px) 100vw, 428px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-19</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark135"></a> Enter a name for the DVR (WITHOUT HDD), the username and password, scan the QR code under <strong>Device SN</strong>.</li>
<li>Tap <strong>Start Live Preview</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The Device is added and displayed on the live view interface of the cell phone.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark136"> Figure 5-20.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="389" height="664" class="wp-image-2107" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-70.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 70" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 865" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-70.jpeg 389w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-70-176x300.jpeg 176w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 389px) 100vw, 389px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-20</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark136"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark137"></a> Configuring Encode Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the settings of main stream and sub stream for the Device.</p>
<p>You can also configure encode settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera <em>■+</em> Encode ^ Encode</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the InstaOn settings, on the <strong>InstaOn </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>. The <strong>Encode </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark139"> Figure 5-21.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="854" height="599" class="wp-image-2108" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 71" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 866" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71.jpeg 854w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71-768x539.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71-810x568.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 854px) 100vw, 854px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-21</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark139"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark140"> Table 5-6.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Smart Codec</td>
<td>Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Main Stream: In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD </strong>(Motion</li>
</ul>
<p>Detect), or <strong>Alarm</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Compression</td>
<td>In the <strong>Compression </strong>list, select the encode mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.265: Main profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high</li>
</ul>
<p>definition. This setting is recommended.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.264: Main profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher</li>
</ul>
<p>bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.</p>
<p>The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frame Rate (FPS)</td>
<td>Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution.</p>
<p>Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>However, the actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bit Rate Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Bit Rate Type </strong>list, select <strong>CBR </strong>(Constant Bit Rate) or <strong>VBR </strong>(Variable Bit Rate). If you select <strong>CBR</strong>, the image quality cannot be configured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be configured.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Quality</td>
<td>This function is available if you select <strong>VBR </strong>in the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>List. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I Frame Interval</td>
<td>The interval between two reference frames.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bit Rate (Kb/S)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video</td>
<td>Enable the function for sub stream.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Encode</td>
<td rowspan="3">Click <strong>More Setting</strong>, the <strong>More Setting </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Encode: This function is enabled by default for main</li>
</ul>
<p>stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Source: In the <strong>Audio Source </strong>list, you can select <strong>LOCAL</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>and <strong>HDCVI</strong>.</p>
<p>O LOCAL: The audio signal is input from Audio In port.</p>
<p>O HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Format: In the <strong>Audio Forma</strong>t list, select a format that you</li>
</ul>
<p>need.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Source</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Format</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-6</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark140"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark141"></a> Configuring Snapshot Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the basic snapshot settings such as quantity of snapshot each time, channel(s) to take snapshot, and image size and quality of snapshot.</p>
<p>You can also configure general settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>For more information about snapshot settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark365">&#8220;5.8 Configuring Snapshot Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the <strong>Encode </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SNAPSHOT </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark143"> Figure 5-22.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="778" height="545" class="wp-image-2109" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 72" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 867" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72.jpeg 778w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72-768x538.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 778px) 100vw, 778px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-22</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark143"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark144"> Table 5-7.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual Snap</td>
<td>In the <strong>Manual Snap </strong>list, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select type of snapshots.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Size</td>
<td>In the <strong>Image Size </strong>list, select a value for the image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Quality</td>
<td>Configure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark144"></a> Interval</td>
<td>Configure or customize the snapshot frequency.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-7</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark145"></a> Configuring Basic Storage Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the settings for the situations when HDD is full, file length and time length of recorded video, and the settings if to auto-delete the old files.</p>
<p>You can also configure basic storage settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ BASIC</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the <strong>SNAPSHOT </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>BASIC </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark147"> Figure 5-23.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="711" height="501" class="wp-image-2110" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-73.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 73" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 868" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-73.jpeg 711w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-73-300x211.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 711px) 100vw, 711px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-23</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark147"></a> Step 2 Configure the basic storage settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark148"> Table 5-8.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD Full</td>
<td>Configure the settings for the situation when all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Stop Record </strong>to stop recording</li>
<li>Select <strong>Overwrite </strong>to overwrite the recorded video files always</li>
</ul>
<p>from the earliest time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pack Mode</td>
<td>Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto-Delete Old Files</td>
<td>Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, in the <strong>Auto­Delete Old Files </strong>list, select <strong>Customized </strong>to configure the time length for how long you want to keep the old files.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-8</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark148"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark149"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark150"></a> Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the schedule for the recorded video such as channels to record, alarm settings, and the armed period.</p>
<p>You can also configure recorded video storage settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage <em>■+ </em>Schedule ^ Record</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the basic storage settings, on the <strong>BASIC </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Record </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark152"> Figure 5-24.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="713" height="500" class="wp-image-2111" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-74.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 74" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 869" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-74.jpeg 713w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-74-300x210.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 713px) 100vw, 713px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-24</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark152"></a> Step 2 Configure the record settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark153"> Table 5-9.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to record the video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pre-record</td>
<td>In the <strong>Pre-record </strong>list, enter the amount of time that you want to start the recording in advance.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Redundancy</td>
<td>If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded files into different HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged, you can find the backup in the other HDD.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Storage </strong>^ <strong>HDD MANAGER</strong>, and then set</li>
</ul>
<p>a HDD as redundant HDD.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Storage </strong>^ <strong>Schedule </strong>^ <strong>Record</strong>, and</li>
</ul>
<p>then select the <strong>Redundancy </strong>check box.</p>
<p>O If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy</p>
<p>function takes effect next time you record no matter you select the check box or not.</p>
<p>O If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded</p>
<p>files will be packed, and then start recording according to the new schedule.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Not all models support this function.</li>
<li>The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but not</li>
</ul>
<p>snapshots.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event type</td>
<td>Select the check box of the event type which includes <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD </strong>(motion detect, video loss, tempering, diagnosis), <strong>Alarm </strong>(IoT alarms, local alarms, alarms from alarm box, IPC external alarms, IPC Offline alarms), <strong>MD &amp; Alarm</strong>, <strong>Intel </strong>(IVS events, face detection), and <strong>POS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the configured recording setting is active.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p><strong>Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>EO NOTE</p>
<p>The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark153"></a> Copy</td>
<td>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-9</p>
<p>Step 3 Define the video recording period by drawing or editing. By default, it is active all the time.</p>
<p>• Define the period by drawing.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the check box of event type. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark154"> Figure 5-25.</a></li>
</ol>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark154"></a> B General</p>
<p><strong>■ MD</strong></p>
<p>| Alarm</p>
<p>MD&amp;Alarm ■ Intel</p>
<p>■ 90S</p>
<p>Figure 5-25</p>
<ol>
<li>Define a period. The system supports maximum six periods.</li>
</ol>
<p>o</p>
<p>Define for the whole week: Click H next to <strong>All</strong>, all the icon switches to □</p>
<p>o</p>
<p>you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.</p>
<p>Define for several days of a week: Click H before each day one by one, the</p>
<p>icon switches to S. You can define the period for the selected days</p>
<p>simultaneously.</p>
<p>On the timeline, drag to define a period. The Device starts recoding the selected<br />
event type in the defined period. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark155"> Figure 5-26.</a></p>
<p>3)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="850" height="404" class="wp-image-2112" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 75" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 870" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75.jpeg 850w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75-300x143.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75-768x365.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75-810x385.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 850px) 100vw, 850px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-26</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark155"></a> The color bar indicates the event type that is effective in a defined period:</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Recording priority in case of event types are overlapped: <strong>MD&amp;Alarm </strong><em>•+ </em><strong>Alarm ^ Intel ^ MD ^ General</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p>Select the check box of event type, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="42" height="41" class="wp-image-2113" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-76.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 76" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 871"></p>
<p>to clear the defined</p>
<p>period.</p>
<ul>
<li>When selecting MD&amp;Alarm, the respective check box of MD and Alarm will be cleared.</li>
</ul>
<p>• Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.</p>
<p>1)</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2114" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-77.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 77" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 872"></p>
<p>The <strong>Period </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark156"> Figure 5-27.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="853" height="479" class="wp-image-2115" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 78" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 873" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78.jpeg 853w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 853px) 100vw, 853px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-27</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark156"></a> Enter the time frame for the period and select the event check box.</li>
</ol>
<p>O There are six periods for you to set for each day.</p>
<p>O Under <strong>Copy</strong>, select <strong>All </strong>to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</li>
<li>After configuring the recording schedule settings, you need to perform the following operations to start recording according to the defined schedule. O Enable the alarm event and cofigure the settings for the recording channel.</li>
</ul>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark447">&#8220;5.10 Alarm Events Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>O You need to enable the recording function, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">Control.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark157"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark158"></a> 5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule</p>
<p>You can configure the storage schedule for the snapshot such as channels to take snapshot, alarm settings, and the armed period.</p>
<p>You can also configure snapshot storage settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage <em>■+</em></strong></p>
<p><strong>Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the video recording settings, on the <strong>Record </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SNAPSHOT </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark160"> Figure 5-28.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="9">Snapshot</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel 1</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Alt</td>
<td colspan="2">Q General</td>
<td>■ MD</td>
<td>■ Alarm</td>
<td colspan="2">MD&amp;Alarm</td>
<td>■ Intel</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>0</td>
<td>2 4</td>
<td>6 8</td>
<td>10 12 14</td>
<td>16 18</td>
<td>20</td>
<td>22 24</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Sunday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ Monday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Tuesday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>«</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ Wednes&#8230;</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Thursday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>o</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Friday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Saturday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Default</p>
<p>Copy</p>
<p>Back Finished Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-28</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark160"></a> Step 2 Configure the snapshot settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark161"> Table 5-10.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to take a snapshot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event type</td>
<td>Select the check box of the event type which includes <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD</strong>, <strong>Alarm</strong>, <strong>MD&amp;Alarm</strong>, <strong>Intel</strong>, and <strong>POS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the configured snapshot setting is active. For details about defining a period, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Recorded Video Storage Schedule.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark161"></a> Copy</td>
<td>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-10</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Finished</strong>.</p>
<p>A pop-up message is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The live view screen is displayed. The setting up with startup wizard is completed. You can start using the Device.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark162"></a> 5.2 Live View</p>
<p>After you logged in the Device, the live view is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark164"> Figure 5-29.</a> The number of channels displayed depends on your model.</p>
<p>To enter the live view screen from other interfaces, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="53" height="46" class="wp-image-2116" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-79.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 79" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 874"></p>
<p>on the top right of the screen.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="664" class="wp-image-2117" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 80" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 875" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80-300x241.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80-768x617.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80-810x650.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-29</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark164"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark165"></a> Live View Screen</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the live video from the connected cameras through each channel on the screen.</p>
<ul>
<li>By default, the system time, channel name and channel number are displayed on each channel window. This setting can be configured by selecting <strong>Main Menu &gt; Camera &gt; OVERLAY.</strong></li>
<li>The figure in the bottom right corner represents channel number. If the channel position is changed or the channel name is modified, you can recognize the channel number by this figure and then perform the operations such as record query and playback.</li>
</ul>
<p>For the icons displayed on each channel, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark167"> Table 5-11.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■1</td>
<td>Indicates recording status. This icon displays when the video is being recorded.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>This icon displays when the motion detection occurs in the scene.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>?</td>
<td>This icon displays when the video loss is detected.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark167"></a> a</td>
<td>This icon displays when the channel monitoring is locked.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-11</p>
<p>TIPS</p>
<p>To switch the position of two channels, point to one of the two channels, and then drag the window to the other channel.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark168"></a> Live View Control bar</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The live view control bar provides you access to perform the operations such as playback, zoom, real-time backup, manual snapshot, voice talk, adding remote devices, and streams switch.</p>
<p>When you move the pointer to the top middle position of a channel window, the live view control bar is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark170"> Figure 5-30 </a>for analog channel and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark171"> Figure 5-31 </a>for digital channel.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>If there is not operation for six seconds after the control bar is displayed, the control bar hides automatically.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="474" height="429" class="wp-image-2118" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-81.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 81" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 876" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-81.jpeg 474w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-81-300x272.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 474px) 100vw, 474px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark170"></a> Figure 5-30</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="473" height="439" class="wp-image-2119" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-82.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 82" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 877" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-82.jpeg 473w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-82-300x278.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 473px) 100vw, 473px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark171"></a> Figure 5-31</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Instant Play</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>Manual Snap</td>
<td>7</td>
<td>Add IP Camera</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Digital Zoom</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>Mute</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Real-time</p>
<p>Backup</td>
<td>6</td>
<td>Audio Talk</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark172"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark173"></a> 5.2.2.1 Instant Playback</p>
<p>You can play back the previous five minutes to sixty minutes of the recorded video.</p>
<p>By clicking □, the instant playback interface is displayed. The instant playback has the</p>
<p>following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.</li>
<li>Play, pause and close playback.</li>
<li>The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant playback and will not display until exited.</li>
<li>During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.</li>
<li>To change the playback time, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>System &gt; GENERAL</strong>, in the <strong>Instant Play </strong>box, enter the time you want to play back. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark175"> Figure 5-32.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="794" height="447" class="wp-image-2120" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 83" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 878" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83.jpeg 794w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 794px) 100vw, 794px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-32</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark175"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark176"></a> 5.2.2.2 Digital Zoom</p>
<p>You can enlarge a specific area of the image to view the details by either of the following two ways.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click Ltl, the icon switches to ^3. Hold down the left mouse button to select the area</li>
</ul>
<p>you want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.</p>
<ul>
<li>Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>For some models, when the image is enlarged in the first way described previously, the selected area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.</li>
<li>When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view the other enlarged areas.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p>Right-click on the enlarged image to return the original status.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark178"></a> Real-time Backup</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.</p>
<p>By clicking , the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is</p>
<p>automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark180"></a> Manual Snapshot</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.</p>
<p>By clicking you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the</p>
<p>connected USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>To change the quantity of snapshots, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Camera </strong>^ <strong>Encode </strong>^ <strong>Snapshot</strong>, in the <strong>Manual Snap </strong>list, select the snapshot quantity.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark182"></a> Mute (Analog channel only)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can mute the video sound by clicking</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="33" class="wp-image-2121" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-84.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 84" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 879"></p>
<p>. This function is supported in single-channel</p>
<p>view.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark184"></a> Bidirectional Talk (Digital channel only)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve<br />
efficiency of emergency. This function is supported only when the remotely connected IPC<br />
device supports bidirectional talk.</p>
<p>, the icon switches to ^3, the bidirectional talk of the remote device is turned</p>
<p>on. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is disabled.</p>
<p>• Click □ to cancel the bidirectional talk. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is resumed.</p>
<p>• Click</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark186"></a> Remote Devices (Digital channel only)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the information of remote devices and add new remote devices to replace the current connected devices.</p>
<p>By clicking LJ, the <strong>Camera Registration </strong>interface is displayed. For details about adding the</p>
<p>remote devices, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark308">&#8220;5.6 Configuring Remote Devices.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark188"></a> 5.2.3 Navigation Bar</p>
<p>You can access the functions to perform operations through the function icons on the navigation bar. For example, you can access Main Menu and switch window split mode. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark190"> Figure 5-33.</a> CD NOTE</p>
<p>The navigation bar is disabled by default. It does not appear in the live view screen until it is enabled. To enable it, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>System </strong>^ <strong>General</strong>, enable the Navigation Bar, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="40" class="wp-image-2122" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 85" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 880" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85.jpeg 826w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85-300x15.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85-768x37.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85-810x39.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-33</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark190"></a><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">□</td>
<td>Open <strong>Main Menu</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">0</td>
<td>Expand or condense the navigation bar.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">i_uuia»</td>
<td>Select view layout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Go to the previous screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">IE]</td>
<td>Go to the next screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Enable tour function. The icon switches to ^^3.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">□</td>
<td>Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark228">&#8220;5.4 Controlling</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark228">PTZ Cameras.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Open the <strong>Color Setting </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark195">&#8220;5.2.5 Color</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark195">Setting.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>CD <strong>NOTE</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>This function is supported only in single-channel layout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Open the record search interface. For detail, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark386">&#8220;5.9 Playing</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark386">Back Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">H</td>
<td>Open the <strong>EVENT </strong>interface to view the device alarm status. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark852">&#8220;5.19.3 Viewing Event Information.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">E3</td>
<td>Open the <strong>CHANNEL INFO </strong>interface to display the information of each channel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Open the <strong>CAMERA REGISTRATION </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark311">&#8220;5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Open the <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark619">&#8220;5.14.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark619">Configuring Network Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">o</td>
<td>Open the <strong>HDD MANAGER </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark749">&#8220;5.17.3</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark749">Configuring HDD Manager.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Open the <strong>USB MANAGER </strong>interface. For details about USB operations, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark611">&#8220;5.13.2 Backing up Files&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark847">&#8220;5.19.2 Viewing Log</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark847">Information&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark818">&#8220;5.18.5 Exporting and Importing System Settings&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark831">&#8220;5.18.7 Upgrading the Device.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-12</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark191"></a> 5.2.4 Shortcut Menu</p>
<p>You can quickly access some function interfaces such as main menu, record search, PTZ setting, color setting and select the view split mode.</p>
<p>Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark193"> Figure 5-34.</a> For details about the functions of shortcut menu, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark194"> Table 5-13.</a></p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>After you access any interface through shortcut menu, you can return to the previous screen by right-clicking on the current screen.</p>
<p><strong>Main Menu</strong></p>
<p><strong>Q Search</strong></p>
<p><strong>W PTZ</strong></p>
<p>■ View 1 ►</p>
<p>S View 4 »</p>
<p>■- View 8 ►</p>
<p>S View 9 ►</p>
<p>Si View 16 : Previous Screen : Next Screen</p>
<p>S Manual ►</p>
<p>Preview Mode »</p>
<p><strong>S Color Setting</strong></p>
<p><strong>3G</strong></p>
<p><strong>a Image</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-34</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark193"></a><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Main Menu</td>
<td>Open <strong>Main Menu </strong>interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Search</td>
<td>Open the <strong>Playback </strong>interface where you can search and play back record files.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Open the <strong>PTZ </strong>interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>View Layout</td>
<td>Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or multi­channel layout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Previous Screen</td>
<td rowspan="2">Click Previous Screen to go to the previous screen. For example, if you are using 4-split mode, the first screen is displaying the channel 1-4, click <strong>Next screen</strong>, you can view channel 5-8.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Next Screen</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Camera Registration</td>
<td>Open the <strong>CAMERA REGISTRATION </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark308">&#8220;5.6 Configuring Remote Devices</a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><a href="#post-2037-bookmark308">Adding Remote Devices.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Record</strong>, you can configure the recording mode as</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Auto </strong>or <strong>Manual</strong>, or stop the recording. You can also enable or disable snapshot function</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Alarm Out</strong>, you can configure alarm output settings.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Mode</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>General</strong>, the layout of live view screen is as default.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Show Face Lis</strong>t, the detected face snapshots are</li>
</ul>
<p>displayed in the bottom of the live view screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto Focus</td>
<td>Point to the channel window and right-click on it to open the shortcut menu, and then click <strong>Auto Focus</strong>.</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all cameras support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Color Setting</td>
<td>Open the <strong>COLOR </strong>interface where you can adjust the video image color.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark194"></a> Image</td>
<td>Click to modify the camera properties.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-13</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark195"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark196"></a> Color Setting</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can adjust the video image color effect such as sharpness, brightness, and contrast. The parameters are different according to the connected camera type. Take analog channel as an example.</p>
<p>In the live view screen, right-click on the analog channel to see the shortcut menu, and then select <strong>Color Setting</strong>, the <strong>COLOR </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark198"> Figure 5-35.</a></p>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark279">&#8220;5.5.1 Configuring Image Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="529" height="585" class="wp-image-2123" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-86.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 86" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 881" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-86.jpeg 529w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-86-271x300.jpeg 271w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 529px) 100vw, 529px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark198"></a> Figure 5-35</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Divide 24 hours into two periods and configure the corresponding color settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Effective Time</td>
<td>Enable the function and then set the effective time for each period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sharpness</td>
<td>Adjust the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Hue</td>
<td>Adjust the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Brightness</td>
<td>Adjust the image brightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.</p>
<p>The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is too big.</p>
<p>The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Contrast</td>
<td>Adjust the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to become dim.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Saturation</td>
<td>Adjust the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. This value does not influence the general image lightness.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Color Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Color Mode </strong>list, you can select <strong>Standard</strong>, <strong>Soft</strong>, <strong>Bright</strong>, <strong>Colorful</strong>, <strong>Bank</strong>, <strong>Customized 1</strong>, <strong>Customized 2</strong>, <strong>Customized 3, </strong>and <strong>Customized 4</strong>.</p>
<p>The sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation will adjust automatically according to the selected color mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>EQ</td>
<td>Enhance the image effect. Adjust the effect value.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> Click ^3, image is adjusted to the optimized effect</p>
<p>automatically.</p>
<p>• Click ^3, the current effect setting will be locked.</p>
<p>EO NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Only HD analog channel supports this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Position</td>
<td>Adjust the display position of the image in the channel window.</p>
<p>The value indicates pixel. The default value is 16.</p>
<p>CO NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>This function is only supported by analog channel.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Customized</td>
<td>You can customize four color modes.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Customized</strong>. The <strong>Customized Color </strong>interface is</li>
</ol>
<p>displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Color Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Customized 1</strong>, for example.</li>
</ol>
<p>Then configure the settings for sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation. If you select <strong>All</strong>, the configuration will apply to all four customized color modes.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
<li>On the <strong>COLOR </strong>interface, in the <strong>Color Mode </strong>list, you can</li>
</ol>
<p>select the customized color mode.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-14</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark199"></a> Live View Display</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="979" height="492" class="wp-image-2124" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 87" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 882" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87.jpeg 979w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87-300x151.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87-768x386.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87-810x407.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 979px) 100vw, 979px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark201"></a> Configuring Display Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image transparency, and selecting the resolution.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display </strong><em>■+</em><strong> Display</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>DISPLAY </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark203"> Figure 5-36.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="784" height="439" class="wp-image-2125" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 88" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 883" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88.jpeg 784w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 784px) 100vw, 784px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-36</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark203"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the display parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark204"> Table 5-15.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="7">Main</p>
<p>Screen</td>
<td>Out Port</td>
<td>Indicates the main screen port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Title</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Time Title </strong>check box, the current system time displays in each channel window in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the check box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel Title</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Channel Title </strong>check box, the channel name, channel number and recording status display in each channel window in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the check box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Original Rate</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Original Rate </strong>check box, the video image displays in its actual size in the channel window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IVS Rule Preview</td>
<td>Select the <strong>IVS Rule Preview </strong>check box to enable IVS rule preview function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Transparency</td>
<td>Configure the transparency of the graphical user interface (GUI). The higher the value, the more transparent the GUI becomes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>Select resolution for the video. The default resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is 1280&#215;1024.</p>
<p>OJ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Some of the resolution options might not be supported on the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Mode</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>General: No information is displayed on the channel</li>
</ul>
<p>window.</p>
<ul>
<li>Show Face List: Displays the detected face snapshots</li>
</ul>
<p>taken as a result of face detection on the bottom of the live view screen.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p><strong>Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable extra screen function. After this function is enabled, you can select which port as extra screen port, and the other port automatically becomes the main screen port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Extra</p>
<p>Screen</td>
<td>Out Port</td>
<td>Select the VGA port or HDMI port as the port connected by a secondary monitor. For example, if you select HDMI port as the extra screen port, the VGA port automatically becomes the main screen port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>Select resolution for the video. The default resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is 1280&#215;720.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Some of the resolution options might not be supported on the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>• The main menu does not display on the extra screen.</p>
<p>• If you do not enable the extra screen function, both the VGA port and HDMI port</p>
<p>display the same image.</p>
<p>Table 5-15</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark204"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark205"></a> Configuring Viewing Layout</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the view layout in the live view screen.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ VIEW</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>View Setting </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark207"> Figure 5-37.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="722" height="408" class="wp-image-2126" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-89.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 89" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 884" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-89.jpeg 722w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-89-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 722px) 100vw, 722px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-37</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark207"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark208"></a> Step 2 Configure the view layout by clicking the layout buttons on the bottom. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark208"> Figure 5­38.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="228" height="56" class="wp-image-2127" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-90.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 90" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 885"></p>
<p>Figure 5-38</p>
<p>For example, click and select <strong>9-16</strong>, the view layout changes immediately,</p>
<p>see</p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark209">Figure 5-39.</a></p>
<p>Ji</p>
<p>DISPLAY</p>
<p>DISPLAY</p>
<p>VIEW</p>
<p>TOUR</p>
<p>ZERO-CHANNEL</p>
<p>• A S (!)</p>
<p>Display / DISPLAY / VIEW</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="631" height="367" class="wp-image-2128" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-91.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 91" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 886" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-91.jpeg 631w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-91-300x174.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 631px) 100vw, 631px" /></p>
<p>Apply Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-39</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark209"></a> Step 3 Adjust the position of channels if needed.</p>
<p>In the channel list, for example, in the channel 9 list, you can select 10, and then the channel 9 and channel 10 exchange positions.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>The live view screen displays the same layout as configured in this section.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark210"></a> Configuring Zero-Channel Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view several video sources on one channel on the web end.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Display <em>■&gt;</em> Zero-Channel</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ZERO-CHANNEL </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark212"> Figure 5-40.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="833" height="469" class="wp-image-2129" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 92" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 887" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92.jpeg 833w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 833px) 100vw, 833px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark212"></a> Figure 5-40</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the zero-channel parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark213"> Table 5-16.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable zero-channel function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Compression</td>
<td>In the <strong>Compression </strong>list, select the video compression standard according to the device capability. The default is H.264.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>In the <strong>Resolution </strong>list, select the video resolution. The default is 704&#215;576 (D1).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frame Rate (FPS)</td>
<td>Select a value between 1 and 25 for PAL standard, and between 1 and 30 for NTSC standard. The actual arrange is decided and selected dependent on the Device capability.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark213"></a> Bit Rate (Kb/S)</td>
<td>The default value is 1024Kb/S. The actual arrange is decided and selected dependent on the Device capability and frame rate.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-16</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>In the live interface on the web, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="355" height="31" class="wp-image-2130" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-93.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 93" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 888" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-93.jpeg 355w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-93-300x26.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 355px) 100vw, 355px" /></p>
<p>to select one of the</p>
<p>multi-channel modes, and then you can view the local video image.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark214"></a> Configuring TV</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Œ NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>You can adjust the border margins in top, bottom, left and right directions as well as the brightness of the monitor connected to the Video out port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ Tv Adjust</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>TV ADJUST </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark216"> Figure 5-41.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>DISPLAY</td>
<td>Tûp Mai yin</td>
<td><strong>-Ö</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>+ 0</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>VIEW</td>
<td>Rcltcwn Margin</td>
<td>-o</td>
<td></td>
<td>+ Û</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>KHJR</td>
<td>Leit Mai jo</td>
<td>-o</td>
<td></td>
<td>+ 0</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>ZERO-CHANHEL</td>
<td>FùgFl Mai pn</td>
<td>-o</td>
<td></td>
<td>+ 0</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>TV ADJUST</td>
<td>Brightness</td>
<td></td>
<td>o</td>
<td>+ 12«</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark216"></a><strong>OeiMlt OK Bad.</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-41</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the parameters according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark217"></a> Configuring Tour Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system is playing one channel group for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Display ^ TOUR</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>TOUR </strong>interface is displayed. There are MainScreen tab and ExtraScreen tab, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark219"> Figure 5-42 </a>and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark220"> Figure 5-43.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="734" height="18" class="wp-image-2131" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-94.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 94" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 889" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-94.jpeg 734w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-94-300x7.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 734px) 100vw, 734px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>DISPLAY</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Display &gt;</strong></td>
<td><strong>&#8216; DISPLAY /</strong></td>
<td><strong>&#8216; TOUR</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>DISPLAY</strong></td>
<td><strong>Main Screen</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>VIEW</strong></td>
<td><strong>Enable</strong></td>
<td><strong>!■</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Interval(Sec)</strong></td>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>TOUR</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Video Detect</strong></td>
<td><strong>View 1</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>ZERO-CHANNEL</strong></td>
<td><strong>Alarm</strong></td>
<td><strong>Viewl</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Window Split</strong></td>
<td><strong>Viewl</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="570" height="181" class="wp-image-2132" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-95.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 95" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 890" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-95.jpeg 570w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-95-300x95.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 570px) 100vw, 570px" /></p>
<p><strong>Add Modify Delete Move up Move down</strong></p>
<p><strong>Default</strong></p>
<p><strong>Apply Back</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-42</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark219"></a><strong>V </strong>DISPLAY</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>CtSFLAV</td>
<td><strong>Mùiî</strong> Szceri</td>
<td>EKii’j <strong>Soma</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>YEW</td>
<td>En-sWe</td>
<td>■_</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1C4JR</td>
<td><strong>Itïï-vAÎSm.</strong> j</td>
<td>5</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">ffiAOrCMWfflÊL</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Lfrrta Efdii</td>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">77Âri.ii.F$,T</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IB J</td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>C-A-nd i&#8221;r&gt;xi2</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="464" height="23" class="wp-image-2133" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-96.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 96" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 891" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-96.jpeg 464w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-96-300x15.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 464px) 100vw, 464px" /></p>
<p>a j a</p>
<p>3 2</p>
<p>4 ■/ 4</p>
<ol>
<li>i</li>
<li>/ ?</li>
</ol>
<p>u <em>j</em> a</p>
<p>B J S</p>
<p>TO J TO</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark220"></a> Md Krikty lifte to Mow up «uwiiwffl</p>
<p>Figure 5-43</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the tour parameters for both Main Screen and Extra Screen.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark221"> Table 5-17.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable tour function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval (Sec.)</td>
<td>Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Detect, Alarm</td>
<td>Select the View 1 or View 8 for <strong>Motion Detect </strong>tour and <strong>Alarm </strong>Tour (system alarm events).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Window Split</td>
<td>In the <strong>Window Split </strong>list, select <strong>View 1</strong>, <strong>View 4</strong>, <strong>View 8</strong>, or other modes that are supported by the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel Group</td>
<td>Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.</p>
<ul>
<li>Add a channel group: Click <strong>Add</strong>, in the pop-up <strong>Add Group</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>channel, select the channels to form a group, and then click <strong>Save</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Delete a channel group: Select the check box of any channel</li>
</ul>
<p>group, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Edit a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group</li>
</ul>
<p>and then click <strong>Modify</strong>, or double-click on the group. The <strong>Modify Channel Group </strong>dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Move up </strong>or <strong>Move down </strong>to adjust the position of channel</li>
</ul>
<p>group.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-17</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark221"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings. TIPS</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>On the top right of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press Shift</p>
<p>to switch between (image switching is allowed) and &#8216;•=?&gt; (image switching is</p>
<p>not allowed) to turn on/off the tour function.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>On the navigation bar, click</td>
<td>o</td>
<td>to enable the tour and click</td>
<td></td>
<td>to disable</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>it.</p>
<p><strong>Adding a Channel Group</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark222"> Figure 5-44.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="587" height="340" class="wp-image-2134" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-97.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 97" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 892" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-97.jpeg 587w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-97-300x174.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 587px) 100vw, 587px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-44</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark222"></a> Step 2 Select the channels that you want to group for tour. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark223"> Figure 5-45.</a></p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>If you want to select more than one channel, in the <strong>Window Split </strong>list, do not select <strong>View 1</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="587" height="337" class="wp-image-2135" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-98.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 98" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 893" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-98.jpeg 587w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-98-300x172.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 587px) 100vw, 587px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-45</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark223"></a><strong>Modifying a Channel Group</strong></p>
<p>Double-click on a channel group, the <strong>Modify Channel Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark224"> Figure</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark224">5-46.</a></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark224"></a> You can modify channel group and click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="572" height="323" class="wp-image-2136" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-99.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 99" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 894" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-99.jpeg 572w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-99-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 572px) 100vw, 572px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-46</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark225"></a> 5.3 Entering Main Menu</p>
<p>Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed, Click Main Menu and then login the system. The Main Menu is displayed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark227"> Figure 5-47.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="513" class="wp-image-2137" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 100" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 895" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100.jpeg 866w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100-300x178.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100-768x455.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100-810x480.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark227"></a> Figure 5-47</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td colspan="3">Function tiles</td>
<td>Includes eleven function tiles: <strong>Video</strong>, <strong>Backup</strong>, <strong>Camera</strong>, <strong>Network</strong>, <strong>Event</strong>, <strong>intelligent</strong>, <strong>Storage</strong>, <strong>Display, Account, System</strong>, and <strong>Info</strong>. Click each tile to open the configuration interface of the tile.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Video</strong>: Search for and play back the recorded video saved on the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Backup</strong>: Search and back up the video files to the local PC or</li>
</ul>
<p>external storage device such as USB storage device.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Camera</strong>: Configure the Encode settings of camera, remote device,</li>
</ul>
<p>snapshot settings etc.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Network</strong>: Configure the network parameter (TCP/IP), Port settings,</li>
</ul>
<p>InstaOn Cloud etc.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Event</strong>: Search for alarm information and configure alarm event</li>
</ul>
<p>actions.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Intelligent</strong>: Configure the behavior detections by drawing rules for</li>
</ul>
<p>detecting tripwire, intrusion, abandoned objects, and missing objects, POS (Point of Sale), Face Detection and loT.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Storage</strong>: Hard disk details, record plan configuration for video and</li>
</ul>
<p>snapshot.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Display</strong>: Configure the display effect such as displaying content,</li>
</ul>
<p>image transparency, and resolution, and enable the zero-channel function.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Account</strong>: Create, Delete, Modify user account or user group and</li>
</ul>
<p>Onvif User.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>System</strong>: General settings for DVR (WITHOUT HDD) like as date &amp;</li>
</ul>
<p>time, language settings and PTZ settings.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Info</strong>: Manage Log files and firmware version with device details..</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td colspan="3">Live</td>
<td><strong>Click </strong>to go to the live view screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>D</strong></td>
<td>When you point to <strong>^3, </strong>the current user account is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td></td>
<td>■ ■</td>
<td></td>
<td>Click Q, select <strong>Logout</strong>, <strong>Reboot</strong>, or <strong>Shutdown </strong>according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Displays <strong>Cell Phone Client </strong>and <strong>Device SN </strong>QR Code.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to</li>
</ul>
<p>add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device from your cell phone.</p>
<ul>
<li>Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to</li>
</ul>
<p>the InstaOn management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the InstaOn operation manual. You can also configure InstaOn function in the local configurations. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark129">&#8220;5.1.4.5 Configuring InstaOn Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-18</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark228"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark229"></a> 5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras</p>
<p>PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around view to the camera.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Before operating PTZ, please assure the network connection between PTZ and the Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark231"></a> Configuring PTZ Connection Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You need to configure the PTZ connection settings before use.</p>
<ul>
<li>Local connection: RS485 Port for connecting Speed Dome or coaxial cable for connecting coaxial camera.</li>
<li>Remote connection: local area network.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ PTZ</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark233"> Figure 5-48.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="829" height="464" class="wp-image-2138" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 101" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 896" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101.jpeg 829w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 829px) 100vw, 829px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-48</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark233"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the PTZ connection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark234"> Table 5-19.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ camera to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ Type</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Local: Connect through RS485 port or coaxial cable.</li>
<li>Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ</li>
</ul>
<p>camera to the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Control Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Control Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Serial </strong>or <strong>HDCVI</strong>. For HDCVI series product, please select HDCVI. The control signal is sent to the PTZ through the coaxial cable. For the serial mode, the control signal is sent to the PTZ through the RS485 port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protocol</td>
<td>In the <strong>Protocol </strong>list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera, for example, select <strong>HDCVI3.0</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>In the <strong>Address </strong>box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1. CO NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Address</td>
<td>The entered address must be the same with the address configured on</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>the PTZ camera; otherwise the PTZ camera cannot be controlled from</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Baudrate</td>
<td>In the <strong>Baudrate </strong>list, select the baudrate for the PTZ camera. The default is 9600.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data Bits</td>
<td>The default is 8.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Stop Bits</td>
<td>The default is 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark234"></a> Parity</td>
<td>The default is NONE.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-19</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark235"></a> Working with PTZ Control Panel</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions, adjusting zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark237"></a> Basic PTZ Control Panel</p>
<p>Right-click on the live view screen and then select <strong>PTZ</strong>. The PTZ control panel is displayed. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark239">Figure 5-49.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="379" height="168" class="wp-image-2139" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-102.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 102" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 897" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-102.jpeg 379w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-102-300x133.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 379px) 100vw, 379px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-49</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2140" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-103.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 103" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 898"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark239"></a> The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Speed</td>
<td>Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the faster the movement will be.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Zoom</td>
<td><strong>3: </strong>Wide angle.</p>
<p><strong>^3: </strong>Long shot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Focus</td>
<td><strong>3: </strong>Zoom in. <strong>^3: </strong>Zoom out.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Iris</td>
<td>3: Small.</p>
<p>^3: Large.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ movement</td>
<td>Supports eight directions.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="3">Fast positioning button.</p>
<p>• Positioning: Click ^3 to enter the fast positioning screen, and</p>
<p>then click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ will turn to this point and move it to the middle of the screen.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a square on</p>
<p>the view. The square supports zooming.</p>
<p>O Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging downward is</p>
<p>to zoom in.</p>
<p>O The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function and can only be controlled through mouse operations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Click U, you can control the four directions (left, right, up, and down) PTZ movement through mouse operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="3">Click ^3 to open the expanded PTZ control panel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-20</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark240"></a> Expanded PTZ Control Panel</p>
<p>On the basic PTZ control panel, click</p>
<p>to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more</p>
<p>options. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark242"> Figure 5-50.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2141" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-104.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 104" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 899"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="590" height="164" class="wp-image-2142" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-105.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 105" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 900" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-105.jpeg 590w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-105-300x83.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 590px) 100vw, 590px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-50</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark242"></a> • The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.</p>
<p>• Right-click once to return to the interface of PTZ basic control panel.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>01</strong></td>
<td>Preset</td>
<td></td>
<td>Auto Pan</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>A * *-•</td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Flip</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Pattern</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Reset</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Autoscan</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Click the <strong>AUX Config </strong>icon to open the PTZ functions settings interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>AUX Switch</td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Click the <strong>Enter Menu </strong>icon to open the <strong>MENU OPERATION </strong>interface.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-21</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark243"></a> Configuring PTZ Functions
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark245"></a> Configuring Presets</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="35" class="wp-image-2143" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-106.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 106" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 901"></p>
<p>The <strong>Preset </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark247"> Figure 5-51.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="514" height="327" class="wp-image-2144" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-107.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 107" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 902" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-107.jpeg 514w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-107-300x191.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 514px) 100vw, 514px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-51</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark247"></a> Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Preset </strong>box, enter the value to represent the required position.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Setting </strong>to complete the preset settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark248"></a> Configuring Tours</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click the <strong>Tour </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Tour </strong>tab is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark250"> Figure 5-52.</a></p>
<p><strong>PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border</strong></p>
<p><strong>Preset i</strong></p>
<p><strong>Patrol&#8230; o</strong></p>
<p><strong>Add Preset</strong></p>
<p><strong>Del Preset</strong></p>
<p><strong>Del Tour</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-52</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark250"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Patrol No</strong>. box, enter the value for the tour route.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>Preset </strong>box, enter the preset value.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Add Preset</strong>.</p>
<p>A preset will be added for this tour.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>You can repeat adding more presets.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Del Preset </strong>to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated to delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark251"></a> Configuring Patterns</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="36" class="wp-image-2145" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-108.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 108" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 903"></p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2</p>
<p>Click the <strong>Pattern </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Pattern </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark253"> Figure 5-53.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="511" height="324" class="wp-image-2146" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-109.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 109" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 904" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-109.jpeg 511w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-109-300x190.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 511px) 100vw, 511px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-53</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark253"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Pattern </strong>box, enter the value for pattern.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Start </strong>to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.</p>
<p>Step 5 On the <strong>PTZ </strong>interface, click <strong>End </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark254"></a> Configuring AutoScan</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click .</p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click the <strong>Border </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Border </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark256"> Figure 5-54.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="514" height="326" class="wp-image-2147" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-110.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 110" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 905" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-110.jpeg 514w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-110-300x190.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 514px) 100vw, 514px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-54</p>
<p>Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right borders.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark256"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark257"></a> Calling PTZ Functions</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark259"> Figure 5-55.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>a.<strong> Speed 5</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>No. 0</strong></td>
<td><em>9</em></td>
<td>▼</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>— Zoom</strong></td>
<td>+</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>&lt; i.Q ► _</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>0|</td>
<td></td>
<td>• • 1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>— Focus</strong></td>
<td>+</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><sup>v</sup> 8 — Iris</strong></td>
<td>+</td>
<td>iol <img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" />*</td>
<td></td>
<td>0</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-55</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark259"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark260"></a> Calling Presets</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the preset that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click [Si to call the preset.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click [Si again to stop calling the preset.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark262"></a> Calling Tours</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the tour that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click to call the tour.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="36" class="wp-image-2148" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-111.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 111" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 906"></p>
<p>again to stop calling the tour.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark264"></a> Calling Patterns</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the pattern that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Call <strong>I9l </strong>to call the pattern.</p>
<p>The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click ISI again to stop calling the pattern.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark266"></a> Calling AutoScan</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the border that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click SI.</p>
<p>The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>l^l </strong>again to stop auto canning.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark268"></a> Calling AutoPan</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1</p>
<p>On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="36" class="wp-image-2149" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-112.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 112" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 907"></p>
<p>to start moving in horizontal direction.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click s</p>
<p>again to stop moving.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark270"></a> Using AUX Button</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click , the AUX setting interface is displayed. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark272">Figure 5-56.</a></p>
<ul>
<li>In the <strong>Direct Aux </strong>list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.</li>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark272"></a> In the <strong>Aux Num </strong>box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the</li>
</ul>
<p>decoder.</p>
<p><strong>AUX</strong></p>
<p><strong>On Off</strong></p>
<p><strong>On Off</strong></p>
<p><strong>Direct </strong>Aux</p>
<p><strong>NONE</strong></p>
<p><strong>Aux Num</strong></p>
<p><strong>1</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-56</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark273"></a> Calling OSD Menu</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>For the coaxial camera, you can call the OSD menu through the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark259"> Figure 5-55.</a></p>
<p>Step 1</p>
<p>On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2150" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-113.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 113" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 908"></p>
<p>The <strong>MENU OPERATION </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark275"> Figure 5-57.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="473" height="310" class="wp-image-2151" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-114.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 114" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 909" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-114.jpeg 473w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-114-300x197.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 473px) 100vw, 473px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-57</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark275"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Enter</strong>.</p>
<p>The OSD menu is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark276"> Figure 5-58.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="528" height="331" class="wp-image-2152" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-115.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 115" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 910" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-115.jpeg 528w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-115-300x188.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-58</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark276"></a> Step 3 On the <strong>MENU OPERATION </strong>interface, click the arrow button to select the onscreen parameters.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Enter </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark277"></a> 5.5 Configuring Camera Settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="933" height="525" class="wp-image-2153" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 116" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 911" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116.jpeg 933w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 933px) 100vw, 933px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark279"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark280"></a> Configuring Image Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the image settings such as saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness for</p>
<p>each connected camera.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ IMAGE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IMAGE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark282"> Figure 5-59 </a>for analog channel and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark283"> Figure 5</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark283">60 </a>for digital channel.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="455" class="wp-image-2154" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 117" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 912" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117.jpeg 862w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117-300x158.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117-768x405.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117-810x428.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark282"></a> Figure 5-59</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="873" height="490" class="wp-image-2155" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 118" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 913" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118.jpeg 873w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 873px) 100vw, 873px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-60</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark283"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the image parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark284"> Table 5-22.</a></p>
<p>On the digital channel interface, click <strong>More Setting </strong>to display more parameters.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Cable Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Cable Type </strong>list, select the cable type that the camera uses. EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>In the <strong>Period </strong>list, select a time period for the image settings. The image settings will be only used during the selected period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Effective Time</td>
<td>Enable the effective function.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Effective Time </strong>box, enter the start time and end time for the period you selected.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Saturation</td>
<td>Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. This value does not influence the general image lightness.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Contrast</td>
<td>Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to become dim.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Brightness</td>
<td>Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is too big.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Hue</td>
<td>Adjusts the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sharpness</td>
<td>Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Enhance</td>
<td>Adjusts the image definition. The bigger the value is, the clearer the image will become, but there will be more noises.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NR</td>
<td>Reduces the noises from image. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Config File</td>
<td>In the <strong>Config File </strong>list, select <strong>Day</strong>, <strong>Night</strong>, <strong>Normal</strong>, or <strong>Switch By Period</strong>. The system configures the parameters correspondingly.</p>
<ul>
<li>Day: Apply the configuration during daytime.</li>
<li>Night: Apply the configuration during nighttime.</li>
<li>Normal: Apply the configuration during day and night.</li>
<li>Switch by Period: If you select this option, you need to configure</li>
</ul>
<p>the sunrise time and sunset time where you are located.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mirror</td>
<td>Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will be switched. It is disabled by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3D Denoise</td>
<td>This function specially applies to the image which frame rate is configured as 2 at least. It reduces the noises by making use of the information between two frames. The bigger the value is, the better the effect.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Flip</td>
<td>In the <strong>Flip </strong>list, you can select <strong>180° </strong>to change the video image display.</p>
<p>By default, the setting is <strong>No Flip</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Light</td>
<td>In the <strong>Light </strong>list, select <strong>Close </strong>or <strong>Enable </strong>to use the backlight compensation or not.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Scene Mode</td>
<td>Configure the white balance to adjust the general hue of the image.</p>
<p>The default setting is <strong>Auto</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto: Automatically apply white balance to different colors to</li>
</ul>
<p>make the image color display normally.</p>
<ul>
<li>Sunny: Apply the threshold value to sunny environment.</li>
<li>Night: Apply the threshold value to night.</li>
<li>Customized: Manually adjust the Red Gain and Blue Gain</li>
</ul>
<p>values.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Day &amp; Night</td>
<td>Configure the color and black&amp;white mode of the image. This setting is not affected by the configuration files. The default setting is <strong>Auto</strong>. • Color: The camera outputs color image only.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and</li>
</ul>
<p>whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&amp;white image is output.</p>
<ul>
<li>B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.</li>
<li>By Time: The camera outputs image according to the configure</li>
</ul>
<p>the sunrise time and sunset time.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-22</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark284"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark285"></a> Configuring Encode Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera^ ENCODE ^ Encode</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Encode </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark287"> Figure 5-61.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="845" height="478" class="wp-image-2156" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 119" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 914" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119.jpeg 845w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 845px) 100vw, 845px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-61</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark287"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark288"> Table 5-23.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Smart Codec</td>
<td>Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Main Stream: In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD </strong>(Motion</li>
</ul>
<p>Detect), or <strong>Alarm</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Compression</td>
<td>In the <strong>Compression </strong>list, select the encode mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.265: Main profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high</li>
</ul>
<p>definition. This setting is recommended.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.264: General profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher</li>
</ul>
<p>bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.</p>
<p>The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frame Rate (FPS)</td>
<td>Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution.</p>
<p>Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.</p>
<p>However, the specific range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Quality</td>
<td>This function is available if you select <strong>VBR </strong>in the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>List. The higher the value, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I Frame Interval</td>
<td>The interval between two reference frames.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bit Rate (Kb/S)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video</td>
<td>Enable the function for sub stream.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Encode</td>
<td rowspan="3">Click <strong>More Setting</strong>, the <strong>More Setting </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Encode: This function is enabled by default for main</li>
</ul>
<p>stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Source: In the <strong>Audio Source </strong>list, you can select <strong>LOCAL</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>and <strong>HDCVI</strong>.</p>
<p>O LOCAL: The audio signal is input from Audio input port.</p>
<p>O HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Format: In the <strong>Audio Forma</strong>t list, select a format that you</li>
</ul>
<p>need.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Source</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark288"></a> Audio Format</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-23</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="178" height="35" class="wp-image-2157" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-120.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 120" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 915"></p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark289"></a> Configuring Snapshot Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Camera^ Encode &gt; Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark291"> Figure 5-62.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="844" height="472" class="wp-image-2158" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 121" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 916" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121.jpeg 844w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121-768x429.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 844px) 100vw, 844px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-62</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark291"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark292"> Table 5-24.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual Snap</td>
<td>In the <strong>Manual Snap </strong>list, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, you can select <strong>Human Face</strong>, <strong>Event</strong>, or <strong>General </strong>as the event type for which you want to take a snapshot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Size</td>
<td>In the <strong>Image Size </strong>list, select a value for the image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Quality</td>
<td>Configures the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark292"></a> Interval</td>
<td>Configures or customizes the snapshot frequency.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-24</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark293"></a> Configuring Overlay Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure to display system time and channel name on each channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ OVERLAY ^ Overlay</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Overlay </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark295"> Figure 5-63.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="874" height="489" class="wp-image-2159" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 122" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 917" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122.jpeg 874w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 874px) 100vw, 874px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-63</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark295"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the text overlay parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark296"> Table 5-25.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Display</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Time Display </strong>check box to display the system time on each channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Time Display </strong>list, select time display style.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark296"></a> Channel Title</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Channel Title </strong>check box to display the channel name on each channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Channel Title </strong>box, enter the name for the selected channel.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-25</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark297"></a> Configuring Covered Area Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ OVERLAY ^ Cover-Area</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Cover-Area </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark299"> Figure 5-64.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="883" height="494" class="wp-image-2160" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 123" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 918" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123.jpeg 883w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 883px) 100vw, 883px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-64</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark299"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the covered area parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark300"> Table 5-26.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview</p>
<p>Record</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Preview: Select the <strong>Preview </strong>check box to apply the configured</li>
</ul>
<p>covered block to the selected channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<ul>
<li>Record: Select the <strong>Record </strong>check box to apply the configured</li>
</ul>
<p>covered block to the selected channel window during recording.</p>
<p>To configure covering block, do the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the <strong>Preview </strong>check box or the <strong>Record </strong>check box, or</li>
</ol>
<p>select the both. The &#8220;1,2, 3, 4&#8221; buttons are activated.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click the buttons to select blocks.</li>
<li>A triangle solid black block is displayed. You can drag the block</li>
</ol>
<p>to the area that you want to cover and adjust the size of the block.</p>
<ol>
<li>You can configure total 4 covered blocks.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-26</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark300"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark301"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark302"></a> Configuring Channel Type</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the channel type as <strong>Analog </strong>or <strong>IP </strong>channel.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Camera ^ CHANNEL TYPE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>CHANNEL TYPE </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark304"> Figure 5-65.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="463" class="wp-image-2161" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 124" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 919" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-65</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark304"></a> Step 2 Configure the channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>Analog Channel: Select the transmission medium such as CVI, CVBS, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.</li>
<li>IP Channel: Select a channel for IP camera from the last channel number, for example, in<a href="#post-2037-bookmark304"> Figure 5-65,</a> select from the <strong>17-24 </strong>check box. Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p>Œ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The 17-24 channels are only for IP camera and the range changes dependent on the model you purchased.</li>
<li>The channel selection for analog camera or IP camera are in sequence, for example, if you want to select channels for IP camera, you need to select the <strong>17-24 </strong>check box first, and then you cannot jump to select the channel <strong>15 </strong>directly until you have selected the channel <strong>16</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark305"></a> 5.5.7 Upgrading Coaxial Camera</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ COAXIAL UPGRADE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>COAXIAL UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark307"> Figure 5-66.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="897" height="506" class="wp-image-2162" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 125" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 920" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125.jpeg 897w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 897px) 100vw, 897px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-66</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark307"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Browse</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Select the upgrade file and click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>COAXIAL UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>You need to insert the USB storage device that contains the upgrading files.</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the check box of the channel that you want to upgrade.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Start Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>If the upgrading is successful, the system pops up a message indicating the upgrading</p>
<p>is completed. If the upgrading is failed, please check if the Device</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark308"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark309"></a> 5.6 Configuring Remote Devices</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark311"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark312"></a> 5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>This function is available after you have configured the channel type as IP channel as described in previous section, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark301">&#8220;5.5.6 Configuring Channel Type.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>You can add remote devices by adding the IP address.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Registration</strong>, the <strong>Registration </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark314"> Figure 5-67.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="842" height="473" class="wp-image-2163" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 126" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 921" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126.jpeg 842w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 842px) 100vw, 842px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-67</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark314"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Uninitialized</td>
<td>Enable the <strong>Uninitialized </strong>function, the uninitialized devices out of the searched devices are displayed in the searched device list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Initialize</td>
<td>Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list, and the click <strong>Initialize </strong>to start initializing device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Filter</td>
<td>In the <strong>Show Filter </strong>list, select the remote device type that you want to display in the searched device list.</p>
<ul>
<li>None: Display all types of devices.</li>
<li>IPC: Display the front-end devices.</li>
<li>DVR (WITHOUT HDD): Display all storage devices such as</li>
</ul>
<p>NVR, DVR (WITHOUT HDD) and HCVR.</p>
<ul>
<li>OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or DVR</li>
</ul>
<p>(WITHOUT HDD) type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Searched Device List</td>
<td>Displays the searched devices. You can view the device information such as status, IP address.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device Search</td>
<td>Click <strong>Device Search</strong>, the searched devices display in the searched device list.</p>
<p>To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click the IP address, Manufacturer, Type, MAC Address, Port, or Device Name text. For example, click the IP address text, the sequence icon OZES is displayed.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>&#8220;*&#8221; is displayed next to the added device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Add</td>
<td>In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you want to add.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual Add</td>
<td>Add the device by manually configuring settings such as IP address, channel selection. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark328">&#8220;5.6.1.4 Adding Remote Devices</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark328">Manually.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Added Device List</td>
<td>Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device, and view the device information.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Delete</td>
<td>Select the check box of the added device, and then click <strong>Delete </strong>to delete the added device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Import</td>
<td>Select the searched devices and then click <strong>Import </strong>to import the devices in batches.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Export</td>
<td>Select the added devices and then click <strong>Export</strong>. The exported devices information is saved into the USB storage device.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-27</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark315"></a> 5.6.1.2 Initializing Remote Devices</p>
<p>You can reset the password and IP address of the remote devices through initializing.</p>
<p>Step <strong>1 </strong>Click <strong>Device Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The searched devices are displayed in the table. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark317"> Figure 5-68.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="839" height="473" class="wp-image-2164" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 127" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 922" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127.jpeg 839w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 839px) 100vw, 839px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-68</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark317"></a> Step 2 Enable the Initialized function.</p>
<p>The uninitialized devices are displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark318"> Figure 5-69.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="444" class="wp-image-2165" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 128" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 923" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128.jpeg 787w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-69</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark318"></a> Step 3 Select the uninitialized device that you want to initialize.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Initialize</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Enter Password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark319"> Figure 5-70</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="417" class="wp-image-2166" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-129.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 129" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 924" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-129.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-129-300x212.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-70</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark319"></a> Step 5 Configure the password and email information.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>If you select the <strong>Using current device password and email info </strong>check box, the remote device automatically uses the current password and email information, so you do not need to set the password and email address again and can go to Step 6.</p>
<ol>
<li>Clear the <strong>Using current device password and email info </strong>check box.</li>
</ol>
<p>The password setting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark320"> Figure 5-71.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="417" class="wp-image-2167" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-130.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 130" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 925" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-130.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-130-300x212.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-71</p>
<p>2) Configure the settings for the password setting parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark321"> Table 5-28.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark320"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User</td>
<td>The default is admin.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td>The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and &#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark321"></a> Confirm Password</td>
<td>Please enter a strong password according to the password strength bar indication.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-28</p>
<p>3) Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Password Protection </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark322"> Figure 5-72</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="598" height="418" class="wp-image-2168" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 131" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 926" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131.jpeg 598w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 598px) 100vw, 598px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-72</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark322"></a> Select the <strong>Email Address </strong>box and enter the email address that you want to reserve for password reset in the future.</li>
</ol>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>If you do not want to set the reserved email address, click <strong>Skip</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 6 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark323"> Figure 5-73.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="538" class="wp-image-2169" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-132.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 132" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 927" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-132.jpeg 763w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-132-300x212.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 763px) 100vw, 763px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-73</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark323"></a> Step <em>C</em> Configure the IP address.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the <strong>DHCP </strong>check box, you do not need to enter the IP address information, because the system will allocate one IP address to the remote device.</li>
<li>Select the <strong>STATIC </strong>check box, you need to enter the IP address, subnet mast, default gateway, and incremental value. The system will allocate the IP address to the remote devices by progressively increasing the last part of the IP address when initializing devices in batches.</li>
</ul>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>When configuring IP address for multiple remote devices which were not in the same network segment, these remote devices will belong to the same network segment after configuration.</p>
<p>Step 8 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The initializing is started. After the process is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark324"> Figure 5-74.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="583" class="wp-image-2170" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 133" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 928" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133-768x541.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133-810x571.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-74</p>
<p>Step 9 Click <strong>Finished </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark324"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark325"></a> 5.6.1.3 Adding Remote Devices Automatically</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>Registration </strong>interface, click <strong>Device Search</strong></p>
<p>The searched devices are displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark327"> Figure 5-75.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="786" height="439" class="wp-image-2171" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 134" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 929" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134.jpeg 786w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134-768x429.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 786px) 100vw, 786px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-75</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark327"></a> Step 2 Select the check box of the device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The device is added into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>You can also double-click the device to add it into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</li>
<li>You can add devices in batches.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark328"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark329"></a> 5.6.1.4 Adding Remote Devices Manually</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>Registration </strong>interface, click <strong>Manual Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Manual Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark331"> Figure 5-76.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="492" height="568" class="wp-image-2172" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-135.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 135" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 930" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-135.jpeg 492w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-135-260x300.jpeg 260w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 492px) 100vw, 492px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-76</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark331"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the manual adding device parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark332"> Table 5-29.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want use on the Device to connect the remote device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manufacturer</td>
<td>In the <strong>Manufacturer </strong>list, select the manufacturer of the remote device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Address</td>
<td>In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote device. CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>RTSP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HTTP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td>Enter the user name of the remote device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td>Enter the password of the user for the remote device</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Remote Channel</td>
<td>Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that you want to add.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Decoder Buffer</td>
<td>In the <strong>Decoder Buffer </strong>list, select <strong>Default</strong>, <strong>Realtime</strong>, or <strong>Fluent</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark332"></a> Protocol Type</td>
<td>Select <strong>Auto</strong>, <strong>TCP</strong>, <strong>UDP</strong>, or <strong>MULTICAST</strong>. The default is <strong>TCP</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-29</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>• Only one device can be added manually at one time.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="32" height="36" class="wp-image-2173" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-136.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 136" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 931"></p>
<p>indicates successful connection and</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="36" height="32" class="wp-image-2174" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-137.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 137" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 932"></p>
<p>indicates connection failed.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark333"></a> Modifying or Deleting Remote Devices</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can modify and delete the added devices.</p>
<ul>
<li>To modify the remote devices, do the following:</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Click □ or double-click a device.</p>
<p>The <strong>Edit </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark335"> Figure 5-77.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="476" height="548" class="wp-image-2175" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-138.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 138" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 933" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-138.jpeg 476w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-138-261x300.jpeg 261w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 476px) 100vw, 476px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-77</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark335"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to modify settings for.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the user name and password to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>To delete one or more added devices, do the following:</li>
</ul>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="36" class="wp-image-2176" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-139.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 139" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 934"></p>
<p>to delete one device</p>
<p>o Select the check box of the devices that you want to delete, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark336"></a> Modifying IP Address</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can modify a single IP address or multiple IP addresses of remote devices at the one time.</p>
<p>• To modify a single IP address, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 In the Searched Device list area, click □ for the device that you want to modify IP.</p>
<p>The <strong>Modify IP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark338"> Figure 5-78.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="499" height="413" class="wp-image-2177" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-140.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 140" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 935" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-140.jpeg 499w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-140-300x248.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 499px) 100vw, 499px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-78</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark338"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, user name, and password.</p>
<p>Step 3 Enable the <strong>Add </strong>function to add the device into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>• To modify IP address in batches, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 In the Searched Device list area, select the devices that you want to modify IP address in batches.</p>
<p>Step 2</p>
<p>Click □.</p>
<p>The <strong>Modify IP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark339"> Figure 5-79.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="462" height="384" class="wp-image-2178" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-141.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 141" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 936" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-141.jpeg 462w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-141-300x249.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 462px) 100vw, 462px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-79</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark339"></a> Step 3 Enable the <strong>Batch Modify </strong>function.</p>
<p>Step 4 Configure the settings for start IP address (the IP address is allocated in sequence), subnet mask, default gateway, user name, and password.</p>
<p>Step 5 Enable the <strong>Add </strong>function to add the devices into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</p>
<p>Step 6 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark340"></a> Exporting IP Address</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can export the added IP address to the USB storage device.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The exported information is saved in .csv file, which includes IP address, port number, channel number, manufacturer, user name, and password.</p>
<p>Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click <strong>Export.</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark342"> Figure 5-80.</a></p>
<p>Browse</p>
<p>Device Name sdcl(USBUSB) • 3.71 GB/3.73 GB(Free/Total) Refresh Format</p>
<p>Address /</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
<td>Play</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ {fd2b025a-ac98-e383-13ea-lcf86fc539fb}</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>là printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>lg kmsg_printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>Ale</td>
<td><strong>dk</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1 SmartPlayer.exe.lnk</td>
<td>L7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317134749_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317135000_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td><strong>5&#8242;</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl ty.lnk</td>
<td>1.7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>Ale</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl kmsg_printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>Ale</td>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>New Folder OK Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-80</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark342"></a> Step 3 Configure the save path.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>A pop-up message indicating &#8220;Successfully exported&#8221; is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark343"></a> Importing IP Address</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add remote devices by importing IP address information.</p>
<p>Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click <strong>Import</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark345"> Figure 5-81.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="564" class="wp-image-2179" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 142" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 937" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142.jpeg 788w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142-300x215.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142-768x550.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-81</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark345"></a> Step 3 Select the file that you want to import.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to start importing.</p>
<p>After importing is completed, a pop-up message indicating &#8220;The import succeeded&#8221; is displayed.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>If the IP address that you want to import already exists in the Device, the system will pop up a message to ask you whether to overwrite the existing content.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>OK </strong>to replace the existing one.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Cancel </strong>to add it as a separate device in the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</li>
</ul>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>You can edit the exported .csv file and be cautious not to change the file format; otherwise the file cannot be imported as it will be judged as invalid.</li>
<li>The language of .csv file must match the Device language.</li>
<li>The import and export through customized protocol is not supported.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark346"></a> 5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices</p>
<p>You can view the status of remote devices and upgrade.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark348"></a> Viewing Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the device information such as connection status, IP address, motion detection, video loss detection, camera name, and manufacturer.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Status</strong>, the <strong>Status </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark350"> Figure 5-82.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="466" class="wp-image-2180" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 143" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 938" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143-768x435.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-82</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark350"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark351"></a> Viewing Firmware Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the device firmware information such as channel number, IP address, manufacturer, system version, video input, audio input, and alarm in.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Firmware</strong>, the <strong>Firmware </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark353"> Figure 5-83.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="899" height="507" class="wp-image-2181" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 144" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 939" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144.jpeg 899w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 899px) 100vw, 899px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-83</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark353"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark354"></a> Upgrading Remote Devices</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Upgrade </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark356"> Figure 5-84.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="796" height="450" class="wp-image-2182" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 145" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 940" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145.jpeg 796w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 796px) 100vw, 796px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-84</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark356"></a> Step 2 Upgrade the device.</p>
<p>• File Upgrade</p>
<ol>
<li>Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.</li>
<li>Select the devices that you want to upgrade.</li>
<li>Click <strong>File upgrade</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>File Upgrade </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the upgrading files and click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>• Online Upgrade</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Detect </strong>or select the check box the device that you want to upgrade and click <strong>Manual Check</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The system starts detecting if there is a new version on the online server.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the check box of all the devices that have new version.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Online Upgrade</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The system will pop up a message to indicate if the upgrading is successful.</li>
<li>You can use the Type list to filter the devices so that you can find the devices</li>
</ul>
<p>quickly.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark357"></a> Configuring Record Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can record video manually or automatically and configure the recording settings to main stream and sub stream respectively.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark359"></a> Enabling Record Control</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2183" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-146.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 146" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 941"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access <strong>STORAGE </strong>settings.</li>
<li>Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.</li>
</ul>
<p>To enter the record control interface, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu, select <strong>Manual <em>■&gt;</em> Record Control</strong>. The <strong>RECORD </strong>interface is displayed, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark361">Figure 5-85.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="850" height="598" class="wp-image-2184" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 147" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 942" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147.jpeg 850w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147-768x540.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147-810x570.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 850px) 100vw, 850px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-85</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark361"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark362"> Table 5-30.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels.</p>
<p>You can select a single channel or select <strong>All</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record status</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Automatically record according to the record type and</li>
</ul>
<p>recording time as configured in the recording schedule.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected</li>
</ul>
<p>channel.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: Do not record.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark362"></a> Snapshot status</td>
<td>Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-30</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark363"></a> Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark365"></a> You need to configure the storage schedule for the recorded video so that the recorded video can be saved. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark366"></a> Configuring Snapshot Settings
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark368"></a> Configuring Snapshot Trigger</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The snapshot is divided into scheduled snapshot, event triggered snapshot, and face detection triggered snapshot. When the both are enabled, the event triggered snapshot has the priority.</p>
<ul>
<li>If there is no alarm event, the system performs scheduled snapshot.</li>
<li>If there is any alarm event, the system performs event triggered snapshot.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark370"></a> 5.8.1.1 Configuring Scheduled Snapshot</p>
<p>Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 On the shortcut menu, select <strong>Manual </strong>^ <strong>Record Control</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>RECORD </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Snapshot </strong>area, enable the snapshot for the channels if needed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark372"> Figure 5­86.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="813" height="567" class="wp-image-2185" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 148" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 943" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148.jpeg 813w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-300x209.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-768x536.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-810x565.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 813px) 100vw, 813px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-86</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark372"></a> Step 4 Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Camera </strong>^ <strong>Encode </strong>^ <strong>Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>General</strong>, and then configure other parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark373"> Figure 5­87.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="758" height="427" class="wp-image-2186" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-149.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 149" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 944" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-149.jpeg 758w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-149-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 758px) 100vw, 758px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-87</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark373"></a> Step 6 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you have configured the snapshot schedule, the configuration has been completed.</li>
<li>If you have not configured the snapshot schedule, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">&#8220;5.1.4.10 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">Snapshot Storage Schedule.</a>&#8221;
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark374"></a> Configuring Event Triggered Snapshot</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>, and then configure other parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark376"> Figure 5-88.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="857" height="483" class="wp-image-2187" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 150" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 945" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150.jpeg 857w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 857px) 100vw, 857px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-88</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark376"></a> Step 3 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event <em>■&gt;</em> VIDEO DETECT</strong>, and select the event type to configure, for example, select the <strong>Motion Detect </strong>tab. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark377"> Figure 5-89.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="894" height="502" class="wp-image-2188" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 151" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 946" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151.jpeg 894w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 894px) 100vw, 894px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-89</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark377"></a> Step 4 Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box and select the corresponding channel.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark378"></a> Configuring Face Detection Triggered Snapshot</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ Encode &gt; Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Human Face</strong>, and then configure other parameters. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark380">Figure 5-90.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="461" class="wp-image-2189" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 152" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 947" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-90</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark380"></a> Step 3 Select <strong>Main Menu -&gt;Intelligent^ Face Detect ^ Parameters &gt; Human Face</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Human Face </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark381"> Figure 5-91.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="880" height="497" class="wp-image-2190" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 153" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 948" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153.jpeg 880w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 880px) 100vw, 880px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-91</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark381"></a> Step 4 Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box and select the corresponding channel.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark382"></a> Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You need to configure the storage schedule for the snapshot so that the snapshot can be saved.</p>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">&#8220;5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark384"></a> Backing up Snapshots to FTP</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage ^ FTP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>FTP </strong>interface is displayed. See Figure 5-92.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="833" height="470" class="wp-image-2191" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 154" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 949" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154.jpeg 833w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 833px) 100vw, 833px" /></p>
<p>Step 2 Enable the FTP function and configure the parameters. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark785">&#8220;5.17.8</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark785">Configuring FTP Storage Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>The snapshots will be uploaded to FTP for backup.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark386"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark387"></a> 5.9 Playing Back Video</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="906" height="510" class="wp-image-2192" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 155" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 950" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155.jpeg 906w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 906px) 100vw, 906px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark389"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark390"></a> Enabling Record Control</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2193" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-156.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 156" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 951"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access <strong>STORAGE </strong>settings.</li>
<li>Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.</li>
</ul>
<p>To enter the record control interface, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu, select <strong>Manual <em>■&gt;</em> Record Control</strong>. The <strong>RECORD </strong>interface is displayed, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark392">Figure 5-93.</a></p>
<p>RECORD</p>
<p>Mainstream All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16</p>
<p>Auto</p>
<p>Manual</p>
<p>Stop</p>
<p>Sub Stream</p>
<p>Auto</p>
<p>Manual</p>
<p>Stop</p>
<p>Snapshot</p>
<p>Enable</p>
<p>Disable</p>
<p>Apply Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-93</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark392"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark393"> 0.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark393"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels.</p>
<p>You can select a single channel or select <strong>All</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record status</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Automatically record according to the record type and</li>
</ul>
<p>recording time as configured in the recording schedule.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected</li>
</ul>
<p>channel.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: Do not record.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot status</td>
<td>Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-31</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark394"></a> Instant Playback</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can use the instant playback function to play back the previous five minutes to sixty minutes of the recorded video in any channel. For details about instant playback function, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark172">&#8220;5.2.2.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark172">Instant Playback.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark396"></a> Main Interface of Video Playback</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark398"> Figure 5-94.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="844" height="478" class="wp-image-2194" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 157" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 952" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157.jpeg 844w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157-768x435.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 844px) 100vw, 844px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-94</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark398"></a><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td rowspan="2">Display Window</td>
<td>Display the searched recorded video or picture. It supports playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-channel, and 16-channel simultaneously.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>When playing back in a single channel mode, hold down the left</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>mouse button to select the area that you want to enlarge. The</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released. To exit the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>enlarged status, right-click on the image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Playback</p>
<p>Controls Bar</td>
<td>Playback control buttons. For details about the control buttons, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark399">&#8220;5.9.3.2 Introducing Playback Controls.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Time Bar</td>
<td>Display the type and time period of the current recorded video.</p>
<ul>
<li>In the 4-channel layout, there are four-time bars are</li>
</ul>
<p>displayed; in the other view layouts, only one-time bar is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click on the colored area to start playback from a certain time.</li>
<li>In the situation when you are configuring the settings, rotate</li>
</ul>
<p>the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback is ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming from the time point where the playback is located.</p>
<ul>
<li>Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red indicates</li>
</ul>
<p>external alarm; Yellow indicates motion detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple indicates POS events.</p>
<ul>
<li>For some models, when you are clicking on the blank area in</li>
</ul>
<p>the time bar, the system automatically jumps to the next time point where there is a recorded video located.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Play Status</td>
<td>Includes two playback statuses: <strong>Play </strong>and <strong>Stop</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Sync</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Sync </strong>check box to simultaneously play recorded videos of different channels in the same period in multi-channel view.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td colspan="7"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Record type</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to define the recording type to search for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>Search type</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the content to play back: <strong>Record</strong>, <strong>PIC</strong>, <strong>Splice Playback</strong>.</p>
<p>For details about the selecting search type, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark403">&#8220;5.9.3.3 Selecting</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark403">Search Type.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Calendar</td>
<td colspan="7">Click the date that you want to search, the time bar displays the corresponding record.</p>
<p>The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid circle under the date.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">9</td>
<td rowspan="3">View Layout and Channel Selection</td>
<td colspan="7">In the <strong>CAM NAME </strong>list, select the channel(s) that you want to play back.</p>
<p>• The window split is decided by how you select the channel(s).</p>
<p>For example, if you select one channel, the playback is displayed in the single-channel view; if you select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>• Clink</td>
<td>M</td>
<td colspan="3">tn Q\A/itnh thn Qtrnam«;</td>
<td>M</td>
<td rowspan="2">indicates main .</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">stream, and</td>
<td>S</td>
<td colspan="2">indicates sub stream</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Video Splice</td>
<td colspan="7">Splice a section of recorded video and save it. For details about splicing a recorded video, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark408">&#8220;5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>Backup</td>
<td colspan="7">Back up the recorded video files. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark413">&#8220;5.9.3.5 Backing</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark413">up Recorded Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>List Display</td>
<td colspan="7">This area includes <strong>Mark List </strong>and <strong>File List</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>^3: </strong>Click the <strong>Mark List </strong>button, the marked recorded video</li>
</ul>
<p>list is displayed. Double-click the file to start playing.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>^3: </strong>Click the <strong>File List </strong>button, the searched recorded video</li>
</ul>
<p>list is displayed. You can lock the files. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark440">&#8220;5.9.8</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark440">Using the File List.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Full Screen</td>
<td colspan="7">Click ^3 to display in full screen. In the full screen mode, point to the bottom of the screen, the time bar is displayed. Right-click on the screen to exit full screen mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td>Time Bar Unit</td>
<td colspan="7">You can select 24hr, 2hr, 1hr, or 30min as the unit of time bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-32</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark399"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark400"></a> Introducing Playback Controls Bar</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can perform the operations such as control the speed of playback, add mark, and take</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark402"></a> snapshots through the playback controls bar. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark402"> Figure 5-95 </a>and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark404"> Table 5-33.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="782" height="52" class="wp-image-2195" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 158" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 953" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158.jpeg 782w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158-300x20.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158-768x51.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 782px) 100vw, 782px" /></p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The play backward function and playback speed are dependent on the product version. The actual product shall govern. You can also contact the technical support to consult the hardware version information.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□. m</strong></td>
<td>Play/Pause.</p>
<p>During playing back, you can switch between play and pause.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Stop.</p>
<p>During playing back, you can click the <strong>Stop </strong>button to stop playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□.m</strong></td>
<td>Play Backward.</p>
<p>• During playing back, click the <strong>Play Backward </strong>button to</p>
<p>backward play the recorded video, the button switches to EH; click EH to stop playing backward.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> During playing back, click to start playing forward.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□. □</strong></td>
<td>Previous Frame/Next Frame.</p>
<p>* When the playback is paused, click <strong>UJ </strong>or click <strong>U3 </strong>to play single-frame recorded video.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> When playing back single-frame recorded video, click <strong>13 </strong>to</p>
<p>start playing forward.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Slow Playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>During playing back, click ^3 to set the speed of slow</li>
</ul>
<p>playback as SlowX1/2, SlowX1/4, SlowX1/8, or SlowX1/16.</p>
<ul>
<li>During fast playback, click ^3 to slow down the speed of fast</li>
</ul>
<p>playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Fast Playback.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> During playing back, click ^3 to set the speed of fast playback</p>
<p>as FastX2, FastX4, FastX8, or FastX16.</p>
<p>* During slow playback, click ^3 to speed up slow playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>El. d</strong></td>
<td>Previous Day/Next Day.</p>
<p>Click ^3 or click <strong>C2 </strong>to play the previous day or next day of the current recorded video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>L o |</strong></td>
<td>Adjust volume of playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Smart Search. For details about the using the smart search, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark417">&#8220;5.9.4 Smart Search.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>El</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">In the full screen mode, click to take a snapshot and save into</p>
<p>the USB storage device or mobile HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">Add Mark for the recorded view. For details about adding mark, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark420">&#8220;5.9.5 Marking and Playing Back Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Hide POS Hide.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="3">During single-channel playback, click information on the screen.</td>
<td><strong>^9</strong></td>
<td rowspan="3">to display or hide POS</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-33</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark403"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark404"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark405"></a> Selecting Search Type</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from HDD or external storage device.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>From R/W HDD</strong>: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark407">Figure 5-96.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="296" height="113" class="wp-image-2196" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-159.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 159" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 954"></p>
<p>Figure 5-96</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark407"></a><strong>From I/O Device</strong>: Recorded videos playback from external storage device. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark409"> Figure 5­97.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Click <strong>Browse</strong>, select the save path of recorded video file that you want to play. Double­click the video file or click 13 to start playing.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="377" height="166" class="wp-image-2197" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 160" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 955" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160.jpeg 377w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160-300x132.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160-375x166.jpeg 375w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 377px) 100vw, 377px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-97</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark408"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark409"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark410"></a> 5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark412"></a> During playback, clip sections of recorded video and save to the USB storage device. For the video clip interface, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark412"> Figure 5-98.</a></p>
<p>00:00:00 &#8211; 00:00:00</p>
<p>Figure 5-98</p>
<p>Step 1 Select a recorded video that you want to play.</p>
<p>• Click to start playing from the beginning.</p>
<p>• Double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.</p>
<p>Step 2</p>
<p>Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="33" class="wp-image-2198" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-161.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 161" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 956"></p>
<p>to start clipping.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="33" class="wp-image-2199" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-162.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 162" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 957"></p>
<p>to stop clipping.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click .</p>
<p>The <strong>BACKUP </strong>dialog box is displayed. You can back up the files.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>You can clip the video of a single-channel or multiple channels.</li>
<li>Maximum 1024 files can be backed up at one time.</li>
<li>The files that are selected in the <strong>File List </strong>cannot be clipped.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark413"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark414"></a> 5.9.3.5 Backing up Recorded Video</p>
<p>You can back up the recorded video file or splice video file into the USB storage device.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select the recorded video file that you want to back up. You can select the following two types of files:</p>
<ul>
<li>Recorded video file: Click ^3, the <strong>File List </strong>area is displayed. Select the file(s) that you want to back up.</li>
<li>Splice video file. For details about splicing video file, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark408">&#8220;5.9.3.4 Clipping</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark408">Recorded Video.</a>&#8220;</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 2 Click .</p>
<p>The <strong>BACKUP </strong>dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark416"> Figure 5-99.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="828" height="585" class="wp-image-2200" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 163" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 958" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163.jpeg 828w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163-768x543.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163-810x572.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 828px) 100vw, 828px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-99</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark416"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Backup</strong>.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>If you do not want to back the file, clear the check box.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark417"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark418"></a> 5.9.4 Smart Search</p>
<p>During playback, you can analyze a certain area to find if there was any motion detection event occurred. The system will display the images with motion events of the recorded video.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>To use the Smart Search function, you need to enable the motion detection for the channel by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Alarm ^ Video Detect ^ Motion Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>To use the Smart Search function, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>CAME NAME </strong>list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>13 </strong>or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="45" class="wp-image-2201" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-164.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 164" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 959"></p>
<p>The grid is displayed on the screen.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Only single-channel supports smart search.</li>
<li>If multi-channels are selected, double-click on the channel window to display this channel only on the screen, and then you can start using smart search function.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 5 Drag the pointer to select the searching area. ED NOTE</p>
<p>The grid area supports 22&#215;18(PAL) and 22&#215;15(NTSC).</p>
<p>Step 6</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="48" class="wp-image-2202" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-165.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 165" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 960"></p>
<p>The screen starts playing back the motional splices of recorded video for the selected searching area.</p>
<p>Step 7</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="45" class="wp-image-2203" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-166.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 166" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 961"></p>
<p>to exit the playback.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark420"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark421"></a> 5.9.5 Marking and Playing Back Video</p>
<p>You can mark the recording for somewhere important. Then you can easily find the marked recording by searching time and mark name.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark423"></a> Marking a Video</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the playback mode, click</p>
<p>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add Mark </strong>dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark425"> Figure 5-100.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="483" height="229" class="wp-image-2204" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-167.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 167" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 962" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-167.jpeg 483w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-167-300x142.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 483px) 100vw, 483px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-100</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark425"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Name </strong>box, enter a name.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>This marked video file displays in the <strong>Mark List</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark426"></a> Playing Back Marked Video</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>This function is supported on single-channel playback.</p>
<p>Step 1 In the <strong>CAME NAME </strong>list, select one channel.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="39" class="wp-image-2205" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-168.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 168" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 963"></p>
<p>The Mark List interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark428"> Figure 5-101.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="250" height="477" class="wp-image-2206" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-169.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 169" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 964" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-169.jpeg 250w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-169-157x300.jpeg 157w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 250px) 100vw, 250px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-101</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark428"></a> Step 3 Double-click the file that you want to play back.</p>
<p>To search the marked video by time, in the <strong>SEARCH </strong>box on the top of the interface,</p>
<p>enter the time, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="33" class="wp-image-2208" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-170.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 170" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 965"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark429"></a> Playing Back Time before the Mark</p>
<p>You can configure to play N seconds of the marked video before the marked time.</p>
<p>Step 1 In the <strong>Name </strong>box, enter the name of a marked video.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Playback time before the mark </strong>box, enter N seconds.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2209" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-171.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 171" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 966"></p>
<p>The playback starts from N seconds before the marked time.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>If there is N seconds exist before the marked time, the playback starts from N seconds before the marked time. If there is not, it plays back as much as there is.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark431"></a> Managing Marked Video</p>
<p>In the <strong>Mark List </strong>interface, click ^3, the Manager interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark433"> Figure 5-102.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="618" height="591" class="wp-image-2210" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-172.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 172" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 967" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-172.jpeg 618w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-172-300x287.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 618px) 100vw, 618px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-102</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark433"></a> Be default, it manages all the marked videos of the selected channel.</li>
<li>To search the marked video, select channel number from the <strong>Channel </strong>list, enter time in <strong>Start Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, and then click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
<li>All the marked videos display in time order.</li>
<li>To modify the name of marked video, double-click a marked video, the <strong>Edit Mark </strong>dialog box is displayed.</li>
<li>To delete the marked video, select the marked video, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>After opening the <strong>Manger </strong>interface, the playback will pause until exiting this interface. If the marked video that was in playing back is deleted, the playback will start from the first marked video in the <strong>Mark List</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark434"></a> Playing Back Snapshots</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search and play back the snapshots.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Search Type </strong>list, select <strong>PIC</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel number.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>Calendar </strong>area, select a date.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>13.</strong></p>
<p>The system starts playing snapshots according to the configured intervals.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark436"></a> Playing Back Splices</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can clip the recorded video files into splices and then play back at the same time to save your time.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Search Type </strong>list, select <strong>Splice Playback</strong>; In the Split Mode list, select <strong>4</strong>, <strong>9</strong>, or</p>
<p><strong>16</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark438"> Figure 5-103.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="298" height="215" class="wp-image-2211" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-173.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 173" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 968"></p>
<p>Figure 5-103</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark438"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Calendar </strong>area, select a date.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>CAM NAME </strong>list, select a channel.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>Only single-channel supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 5 Start playing back splices. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark439"> Figure 5-104.</a></p>
<p>• Click □, the playback starts from the beginning.</p>
<p>• Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="52" class="wp-image-2212" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 174" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 969" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174-300x19.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174-768x48.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174-810x51.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-104</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark439"></a> Q NOTE</p>
<p>Every recorded video file must be at least five minutes. If a recorded video file is less than 20 minutes but still choose to split into four windows, the system will automatically adjust the windows quantity to ensure every splice is more than five minutes, and in this case it is possible that there are no images are displaying in some windows.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark440"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark441"></a> 5.9.8 Using the File List</p>
<p>You can view all the recorded videos within a certain period from any channel in the <strong>File List</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Select a channel(s).</p>
<p>Step 3</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="36" class="wp-image-2213" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-175.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 175" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 970"></p>
<p>The <strong>File List </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark443"> Figure 5-105.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="254" height="888" class="wp-image-2214" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-176.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 176" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 971" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-176.jpeg 254w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-176-86x300.jpeg 86w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 254px) 100vw, 254px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-105</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark443"></a> Step 4 Start playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click , the playback starts from the first file by default.</li>
<li>Click any file, the system plays back this file.</li>
</ul>
<p>Q2 NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>In the time box on the top of the file list interface, you can enter the specific time to search the file that you want to view.</li>
<li>In the File List area, there are 128 files can be displayed.</li>
<li>File type: <strong>R </strong>indicates general recorded video; <strong>A </strong>indicates recorded video with external alarms; <strong>M </strong>indicates recorded video with motion detection events; <strong>I </strong>indicates recorded video with intelligent vents.</li>
<li>Click a to return to the interface with calendar and CAM NAME list.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark444"></a> Locking and Unlocking the Recorded Video</p>
<ul>
<li>To lock the recorded video, in the <strong>File List </strong>interface, select the check box of the recorded</li>
</ul>
<p>video, and then click LU. The locked video will not be covered.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>To view the locked information, click</p>
<p>, the <strong>FILE LOCKED </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.</p>
<ul>
<li>To unlock the recorded video, in the <strong>FILE LOCKED </strong>interface, select the video, and then click Unlock. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark446"> Figure 5-106.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark446"></a> Figure 5-106</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark447"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark448"></a> 5.10 Alarm Events Settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="908" height="512" class="wp-image-2215" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 177" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 972" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177.jpeg 908w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 908px) 100vw, 908px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark450"></a> Video Detection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark452"></a> Video detection adopts computer vision and image processing technology. The technology analyzes the video images to detect the obvious changes such as moving objects and blurriness. The system activates alarms when such changes are detected.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark453"></a> Configuring Motion Detect Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the moving object appears, and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the system activates the alarm.</p>
<p>To configure the motion, detect settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Events VIDIEO DETECT &gt; Motion Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Motion Detect </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark455"> Figure 5-107.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="812" height="459" class="wp-image-2216" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 178" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 973" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178.jpeg 812w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 812px) 100vw, 812px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-107</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark455"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the motion detection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark456"> Table 5-34.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to set the motion detection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Region</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to define the motion detection region.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable MD</td>
<td>Enable or disable the motion detection function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable PIR</td>
<td>PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion detect. It can filter the meaningless alarms that are activated by the objects such as falling leaves, flies. The detection range by PIR is smaller than the field angle.</p>
<p>PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras. Enabling PIR function will get the motion detect to be enabled automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the PIR function is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general effect.</p>
<p>£D NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Only when the channel type is CVI, the PIR function can be</li>
</ul>
<p>enabled.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the camera does not support PIR function, it will be</li>
</ul>
<p>unusable.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the Device does not support PIR function, it will not be</li>
</ul>
<p>displayed on the interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the motion detection is active.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for motion detection and auto recording function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tour</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu ^ Display <em>■+</em> Tour</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="7">Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="6">To use this function, make sure the following settings are</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td colspan="2">configured:</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="6">The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule &gt; Snapshot</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="6">Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the <strong>Mode </strong>list,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Matrix</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in <strong>Main Menu</strong>^ <strong>Display </strong>^ <strong>Tour</strong>.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">Not all models support this function.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark456"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="7">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a motion detection event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-34</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Test </strong>to test the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Setting the Motion Detection Region</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Region</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The region setting screen is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Point to the middle top of the interface.</p>
<p>The setting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark457"> Figure 5-108.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="526" height="205" class="wp-image-2217" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-179.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 179" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 974" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-179.jpeg 526w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-179-300x117.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 526px) 100vw, 526px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-108</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark457"></a> Step 3 Configure the regions settings. You can configure totally four regions.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select one region, for example, click .</li>
<li>Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.</li>
</ol>
<p>The selected area shows the color that represents the region.</p>
<p>3) Configure the parameters.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Enter a name for the region.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sensitivity</td>
<td>Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value. The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Threshold</td>
<td>Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every channel has an individual threshold.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-109</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where this region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.</p>
<p>Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting interface.</p>
<p>Step 5 On the <strong>Motion Detect </strong>interface, click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><strong>Setting Motion Detection Period</strong></p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.</p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Period</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark458"> Figure 5-110.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="471" class="wp-image-2218" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 180" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 975" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180.jpeg 826w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180-768x438.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180-810x462.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-110</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark458"></a> Step 2 Define the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.</p>
<ul>
<li>Define the period by drawing.</li>
</ul>
<p>O Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.</p>
<p>O Define for several days of a week: Click ^9 before each day, the icon</p>
<p>switches to a. On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days with a will take the same settings.</p>
<p>O Define for all days of a week: Click <strong>All</strong>, all e switches to E3. On the</p>
<p>timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.</li>
</ul>
<p>1) Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="39" class="wp-image-2219" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-181.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 181" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 976"></p>
<p>The <strong>Period </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark459"> Figure 5-111.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="815" height="457" class="wp-image-2220" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 182" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 977" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182.jpeg 815w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182-810x454.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 815px) 100vw, 815px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-111</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark459"></a> Enter the time frame for the period and select the check box to enable the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>O There are six periods for you to set for each day.</p>
<p>O Under <strong>Copy</strong>, select <strong>All </strong>to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 On the <strong>Motion Detect </strong>interface, click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark460"></a> 5.10.1.2 Configuring Video Loss Settings</p>
<p>When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm. To configure the Video loss settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Event ^ VIDIEO DETECT <em>■&gt;</em> Video Loss</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Video Loss </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark462"> Figure 5-112.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="458" class="wp-image-2221" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 183" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 978" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183-810x454.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-112</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark462"></a> Step 2 To configure the settings for the video loss detection parameters, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">“5.10.1.1</a> Co<a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">nfiguring Motion Detect Settings.</a>”</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark463"></a> 5.10.1.3 Configuring Tampering Settings</p>
<p>When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of the causes such as sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you can configure the tampering alarm settings.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event ^ VIDIEO DETECT ^ Tampering</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Tampering </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark465"> Figure 5-113.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="799" height="448" class="wp-image-2222" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 184" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 979" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184.jpeg 799w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 799px) 100vw, 799px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-113</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark465"></a> Step 2 To configure the settings for the tampering detection parameters, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">“5.10.1.1</a> Co<a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">nfiguring Motion Detect Settings.</a>”</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark466"></a> 5.10.1.4 Configuring Diagnosis Settings</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>This function can be used only when it is supported by the camera.</p>
<p>When the video appear the conditions such as blurry, overexposed, or the color changes, the system activates the alarm.</p>
<p>To configure the diagnosis settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Events VIDIEO DETECT &gt; Diagnosis</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Diagnosis </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark468"> Figure 5-114.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="750" height="423" class="wp-image-2223" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-185.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 185" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 980" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-185.jpeg 750w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-185-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 750px) 100vw, 750px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-114</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark468"></a> Step 2 To configure the settings for the diagnosis parameters, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</p>
<p><strong>Setting the Types for Diagnosing Targets</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Rule</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Diagnosis </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark469"> Figure 5-115.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="528" height="374" class="wp-image-2224" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-186.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 186" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 981" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-186.jpeg 528w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-186-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-115</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark469"></a> Step 2 Select the items that you want to diagnose and set the threshold (30 by default). See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark470">Table 5-35.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Stripe</td>
<td>A horizontal, vertical or diagonal stripe that might appear in the video because of device aging or electronic interruption. Such stripe brings visual interruption.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Noise</td>
<td>Video noises such as blurriness or quality reduction that is caused by optical distortion or device problem during camera shooting.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Color Cast</td>
<td>Variances in the normal proportions of RGB colors.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Out of Focus</td>
<td>Blurry video is caused during camera shooting, transferring and processing. Such condition is a common image quality reduction problem and defined as out of focus.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Overexposure</td>
<td>The video brightness refers to the intensity of image pixel. The range is between 0 (the darkest black) and 255 (the brightest white). If the brightness exceeds the threshold, the image is over exposed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark470"></a> Threshold</td>
<td>The range is from 1 through 100. If the value after diagnosing is higher than what you set, the system activates the alarm to the corresponding diagnosing types such as stripe.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-35</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>The system returns to the <strong>Diagnosis </strong>interface.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark471"></a> 5.10.2 Intelligent Function</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="907" height="510" class="wp-image-2225" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 187" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 982" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187.jpeg 907w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 907px) 100vw, 907px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2226" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-188.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 188" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 983"></p>
<p>Please disable IP channels function first before using IVS function.</p>
<p>IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>INTELL SETTING </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark473"> Figure 5-116.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="739" height="418" class="wp-image-2227" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-189.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 189" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 984" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-189.jpeg 739w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-189-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 739px) 100vw, 739px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-116</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark473"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel number that you want to configure the IVS function for.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>One line of rule is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark474"> Figure 5-117.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="739" height="418" class="wp-image-2228" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-190.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 190" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 985" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-190.jpeg 739w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-190-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 739px) 100vw, 739px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-117</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark474"></a> Step 4 Configure the parameters for the rule that you selected.</p>
<p>Step 5 Select the check box of the rule to enable it.</p>
<p>Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark475"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark476"></a> Configuring Tripwire Rules</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>The tripwire can be configured as a straight line or broken line.</li>
<li>Supports detecting one-way or two-way tripwire crossing.</li>
<li>Supports multiple tripwires in the same scenario to meet the complexity.</li>
<li>Supports size filtering for target.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Tripwire</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark478"> Figure 5-118.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="719" height="405" class="wp-image-2229" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-191.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 191" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 986" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-191.jpeg 719w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-191-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 719px) 100vw, 719px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-118</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark478"></a> Step 2 Draw a tripwire.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</li>
<li>Click □.</li>
</ol>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the tripwire rules is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark479"> Figure 5­119.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="760" height="563" class="wp-image-2230" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-192.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 192" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 987" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-192.jpeg 760w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-192-300x222.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 760px) 100vw, 760px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-119</p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark480"> Table 5-36.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark479"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td colspan="3">Enter the customized rule name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Direction</td>
<td colspan="3">Set the direction of the tripwire. You can choose <strong>A to B </strong>(left to right), <strong>B to A </strong>(right to left), and <strong>Both</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Filtering Target</td>
<td>Click</td>
<td></td>
<td>to draw areas to filter the target.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-36</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark480"></a> Drag to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a straight line, broken line or polygon.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2231" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-193.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 193" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 988"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered.</p>
<p>The <strong>Trigger </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark481"> Figure 5-120.</a></p>
<p>Trigger</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Period</p>
<p>Alarm Out</p>
<p>Show Message</p>
<p>Record Channel</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td rowspan="3">Latch</p>
<p>Send Email</td>
<td rowspan="3">10</td>
<td rowspan="3">Sec.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Setting</p>
<p>Alarm Upload</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>10</td>
<td>Sec.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tour</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td></td>
<td>Log</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>None</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>OK Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-120</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark481"></a> Step 4 Configure the triggering parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark482"> Table 5-37.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Set </strong>to display set interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see &#8220;Setting Motion Detection Period” section in <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Configuring Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Click <strong>Set </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tour</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu ^ Display^ Tour</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the following settings are</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td>configured:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule <em>■+</em> Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Select <strong>Main Menu ^Camera ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the <strong>Mode </strong>list,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Matrix</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ Tour</strong>.&#8221;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="2">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="2">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark482"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="2">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a motion detection event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-37</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>The <strong>INTELL SETTING </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 6 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The tripwire detecting function is active. When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark483"></a> 5.10.2.2 Configuring Intrusion Rules</p>
<p>When the target enters and leaves the area, or the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.</li>
<li>Supports detecting the behaviors that enter and leave the intrusion areas.</li>
<li>Supports detecting the behaviors that are moving in the intrusion areas. The quantity of</li>
</ul>
<p>areas and lasting time can be configured.</p>
<ul>
<li>Supports size filtering for target.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Intrusion</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark485"> Figure 5-121.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="816" height="460" class="wp-image-2232" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 194" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 989" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194.jpeg 816w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 816px) 100vw, 816px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-121</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark485"></a> Step 2 Draw a tripwire.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</li>
<li>Click □.</li>
</ol>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the intrusion rules is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark486"> Figure 5­122.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="705" height="545" class="wp-image-2233" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-195.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 195" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 990" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-195.jpeg 705w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-195-300x232.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 705px) 100vw, 705px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-122</p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark487"> Table 5-3</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark480">8Table</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark480">5-36.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark486"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td colspan="2">Enter the customized rule name.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Action</td>
<td colspan="5">Configure the actions that are defined as intrusion. You can select the <strong>Appear </strong>check box and the <strong>Cross-check </strong>box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Direction</td>
<td colspan="5">In the <strong>Direction </strong>list, select the direction of crossing the configured area. You can select <strong>Enter&amp;Exit</strong>, <strong>Enters</strong>, and <strong>Exits</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">Click ^3 to draw areas to filter the target.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark487"></a> Filtering Target</td>
<td colspan="2">You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-38</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to draw an area.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2234" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-196.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 196" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 991"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">&#8220;5.10.2.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">Tripwire Rules.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The intrusion detecting function is active. When the target enters and leaves the area, or the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark488"></a> 5.10.2.3 Configuring Abandoned Rules</p>
<p>When the object is placed in the defined detection area for more than the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.</li>
<li>Period value can be configured.</li>
<li>Supports size filtering for target.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Abandoned</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Abandoned </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark490"> Figure 5-123.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="760" height="429" class="wp-image-2235" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-197.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 197" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 992" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-197.jpeg 760w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-197-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 760px) 100vw, 760px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-123</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark490"></a> Step 2 Draw an area.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</li>
</ol>
<p>2)</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="47" class="wp-image-2236" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-198.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 198" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 993"></p>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the abandoned rules is displayed. See Figure 5-124.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="621" height="494" class="wp-image-2237" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-199.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 199" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 994" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-199.jpeg 621w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-199-300x239.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 621px) 100vw, 621px" /></p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark491"> Table 5-39.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Enter the customized rule name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Configure the minimum time period for activating alarms by detecting the abandoned objects.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Click fad to draw areas to filter the target</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark491"></a> Filtering Target</td>
<td>You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-39</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to draw an area.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2238" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-200.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 200" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 995"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">&#8220;5.10.2.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">Tripwire Rules.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The abandoned object detecting function is active. When the object is placed in the defined detection area for more than the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark492"></a> 5.10.2.4 Configuring Missing Rules</p>
<p>When the target is taken away from the defined area exceeds the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Missing</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Missing </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark494"> Figure 5-125.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="757" height="425" class="wp-image-2239" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-201.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 201" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 996" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-201.jpeg 757w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-201-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 757px) 100vw, 757px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-125</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark494"></a> Step 2 Draw an area.</p>
<p>1) In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</p>
<p>2)</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="48" height="41" class="wp-image-2240" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-202.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 202" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 997"></p>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the missing rules is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark495"> Figure 5­126.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="719" height="571" class="wp-image-2241" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-203.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 203" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 998" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-203.jpeg 719w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-203-300x238.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 719px) 100vw, 719px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-126</p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark496"> Table 5-40.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark495"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td colspan="2">Enter the customized rule name.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td colspan="3">Configure the minimum time period for activating alarms by detecting the missing objects.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">Click to draw areas to filter the target.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark496"></a> Filtering Target</td>
<td colspan="2">You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-40</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to draw an area.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2242" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-204.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 204" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 999"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">&#8220;5.10.2.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">Tripwire Rules.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 3 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The missing object detecting function is active. When the target is taken away from the defined area exceeds the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark497"></a> Face Detection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the face detection settings and search the detected faces in the defined time period.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark499"></a> Configuring Face Detection Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the Device detects the human faces, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Not all models support this function.</li>
<li>Smart IPC must be equipped with face detect function.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent^ Face Detect ^ Parameters</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Human Face </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark501"> Figure 5-127.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="803" height="452" class="wp-image-2243" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 205" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1000" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205.jpeg 803w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 803px) 100vw, 803px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2244" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-206.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 206" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1001"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark501"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the face detection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark502"> Table 5-41.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td colspan="3">In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to set the face detection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to draw areas to filter the target.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Target Filter</td>
<td colspan="2">You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">minimum size). When the target is smaller than the minimum size</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be activated. The</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>maximum size should be larger than the minimum size.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the face detection function.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td colspan="2">Define a period during which the motion detection is active.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td colspan="3">Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<p>Enable alarm activation function. Select the alarm output port(s) to which the peripheral alarm devices are connected. When an alarm event occurs, the system activates the peripheral alarm devices connected to the selected output port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td colspan="10">Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td colspan="10">Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>•+</em> EMAIL</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td colspan="8">Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="9">The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="8"><a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8216;</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td colspan="9">Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td colspan="10">Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="10">Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="7">To use this function, make sure the following settings are</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td colspan="2">configured:</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="8">The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="8">Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>, in</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="8">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="10">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark502"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="9">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a human face detection event.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-41</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark503"></a> Searching for Detected Faces</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^Video^ Intelligent Play^ Smart Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SMART SEARCH </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark505"> Figure 5-128.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="782" height="439" class="wp-image-2245" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 207" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1002" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207.jpeg 782w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 782px) 100vw, 782px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-128</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark505"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Begin Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, enter the time.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The faces searched in the defined period display. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark506"> Figure 5-129.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="820" height="465" class="wp-image-2246" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 208" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1003" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208.jpeg 820w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 820px) 100vw, 820px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-129</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark506"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark507"></a> System Events</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the alarm output for three types of system event (HDD, Network, and User). When there is an abnormal system event occurs, the system activates alarms in the way that you configure in this section.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark509"></a> Configuring HDD Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Events Abnormity &gt; HDD</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>HDD </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark511"> Figure 5-130.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="873" height="486" class="wp-image-2247" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 209" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1004" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209.jpeg 873w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209-768x428.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209-810x451.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 873px) 100vw, 873px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-130</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the HDD event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark512"> Table 5-42.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark511"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>No HDD</strong>, <strong>HDD Error</strong>, or <strong>HDD No Space </strong>as the event type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the HDD event detection function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ NETWORK ^ EMAIL</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark512"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a HDD alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-42</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark513"></a> Configuring Network Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Event ^ Abnormity ^ Network</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Network </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark515"> Figure 5-131.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="831" height="467" class="wp-image-2248" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 210" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1005" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210.jpeg 831w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 831px) 100vw, 831px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-131</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the Network event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark516"> Table 5-43.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark515"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>Net Disconnection</strong>, <strong>IP Conflicted</strong>, or <strong>MAC Conflicted </strong>as the event type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the Network event detection function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark516"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a network alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-43</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark517"></a> Configuring User Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event ^ Abnormity ^ User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>User </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark519"> Figure 5-132.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="804" height="451" class="wp-image-2249" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 211" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1006" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211.jpeg 804w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 804px) 100vw, 804px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-132</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the User event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark520"> Table 5-44.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark519"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>Illegal Login</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the user error detection function.</p>
<p>If you do not enable this function, there will be no limit for wrong password entry and the account cannot be locked because of the wrong password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Attempt(s)</td>
<td>Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries. The account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Lock Time</td>
<td>Set how long the account is locked for. The value ranges from 1 minute to 60 minutes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>1&#8217;H NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark520"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a user account alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-44</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark521"></a> Configuring Device Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Event ^ Abnormity &gt; Device</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Device </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark523"> Figure 5-133.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="732" height="586" class="wp-image-2250" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-212.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 212" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1007" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-212.jpeg 732w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-212-300x240.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 732px) 100vw, 732px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-133</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the device event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark524"> Table 5-45.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark523"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>High Temperature </strong>or <strong>Fan Speed Abnormal</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Name</td>
<td>Enter the name for the event type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the device event detection function.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Max Temperature</td>
<td colspan="3">In the <strong>Max Temperature </strong>box, enter the max temperature value.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td colspan="3">Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td colspan="3">Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td colspan="2">Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="3">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="3">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark524"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="3">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a Device alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-45</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark525"></a> Alarm Input Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Connect the alarm input and output ports by referring to <a href="#post-2037-bookmark67">&#8220;4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark67">Output.</a>&#8221; You can configure the alarm settings for each channel individually or apply the settings to all channels and then save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark527"></a> Configuring Local Alarms</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect the alarm device to the alarm input port of the Device. When the alarm is activated on the alarm device, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the local alarms in the way that you configure in this section.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Events ALARM INPUT <em>■&gt;</em> Local</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Local </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark529"> Figure 5-134.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="677" height="542" class="wp-image-2251" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-213.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 213" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1008" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-213.jpeg 677w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-213-300x240.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 677px) 100vw, 677px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-134</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the local alarms. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5-46.</a></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark529"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p><strong>Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Alarm In</td>
<td>Select the channel number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Name</td>
<td>Enter the customized alarm name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the local alarm function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>NO </strong>or select <strong>NC </strong>as the voltage output type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see &#8220;Setting Motion Detection Period&#8221; section in <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Configuring Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 600 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for alarm and auto snapshot must be enabled. For</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Snapshot</td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the following settings are configured:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Matrix</td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Display <em>■+</em> TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark530"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a local alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-46</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the local alarm settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark531"></a> Configuring Alarms from Alarm Box</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect the alarm box to the RS485 port of the Device. When the alarm is detected by the alarm box, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the alarms in the way that you configure in this section.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event^ALARM INPUT ^ Alarm Box</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Alarm Box </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark533"> Figure 5-135</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="748" height="420" class="wp-image-2252" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-214.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 214" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1009" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-214.jpeg 748w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-214-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 748px) 100vw, 748px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2253" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-215.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 215" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1010"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark533"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Alarm Box </strong>list, select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Alarm In </strong>list, select the alarm input port on the Alarm Box.</p>
<p>Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5­46.</a></p>
<p>Step 5</p>
<p>Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark534"></a> Configuring Alarms from External IP Cameras</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Events ALARM INPUT ^ IPC Ext</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IPC Ext </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark536"> Figure 5-136.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="759" height="425" class="wp-image-2254" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-216.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 216" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1011" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-216.jpeg 759w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-216-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 759px) 100vw, 759px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-136</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark536"></a> Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5-46.</a></p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="178" height="35" class="wp-image-2255" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-217.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 217" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1012"></p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Refresh </strong>to refresh configured settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark537"></a> 5.10.5.4 Configuring Alarms for IP Camera Offline</p>
<p>You can configure the alarm settings for the situation when the IP camera is offline.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event ^ ALARM INPUT ^ IPC Offline</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IPC Offline </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark539"> Figure 5-137.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="749" height="421" class="wp-image-2256" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-218.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 218" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1013" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-218.jpeg 749w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-218-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 749px) 100vw, 749px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2257" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-219.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 219" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1014"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark539"></a> Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5-46.</a></p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark540"></a> 5.10.5.5 Configuring Alarms from External Devices</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^Event^ ALARM INPUT ^ HDCVI Alarm</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Ext. Alarm </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark542"> Figure 5-138.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="793" height="445" class="wp-image-2258" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 220" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1015" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220.jpeg 793w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 793px) 100vw, 793px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-138</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark542"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel or <strong>all</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="38" class="wp-image-2259" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-221.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 221" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1016"></p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark543"> Figure 5-139.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="778" height="464" class="wp-image-2260" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 222" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1017" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222.jpeg 778w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222-300x179.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222-768x458.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 778px) 100vw, 778px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-139</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark543"></a> Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5­46.</a></p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark544"></a> 5.10.6 Alarm Output Settings</p>
<p>When the Device activates alarms, the connected alarm device generates alarms in the way that you can configure in this section. You can connect to the output port of the Device or connect wirelessly.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: When an alarm event is triggered on the Device, the connected alarm device generates alarms.</li>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: The alarm device is forced to keep generating alarms.</li>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: The alarm output function is not enabled.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Event ^ ALARM OUTPUT.</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>ALARM OUTPUT </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark546"> Figure 5-140.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="719" height="405" class="wp-image-2261" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-223.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 223" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1018" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-223.jpeg 719w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-223-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 719px) 100vw, 719px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-140</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm output. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark547"> Table 5-47</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark530">.Table 5-46</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark546"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">General Alarm</td>
<td>Alarm Type</td>
<td>Select alarm type for each alarm output port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Indicates the status of each alarm output port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Ext. Alarm</td>
<td>Alarm Box</td>
<td>Select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Type</td>
<td>Select the alarm type for each alarm output ports.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Indicates the status of each alarm output port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark547"></a> Alarm Release</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK to </strong>clear all alarm output status.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-47</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark548"></a> 5.11 IoT Function</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark550"></a> Configuring Sensor Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect external sensors wirelessly through the Device with USB gateway or through connecting to a camera gateway. After connection, you can activate alarm events through external sensors.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark552"></a> Connecting Sensor through Device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Only the Device with USB gateway supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Intelligent^ IoT ^Manager ^ Sensor Pairing</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Sensor Pairing </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark554"> Figure 5-141.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2262" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 224" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1019" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-141</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark554"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Access Type </strong>list, select <strong>USB Gateway</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark555"> Figure 5-142.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="482" class="wp-image-2263" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-225.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 225" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1020" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-225.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-225-300x245.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-142</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark555"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Pair</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device starts pairing with the sensor.</p>
<p>After pairing is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark556"> Figure 5-143.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="482" class="wp-image-2264" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-226.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 226" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1021" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-226.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-226-300x245.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-143</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark556"></a> Step 5 Click <strong>Back </strong>to exit the pairing interface.</p>
<p>The added sensor information is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark557"> Figure 5-144.</a> Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="43" class="wp-image-2265" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-227.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 227" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1022"></p>
<p>to modify the sensor name; click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="47" height="45" class="wp-image-2266" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-228.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 228" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1023"></p>
<p>to delete sensor information.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2267" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 229" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1024" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-144</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark557"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark558"></a> Connecting Sensor through Camera with Gateway</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Only the camera with gateway supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent^ IoT ^ Manager ^ Sensor Pairing</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Sensor Pairing </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark560"> Figure 5-145.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2268" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 230" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1025" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-145</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark560"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Access Type </strong>list, select <strong>Camera Gateway</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that is connected to the camera.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark561"> Figure 5-146.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="486" class="wp-image-2269" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-231.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 231" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1026" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-231.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-231-300x247.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-146</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark561"></a> Step 5 Click <strong>Pair</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device starts pairing with the sensor.</p>
<p>After pairing is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark562"> Figure 5-147.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="484" class="wp-image-2270" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-232.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 232" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1027" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-232.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-232-300x246.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-147</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark562"></a> Step 6 Click <strong>Back </strong>to exit the pairing interface.</p>
<p>The added sensor information is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark563"> Figure 5-148.</a> Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="43" class="wp-image-2271" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-233.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 233" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1028"></p>
<p>to modify the sensor name; click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="47" height="45" class="wp-image-2272" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-234.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 234" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1029"></p>
<p>to delete sensor information.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2273" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 235" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1030" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-148</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark563"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark564"></a> 5.11.1.3 Configuring Alarm Linkage</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Intelligent^ IoT ^ Manager ^ Wireless Detector</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Wireless Detector </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark566"> Figure 5-149.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="614" class="wp-image-2274" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 236" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1031" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236.jpeg 834w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236-300x221.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236-768x565.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236-810x596.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 834px) 100vw, 834px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark566"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Access Type </strong>list, select <strong>USB</strong>, <strong>Camera</strong>, or <strong>All</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2275" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-237.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 237" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1032"></p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark543"> Figure 5-139.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="765" height="454" class="wp-image-2276" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-238.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 238" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1033" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-238.jpeg 765w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-238-300x178.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 765px) 100vw, 765px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-150</p>
<p>Step 4 Configure the settings for alarm linkage. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark567"> Table 5-48.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Enter the customized alarm name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see &#8220;Setting Motion Detection Period&#8221; section in <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Configuring Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 600 seconds.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for alarm and auto snapshot must be enabled. For</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Snapshot</td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the following settings are configured:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. nn. note</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a local alarm event.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">More Setting</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Show Message: Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a</li>
</ul>
<p>pop-up message in your local host PC.</p>
<ul>
<li>Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function. When</li>
</ul>
<p>an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>• Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification when</p>
<p>an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>• Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local</p>
<p>alarm log</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-48</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark567"></a> Step 5 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Step 6 On the <strong>Wireless Detector </strong>interface, click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark568"></a> Configuring Temperature and Humidity Camera</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view, search and export the temperature and humidity data of camera with such sensors and configure the alarm event settings.</p>
<p>To use this function, please make sure there is at least one camera with temperature and humidity sensor has been connected to the Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark570"></a> Enabling Detecting Function</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You should enable the IoT function the first time when you enter this interface.</p>
<p>Step <strong>1 </strong>On the main menu^Intelligent, click <strong>loT ^ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Temperature/Humidity </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark572"> Figure 5-151.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="928" height="636" class="wp-image-2277" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 239" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1034" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239.jpeg 928w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-768x526.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-810x555.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-145x100.jpeg 145w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-380x260.jpeg 380w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 928px) 100vw, 928px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-151</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark572"></a> Step 2 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check boxes to enable IoT function. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark573"> Figure 5-152.</a></p>
<p>REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>&gt; MANAGER</p>
<p>Tempraturev^u- Wirde» Detector VrSrdc» Siren</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>l?Pi</td>
<td>Detect PosOon Nam</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td>a</td>
<td>Ch»6</td>
<td>Ternipaatiire</td>
<td>Chn6 Temperature</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Sçnjçr Piiirmg</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="551" height="24" class="wp-image-2278" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-240.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 240" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1035" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-240.jpeg 551w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-240-300x13.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 551px) 100vw, 551px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-152</p>
<p>The Device starts detecting the temperature and humidity data from the camera and display on the <strong>Realtime Display </strong>interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark573"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark574"></a> Viewing Temperature and Humidity Data</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the temperature and humidity data on the <strong>Realtime Display </strong>interface after the IoT function is enabled.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Refresh Interval </strong>box, select data refresh interval. For example, you can select <strong>5 Sec</strong>.</p>
<p>You can also display the temperature and humidity data in graphical way by selecting the <strong>Display Graph </strong>check box to. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark576"> Figure 5-153 </a>for humidity data in graphical way.</p>
<p>&gt; REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>MANAGER</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>r+eh&#8217;«fi interval</td>
<td>5Sk</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>tiifXay Gras*</td>
<td>Accth Rani dm 6</td>
<td>tn*</p>
<p>Trtfnpcf dlijf f</td>
<td>Oawcr Roa bon Na*ii Chnfi-lenipcf alurc-1</td>
<td>Curr enl Vai u are</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>dify</td>
<td>Ghnfrltaiirftï 1</td>
<td>* m</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Témçièr Mui fr Ciiarl Humdiity Chart</p>
<p>&lt;kRH|</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="141" height="165" class="wp-image-2279" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-241.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 241" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1036"></p>
<p>C*e»f</p>
<p>Figure 5-153</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2280" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-242.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 242" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1037"></p>
<p>Click <strong>Clear </strong>to delete the data.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark576"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark577"></a> Exporting Temperature and Humidity Data</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can export the temperature and humidity data in .BMP format. Take exporting humidity data as an example.</p>
<p>Step 1 Prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 On the <strong>Realtime Display </strong>interface, click the <strong>Humidity </strong>tab. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark579"> Figure 5-154</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="607" class="wp-image-2281" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 243" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1038" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243.jpeg 787w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243-300x231.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243-768x592.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-154</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark579"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Locked </strong>to lock the data.</p>
<p>The export button is enabled.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Export</strong>. The system starts exporting the data.</p>
<p>After exporting is finished, a <strong>Message </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>You can find the exported data on your USB device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark580"></a> Configuring Alarm Linkage</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure alarm linkage settings for temperature and humidity data.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><strong>Configuring Alarm Linkage for Temperature Data</strong></li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click <strong>IoT ^ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity</strong>. The <strong>Temperature/Humidity </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark582"> Figure 5-155.</a></p>
<p>REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>&gt; MANAGER</p>
<p>Tempraturev^u- Wirde» Detector VrSrdc» Siren</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>W</td>
<td>Delect Position Nam</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td>a</td>
<td>Ch»6</td>
<td>Tern ¡para Cure</td>
<td>Chn6 Temperature</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Sçnjçr Pairing</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="551" height="24" class="wp-image-2282" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-244.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 244" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1039" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-244.jpeg 551w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-244-300x13.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 551px) 100vw, 551px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-155</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2283" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-245.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 245" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1040"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark582"></a> Step 2 On the temperature information line, click</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark583"> Figure 5-156.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="752" height="479" class="wp-image-2284" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-246.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 246" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1041" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-246.jpeg 752w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-246-300x191.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 752px) 100vw, 752px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-156</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark583"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for alarm linkage. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark584"> Table 5-49.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td><strong>Temperature </strong>by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Detect Position</p>
<p>Name</td>
<td>Set the detect position name.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of access point or any other channels according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td rowspan="2">Select event type as <strong>High </strong>or <strong>Low</strong>, and set the upper and low temperature limit respectively. For example, select event type as <strong>High </strong>and set upper limit as <strong>28</strong>, the alarm occurs when the temperature reaches 28 (&#8216;.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Upper Limit</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the alarm function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the alarm setting is active. For more information about setting the period, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Enable PTZ activation function.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface. For each PTZ camera, select the preset, tour, or pattern that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td>Select the check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE</p>
<p>To use this function, make sure the snapshot is enabled motion detect alarms in <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage <em>■+</em> Schedule <em>■+ </em>Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display <em>•+</em> TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a temperature alarm event.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">More Setting</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Show Message: Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to</li>
</ul>
<p>enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</p>
<ul>
<li>Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function.</li>
</ul>
<p>When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display </strong>^ <strong>TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>• Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification</p>
<p>when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>•+</em> EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>• Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a</p>
<p>local alarm log</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-49</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark584"></a><strong>Configuring Alarm Settings for Humidity Data</strong></li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the alarm event by setting the humidity data.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click <strong>IoT <em>■+</em> Manager </strong>^ <strong>Temperature/Humidity</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Temperature/Humidity </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark585"> Figure 5-157.</a></p>
<p>REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>&gt; MANAGER</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Senser Pairing</td>
<td colspan="2">Tempratu rcAI u_</td>
<td>Wirde» Detector</td>
<td>Wir el ess Siren</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="6"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2 1</td>
<td>E natte</p>
<p>s</td>
<td>Sating</p>
<p>&lt;5</td>
<td>Accession!</p>
<p>Chn6</td>
<td>Temperature</td>
<td>Deled Position Nam Chn6-Temperature</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="511" height="20" class="wp-image-2285" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-247.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 247" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1042" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-247.jpeg 511w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-247-300x12.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 511px) 100vw, 511px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-157</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="38" class="wp-image-2286" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-248.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 248" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1043"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark585"></a> Step 2 On the humidity information line, click</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark586"> Figure 5-158.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="830" height="526" class="wp-image-2287" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 249" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1044" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249.jpeg 830w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249-300x190.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249-768x487.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249-810x513.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 830px) 100vw, 830px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-158</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark586"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for the following parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark587"> Table 5-50.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td><strong>Humidity </strong>by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Detect Position</p>
<p>Name</td>
<td>Set the detect position name.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of access point or any other channels according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td rowspan="2">Select event type as <strong>High Humidity </strong>or <strong>Low Humidity</strong>, and set the upper and low humidity limit respectively. For example, select event type as <strong>High Humidity </strong>and set upper limit as <strong>60</strong>, the alarm occurs when the humidity reaches 60%RH.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Upper Limit</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the alarm function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the alarm setting is active. For more information about setting the period, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Enable PTZ activation function.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface. For each PTZ camera, select the preset, tour, or pattern that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td>Select the check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE</p>
<p>To use this function, make sure the snapshot is enabled motion detect alarms in <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage <em>■+</em> Schedule <em>■+ </em>Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display <em>•+</em> TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a temperature alarm event.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">More Setting</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Show Message: Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to</li>
</ul>
<p>enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</p>
<ul>
<li>Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function.</li>
</ul>
<p>When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display </strong>^ <strong>TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>• Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification</p>
<p>when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>•+</em> EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>• Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a</p>
<p>local alarm log</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-50</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark587"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark588"></a> Searching IoT Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search and backup all your IoT data.</p>
<p>To back up the data, you should prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click <strong>IoT ^ SEARCH INFO</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark590"> Figure 5-159.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="796" height="610" class="wp-image-2288" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 250" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1045" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250.jpeg 796w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250-300x230.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250-768x589.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 796px) 100vw, 796px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-159</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark590"></a> Step 2 Configure the parameters settings. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark591"> Table 5-51.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Display Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Display Type </strong>list, select <strong>List </strong>or <strong>Graph</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Select the information type that you want to search. You can select</p>
<p><strong>Humidity </strong>or <strong>Temperature</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Select the information state that you want to search.</p>
<p>This option is available when you select <strong>List </strong>in the <strong>Display Type </strong>list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Time</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark591"></a> End Time</td>
<td>Enter the start time and end time for the information that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-51</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Search</strong>. The system starts search according to your parameters settings.</p>
<p>After searching is finished, the result displays.</p>
<ul>
<li>For the data displayed in list, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark592"> Figure 5-160.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Go To </strong>to switch result pages.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>UM</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>All</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>M</em></strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>wtTwne</strong></td>
<td><strong>2017 11 06</strong></td>
<td><strong>00:0000 E</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2017-12-06 00 00 00</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Search</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>120</strong></td>
<td><strong>lime</strong></td>
<td><strong>Accew Pant</strong></td>
<td><strong>Type</strong></td>
<td><strong>Detect Paaton Name •</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>MI-0721 13 58</strong></td>
<td><strong>Ovi t</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Ctmt liznwStv 1</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>*</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4 201</strong></td>
<td><strong><em>1</em> 1147 21 14 00</strong></p>
<p><strong>M147 71 14 09</strong></p>
<p><strong>MI-0721 14 10 Mt 47 21 14 14 Mi-07 21 14 23 F It 0721 1004</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>1</em> 11 07 21.16 07</strong></p>
<p><strong>MI-0721 10 17 Ml 47 21 16 26 MI-07 21 16 77 1-1147 21 16 36</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Kim*aty</strong></td>
<td><strong>•</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>1/</strong></td>
<td><strong>85 &gt; » 1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Go To</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Backup</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-160</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark592"></a> For the data displayed in graph, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark593"> Figure 5-161.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>&gt; SEARCI</p>
<p>Humodit/</p>
<p>Stall Ti</p>
<p>2017-11-06 00:00.00&#8242;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="293" height="120" class="wp-image-2289" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-251.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 251" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1046"></p>
<p>Ml</p>
<p>Cbnl HuMiny 1</p>
<p>Figure 5-161</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark593"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Backup. </strong>The system starts exporting the data.</p>
<p>After exporting is finished, a <strong>Message </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>You can find the exported data on your USB device.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark594"></a> 5.11.3 Configuring Wireless Siren</p>
<p>You can connect the wireless siren to the Device, when there is an alarm event activated on the Device, the wireless siren generates alarms.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Intelligent ^ IoT &gt; Manager &gt; Wireless Siren</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Wireless Siren </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark596"> Figure 5-16</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark546">2Figure 5-140.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="765" height="590" class="wp-image-2290" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-252.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 252" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1047" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-252.jpeg 765w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-252-300x231.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 765px) 100vw, 765px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-162</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark596"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the wireless alarm output. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark597"> Table 5-52</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark530">.Table</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark530">5-46</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>USB Gateway, Camera Gateway</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Automatically activate alarm if the alarm output function</li>
</ul>
<p>for wireless siren is enabled for specific events. For example, if you want to enable the alarm output through wireless siren for motion detection, see &#8220;Alarm Output&#8221; parameter in<a href="#post-2037-bookmark456"> Table 5­34.</a></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: Activate alarm immediately.</li>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: Do not activate alarm.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark597"></a> Alarm Release</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK to </strong>clear all alarm output status of wireless siren.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-52</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark598"></a> Configuring POS Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it. This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel window.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view screen only support single-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen and playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark600"></a> Searching the Transaction Records</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent <em>•+</em> POS ^ POS SEARCH</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>POS SEARCH </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark602"> Figure 5-163.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="459" class="wp-image-2291" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 253" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1048" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-163</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark602"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Transaction No. </strong>list, enter the transaction number on your receipt printed out by POS machine.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Start Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, enter the time period that you want to search the POS transaction information.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The searched transaction results display in the table.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark603"></a> Configuring POS Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Intelligent^ POS ^ POS SETUP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>POS SETUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark605"> Figure 5-164.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="805" height="452" class="wp-image-2292" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 254" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1049" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254.jpeg 805w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 805px) 100vw, 805px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-164</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark605"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the POS parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark606"> Table 5-53.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>POS Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>POS Name </strong>list, select the POS machine that you want to configure settings for. Click ^3 to modify the POS name. CQ NOTE</p>
<p>The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English characters.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the POS function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>The recording for POS alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Privacy Setup</td>
<td>Enter the privacy content.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protocol Type</td>
<td>Select <strong>POS </strong>by default. Different machine corresponds to different protocol.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Connect Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Connect Type </strong>list, select the connection protocol type.</p>
<p>Click <strong>^3, </strong>the IP Address interface is displayed.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Source IP </strong>box, enter the IP address (the machine that is connected to the Device) that sends messages.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Convert</td>
<td>Select a character encoding mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Overlay</td>
<td>In the <strong>Overlay </strong>list, Select <strong>Turn </strong>or <strong>ROLL</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Network time out</td>
<td>When the network is not working correctly and cannot be recovered after the entered timeout limit, the POS information will not display normally. After the network is recovered, the latest POS information will be displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Display</td>
<td>Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS information displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information disappear from the screen after 5 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Font Size</td>
<td>In the Font Size list, select <strong>Small</strong>, <strong>Medium</strong>, or <strong>Big </strong>as the text size of POS information</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>COLOR</td>
<td>In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS information.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>POS Info</td>
<td>Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the live view screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Transaction Start</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the transaction start character and end character.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Transaction End</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark606"></a> Line Delimiter</td>
<td>Enter the line delimiter that you want to use.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-53</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark607"></a> Configuring Backup Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="470" class="wp-image-2293" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 255" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1050" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255.jpeg 837w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 837px) 100vw, 837px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark609"></a> Finding USB Device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When you inset a USB storage device into the USB port of the Device, the Device detects the USB storage device and pops up &#8220;Find USB device&#8221; interface, which provides you a shortcut to perform backup and upgrading operations. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark612"> Figure 5-165.</a></p>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark611">&#8220;5.13.2 Backing up Files&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark847">&#8220;5.19.2 Viewing Log Information&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark818">&#8220;5.18.5 Exporting</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark818">and Importing System Settings&#8221;</a>, and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark831">&#8220;5.18.7 Upgrading the Device.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="601" height="379" class="wp-image-2294" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-256.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 256" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1051" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-256.jpeg 601w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-256-300x189.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 601px) 100vw, 601px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-165</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark611"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark612"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark613"></a> Backing up Files</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can back up the recorded videos and snapshots.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ BACKUP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>BACKUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark615"> Figure 5-166.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="814" height="458" class="wp-image-2295" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 257" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1052" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257.jpeg 814w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 814px) 100vw, 814px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-166</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark615"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the backup parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark616"> Table 5-54.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>Device Name </strong>list, select the device that you want to back up the files to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Format</td>
<td>Click <strong>Format </strong>to format the selected device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Path</td>
<td>Click <strong>Browse</strong>, the <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. Select the route where you want to search for the files.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>In the <strong>Record CH </strong>list, select the channel where you want to search for the files.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select the file type that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Time</p>
<p>End Time</td>
<td>Enter the start time and end time for the files that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark616"></a> File Format</td>
<td>In the <strong>File Format </strong>list, select the file format that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-54</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Search </strong>to search the files that meet the configured settings.</p>
<p>The searched results will display in the table.</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the files that you want to back up.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Backup </strong>to back up the selected files to the configured path. Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Clear </strong>to remove all the searched results.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark617"></a> Network Management</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="939" height="472" class="wp-image-2296" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 258" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1053" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258.jpeg 939w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258-300x151.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258-768x386.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258-810x407.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 939px) 100vw, 939px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark619"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark620"></a> Configuring Network Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can ensure the network interworking between the Device and other devices through configuring the network settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark622"></a> Configuring TCP/IP Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the settings for the Device such as IP address, DNS according to the networking plan.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP</strong>, the <strong>TCP/IP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark624"> Figure 5-167.</a></p>
<p>For details about parameter settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark124">&#8220;5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="740" height="526" class="wp-image-2297" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-259.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 259" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1054" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-259.jpeg 740w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-259-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 740px) 100vw, 740px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-167</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark624"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark625"></a> Configuring Port Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone and configure each port settings.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ CONNECTION</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>CONNECTION </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark627"> Figure 5-168.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="810" height="459" class="wp-image-2298" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 260" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1055" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 810px) 100vw, 810px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-168</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark627"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the connection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark628"> Table 5-55.</a> Q2 NOTE</p>
<p>The connection parameters except Max Connection cannot take effects until the Device has been restarted.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Max Connection</td>
<td>The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time, such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone.</p>
<p>Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>TCP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 25001. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>UDP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 25002. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HTTP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>RTSP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>POS Port</td>
<td>Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The default value is 38800.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HTTPS Enable</td>
<td>Enable <strong>HTTPS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark628"></a> HTTPS Port</td>
<td>HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-55</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark629"></a> Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can make wireless connection between the Device and the other devices in the same network through Wi-Fi settings, facilitating the devices connection and mobility.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Only the Device with Wi-Fi module supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>■&gt;</em> Wi-Fi</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Wi-Fi </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark631"> Figure 5-169.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="816" height="460" class="wp-image-2299" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 261" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1056" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261.jpeg 816w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 816px) 100vw, 816px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-169</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark631"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the Wi-Fi connection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark632"> Table 5-56.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Wi-Fi Auto Connect</td>
<td>Enable <strong>Wi-Fi Auto Connect</strong>.</p>
<p>After the Device is restarted, it will automatically connect to the nearest hotspot that had been connected successfully.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Refresh</td>
<td>Refresh the hotspot list. The self-adaption function such as adding password is supported if such setting was once configured.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Connect</td>
<td>In the <strong>hotpot</strong>s list, select a hotspot, and then click <strong>Connect</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>To reconnect the same hotspot, disconnect first and then</li>
</ul>
<p>reconnect.</p>
<ul>
<li>To connect to other hotspot, disconnect from the current</li>
</ul>
<p>connected hotspot first, and then connect to the other hotspot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark632"></a> Disconnect</td>
<td>To disconnect from a hotspot, click <strong>Disconnect</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-56</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>After the Device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, in the <strong>Wi-Fi Working Info </strong>area, the current hotspot, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark633"></a> Configuring PPPoE Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection by configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the WAN. To use this function, firstly you need to obtain the user name and password from the Internet Service Provider.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ PPPoE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>PPPoE </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark635"> Figure 5-170.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="465" class="wp-image-2300" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 262" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1057" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-170</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark635"></a> Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>User Name </strong>box and <strong>Password </strong>box, enter the user name and password accordingly provided by the Internet Service Provider.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address appears on the PPPoE interface. You can use this IP address to access the Device. CD NOTE</p>
<p>When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the <strong>TCP/IP </strong>interface cannot be modified.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark636"></a> Configuring DDNS Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you access the Device by using the domain.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark638"></a> Preparing for Configuration</p>
<p>Please confirm if the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.</p>
<ul>
<li>If DDNS belongs to Quick DDNS type, domain registration is not needed.</li>
<li>If DDNS belongs to other type, you need to login the DDNS website to register the information such as user name, password, and domain name.</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the information of all the connected devices under this user name.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark640"></a> Configuring Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ DDNS</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>DDNS </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark642"> Figure 5-171.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="465" class="wp-image-2301" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 263" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1058" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-171</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark642"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the DDNS parameters. • DDNS type. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark643"> Table 5-57.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the DDNS function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DDNS Type</td>
<td rowspan="2">Type and address of DDNS service provider.</p>
<ul>
<li>Type: CP Plus DDNS Free</li>
<li>Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.org</li>
<li>Type: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.com</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Host IP</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Domain Name</td>
<td>The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service provider.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the user name and password obtained from DDNS service provider. You need to register (including user name and password) on the website of DDNS service provider.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark643"></a> Interval</td>
<td>Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-57</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press <strong>Enter</strong>.</p>
<p>If the web interface of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not, the configuration is failed.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark644"></a> Configuring EMAIL Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification when there is an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>EMAIL </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark646"> Figure 5-172.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="812" height="453" class="wp-image-2302" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 264" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1059" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264.jpeg 812w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264-768x428.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264-810x452.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 812px) 100vw, 812px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2303" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-265.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 265" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1060"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark646"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the email parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark647"> Table 5-58.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the email function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SMTP Server</td>
<td>Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value setting is 25. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the user name and password of sender’s email account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anonymity</td>
<td>If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mail Receiver</td>
<td>In the <strong>Mail Receiver </strong>list, select the number of receiver that you want to receive the notification. The Device supports up to three mail receivers.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Email Address</td>
<td>Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sender</td>
<td>Enter the sender’s email address. It supports maximum three senders separated by comma.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Title</td>
<td>Enter the email subject.</p>
<p>Supports Chinese, English and Arabic numerals. It supports maximum 64 characters.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Attachment</td>
<td>Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Authentication</td>
<td>Select the encryption type: <strong>NONE</strong>, <strong>SSL</strong>, or <strong>TLS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval (Sec.)</td>
<td>This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same type of alarm event, which means, the system does not send an email upon any alarm event.</p>
<p>This setting helps to avoid the large amount of emails caused by frequent alarm events.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Health Enable</td>
<td>Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to check the connection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval (Min.)</td>
<td>This is the interval that the system sends a health test email. The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no interval.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark647"></a> Test</td>
<td>Click Test to test the email sending function. If the configuration is correct, the receiver’s email account will receive the email.</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</p>
<p>Before testing, click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-58</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark648"></a> Configuring UPnP Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN through the IP address on the WAN.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark650"></a> Preparation for Configuration</p>
<ul>
<li>Login the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.</li>
<li>Enable the UPnP function at the router.</li>
<li>Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP</strong>, configure the IP address into the router IP</li>
</ul>
<p>address range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark652"></a> Configuration Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ UPnP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>UPnP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark654"> Figure 5-173.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="461" class="wp-image-2304" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 266" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1061" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266.jpeg 822w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266-810x454.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 822px) 100vw, 822px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-173</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark654"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark655"> Table 5-59.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PAT</td>
<td colspan="2">Enable the UPnP function.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td colspan="4">Indicates the status of UPnP function.</p>
<p>* Offline: Failed.</p>
<p>• Online: Succeeded.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">LAN IP</td>
<td colspan="4">Enter IP address of router on the LAN.</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="8">After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="6">automatically without performing any configurations.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">WAN IP</td>
<td colspan="4">Enter IP address of router on the WAN.</p>
<p>LJ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="8">After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="6">automatically without performing any configurations.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">The settings in PAT table correspond to the UPnP PAT table on the router.</p>
<ul>
<li>Service Name: Name of network server.</li>
<li>Protocol: Type of protocol.</li>
<li>Int. Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.</li>
<li>Ext. Port: External port that is mapped on the router.</li>
</ul>
<p>Wl NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="9">To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to use</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="8">the ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PAT Table</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">from 1 through 255 and system ports from 256 through 1023.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="6">When there are several devices in the LAN, please</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="8">reasonably arrange the ports mapping to avoid mapping to the same external port.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="9">When establishing a mapping relationship, please ensure the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">mapping ports are not occupied or limited.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="9">The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">same and cannot be modified.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="3">Click <strong>^3 </strong>to modify the external port.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-59</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark655"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>In the browser, enter<a href="http://wan/"> http://WAN </a>IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark656"></a> Configuring SNMP Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>. . NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser to manage and control the Device from the software.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark658"></a> Preparation for Configuration</p>
<ul>
<li>Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MG­SOFT MIB Browser</li>
<li>Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark660"></a> Configuration Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ SNMP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SNMP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark662"> Figure 5-174.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="442" class="wp-image-2305" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 267" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1062" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267.jpeg 787w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-174</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark662"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the SNMP parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark663"> Table 5-60.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the SNMP function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Version</td>
<td>Select the check box of SNMP version(s) that you are using.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SNMP Port</td>
<td>Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Read Community</td>
<td rowspan="2">Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Write Community</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Trap Address</td>
<td>Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send the Trap information.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark663"></a> Trap Port</td>
<td>Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the Trap information.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-60</p>
<p>Step 3</p>
<p>Step 4</p>
<p>Step 5</p>
<p>Step 6</p>
<p>Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.</p>
<p>Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.</p>
<p>On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and<br />
then select the version number to query.</p>
<p>On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the<br />
configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark664"></a> Configuring Multicast Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the video will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ MULTICAST</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>MULTICAST </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark666"> Figure 5-175.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="453" class="wp-image-2306" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 268" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1063" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268-768x429.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="123" height="23" class="wp-image-2307" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-269.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 269" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1064"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark666"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the multicast parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark667"> Table 5-61.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the multicast function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Address</td>
<td>Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP.</p>
<p>The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark667"></a> Port</td>
<td>Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through 65000.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-61</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>You can use the multicast IP address to login the web. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark668"> Figure 5-176.</a></p>
<p>On the web login dialog box, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>MULTICAST</strong>. The web will automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video through multicast function.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="470" height="423" class="wp-image-2308" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-270.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 270" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1065" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-270.jpeg 470w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-270-300x270.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark668"></a> Figure 5-176</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark669"></a> Configuring Register Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to make it easier for the client software to access the Device.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ REGISTER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>REGISTER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark671"> Figure 5-177.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="812" height="461" class="wp-image-2309" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 271" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1066" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271.jpeg 812w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271-810x460.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 812px) 100vw, 812px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-177</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark671"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the register parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark672"> Table 5-62.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the register function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>No.</td>
<td>Select a number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Server IP Address</td>
<td>Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you want to register to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>Enter the port of the server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark672"></a> Sub Service ID</td>
<td>This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-62</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark673"></a> Configuring Alarm Center Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use this function, the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box must be selected. For details about alarm event settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark447">&#8220;5.10 Alarm Events Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ ALARM CENTER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ALARM CENTER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark675"> Figure 5-178.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="456" class="wp-image-2310" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 272" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1067" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272-768x429.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272-810x452.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-178</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark675"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm center parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark676"> Table 5-63.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the alarm center function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protocol Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Protocol Type </strong>list, select protocol type. The default is <strong>ALARM CENTER</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Host IP</p>
<p>Port</td>
<td>The IP address and communication port of the PC installed with alarm client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark676"></a> Self-Report Time</td>
<td>In the <strong>Self-Report Time </strong>list, select time cycle and specific time for uploading alarm.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-63</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark677"></a> Configuring InstaOn Cloud Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can manage the devices by using InstaOn technology to download the application and register the devices. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark129">&#8220;5.1.4.5 Configuring InstaOn Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark679"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark680"></a> Configuring Network Testing Settings
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark682"></a> Testing the Network</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> INFO ^ Network ^ Test</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Test </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark684"> Figure 5-179.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="819" height="463" class="wp-image-2311" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 273" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1068" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273.jpeg 819w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 819px) 100vw, 819px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-179</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark684"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Destination IP </strong>box, enter the IP address.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Test</strong>.</p>
<p>After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for average delay, packet loss, and network status. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark685"> Figure 5-180.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="976" height="428" class="wp-image-2312" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 274" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1069" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274.jpeg 976w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274-300x132.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274-768x337.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274-810x355.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 976px) 100vw, 976px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-180</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark685"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark686"></a> Capturing Packet and Backing up</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Packet capture means the operations such as capturing, resending, and editing data that are sent and received during network transmission. When there is network abnormality, you can perform packet capturing and back up into the USB storage device. This date can be provided to the technical support for analyzing the network condition.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Info ^ Network &gt; Network Test</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Network Test </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark688"> Figure 5-181.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="780" height="437" class="wp-image-2313" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 275" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1070" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275.jpeg 780w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 780px) 100vw, 780px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-181</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark688"></a> Step 2 Connect a USB storage device to the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Fresh</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device starts detecting the USB storage device and displays its name in the <strong>Device Name </strong>box.</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the route of the data that you want to capture and back up.</p>
<p>1) In the Network Sniffer Packet Backup, click <strong>Browse</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark689"> Figure 5-182.</a></p>
<p>Device Name</p>
<p>Total Space</p>
<p>Free Space</p>
<p>Address</p>
<p>sdal(USBUSB) Refresh Format</p>
<p>3.73 GB</p>
<p>3.27 GB</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® LANl-20180313213059.pcap</td>
<td>111.7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® LANl-20180313213722.pcap</td>
<td>182.1 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>1.2 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>19.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® printf.txt</td>
<td>1.97 MB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>Q</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>l&amp;l kmsg_printf.txt</td>
<td>1.1KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@1 pnntf_2O18O3161539O3.txt</td>
<td>964 B</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SI kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt</td>
<td>2L2KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>W pnntf_20180316154049.txt</td>
<td>1.5 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® kmsg_printf_201803161S4049.txt</td>
<td>21.7 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>g</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@1 printf_2O18O316155148.txt</td>
<td>2.2 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Ml kmsg_phntf_20180316155148.txt</td>
<td>21.6 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® printf_2O18O316161436.txt</td>
<td>2.5 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt</td>
<td>21.9 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark689"></a> New Folder</p>
<p>Import</p>
<p>Export</p>
<p>Figure 5-182</p>
<p>2)</p>
<p>Select the route.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>If there are several USB storage devices are connected to the Device, you can select from the <strong>Device Name </strong>list.</li>
<li>Click Refresh to total space, free space and the file list in the selected USB storage device.</li>
<li>In the case of insufficient capacity, click Fl</li>
</ul>
<p>to delete the needless files.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>New Folder </strong>to create a new folder in the USB storage device.</li>
</ul>
<p>3) Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the route selection settings.</p>
<p>The <strong>Test </strong>interface is displayed again.</p>
<p>Step 5</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="51" class="wp-image-2314" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-276.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 276" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1071"></p>
<p>to start packet capturing and backing up.</p>
<p>CO NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Only the data packet of one LAN can be captured at one time.</li>
<li>After capturing starts, you can exit the <strong>Test </strong>interface to perform other operations</li>
</ul>
<p>such as web login and monitoring.</p>
<p>Step6 Click © to stop capturing.</p>
<p>The backup data is saved in the selected route under the naming style &#8220;LAN name- time.pcap.&#8221; See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark690"> Figure 5-183.</a> You can open it by using Wireshark software.</p>
<p>Device Name</p>
<p>Total Space</p>
<p>Free Space</p>
<p>Address</p>
<p>sdal(USBUSB) Refresh Format</p>
<p>3.73 GB</p>
<p>3.27 GB</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td>Q</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® LANl-20180313213059.pcap</td>
<td>111.7 KB</td>
<td>Rte</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@ LAN 1-20180313213722.pcap</td>
<td>182.1 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>;i‘i printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>1 2 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@ kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>19.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>o</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g) printf.txt</td>
<td>1.97 MB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I«l kmsg_printf.txt</td>
<td>1.1KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>*</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>H pnntf_20180316153903.txt</td>
<td>964 B</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>Sk</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>(£i kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt</td>
<td>2L2KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>□</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>M printf_20180316154049.txt</td>
<td>1.5 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>M</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IB kmsg_printf_20180316154049.txt</td>
<td>2L7KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® printf_20180316155148.txt</td>
<td>22 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ kmsg_printf_20180316155148.txt</td>
<td>21.6 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>printf.20180316161436.txt</td>
<td>25 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>81 kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt</td>
<td>2L9KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>New Folder</p>
<p>Import Export</p>
<p>Figure 5-183</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark690"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark691"></a> 5.15 Configuring Account Settings</p>
<p>You can add, modify and delete user accounts, groups, and ONVIF users, and set security questions for admin account.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The user name supports 31 characters and group name supports 15 characters. The user name can be consisted of letter, number, &#8220;_&#8221;, &#8220;@&#8221;, &#8220;.&#8221;.</li>
<li>You can set maximum 64 users and 20 groups. The group name by &#8220;User&#8221; and &#8220;Admin&#8221; cannot be deleted. You can set other groups and define the relevant permissions. However, the admin account cannot be set randomly.</li>
<li>You can manage the account by user and group and the name cannot be repeated. Every user must belong to a group, and one user only belongs to one group.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark693"></a> Configuring User Account
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark695"></a> Adding a User Account</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>USER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark697"> Figure 5-184.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="833" height="468" class="wp-image-2315" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 277" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1072" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277.jpeg 833w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 833px) 100vw, 833px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-184</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark697"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add User </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark698"> Figure 5-185.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="792" height="445" class="wp-image-2316" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 278" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1073" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278.jpeg 792w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 792px) 100vw, 792px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-185</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark698"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a user account. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark699"> Table 5-64.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter a user name and password for the account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Confirm Password</td>
<td>Re-enter the password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Memo</td>
<td>Optional.</p>
<p>Enter a description of the account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User MAC</td>
<td>Enter user MAC address</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Group</td>
<td>Select a group for the account.</p>
<p>w note</p>
<p>The user rights must be within the group permission.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Set </strong>to display <strong>Set </strong>interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the new account can login the device. The new account cannot login the device during the time beyond the set period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Authority</td>
<td>In the <strong>Authority </strong>area, select the check boxes in the <strong>System </strong>tab, <strong>Playback </strong>tab, and <strong>Monitor </strong>tab.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>To manage the user account easily, when defining the user account authority, it is recommended not to give the authority to the common user account higher that the advanced user account.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-64</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark699"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark700"></a> Setting Permitted Period</p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Period</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark702"> Figure 5-186.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="774" height="437" class="wp-image-2317" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 279" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1074" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279.jpeg 774w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 774px) 100vw, 774px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-186</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark702"></a> Step 2 Define the permitted period. By default, it is active all the time. • Define the period by drawing.</p>
<p>O Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.</p>
<p>O Define for several days of a week: Click H before each day, the icon</p>
<p>switches to Q</p>
<p>. On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks</p>
<p>to select the active periods, all the days with Q</p>
<p>will take the same settings.</p>
<p>O Define for all days of a week: Click <strong>All</strong>, all the switches to . On the</p>
<p>timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.</p>
<p>• Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.</p>
<p>1) Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="39" class="wp-image-2318" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-280.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 280" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1075"></p>
<p>The <strong>Period </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark703"> Figure 5-187.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="472" class="wp-image-2319" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 281" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1076" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281.jpeg 826w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281-768x439.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281-810x463.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-187</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark703"></a> Enter the time frame for the period and select the check box to enable the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>O There are six periods for you to set for each day.</p>
<p>O Under <strong>Copy</strong>, select <strong>All </strong>to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark704"></a> 5.15.1.2 Modify a User Account</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>USER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark706"> Figure 5-188.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="752" height="425" class="wp-image-2320" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-282.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 282" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1077" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-282.jpeg 752w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-282-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 752px) 100vw, 752px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-188</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark706"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p>for the user account that you want to modify.</p>
<p>The <strong>Modify User </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark707"> Figure 5-189.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="809" height="453" class="wp-image-2321" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 283" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1078" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283.jpeg 809w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 809px) 100vw, 809px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-189</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark707"></a> Step 3 Change the settings for password, user name, user group, user MAC, memo, period, and authority.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>The new password can be set from 8 digits through 32 digits and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and &#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</p>
<p>For the admin account, you can enter or modify email address, enable/disable the unlock pattern, modify the security questions.</p>
<p>• In the <strong>Email Address </strong>box, enter the email address, and the click <strong>Save </strong>to save the setting.</p>
<p>• To use the unlock pattern, enable <strong>Unlock Pattern</strong>, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2322" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-284.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 284" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1079"></p>
<p>, draw a pattern in</p>
<p>the <strong>Unlock Pattern </strong>interface, and then click <strong>Save </strong>to save the setting.</p>
<p>• Configuring security questions.</p>
<ol>
<li>) Click Security Questions.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Security Questions </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark708"> Figure 5-190.</a></p>
<p>Security Questions</p>
<p>Successfully set. Please delete it first if you want to reset security question ¡again.</p>
<p>Question 1</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="714" height="282" class="wp-image-2323" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-285.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 285" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1080" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-285.jpeg 714w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-285-300x118.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 714px) 100vw, 714px" /></p>
<p>Delete</p>
<p>Figure 5-190</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark708"></a> In the <strong>Question </strong>list, select questions and enter the answers in the Answer box.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>You can use the security questions and answers to reset the password for admin account.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>To reset the security questions, on the <strong>Security Questions</strong>, enter the correct answers for each question, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark709"></a> 5.15.1.3 Deleting a User Account</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Account ^ User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>USER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark711"> Figure 5-191.</a></p>
<p>■&gt; USER</p>
<p>GROUP</p>
<p>ONVIFUSER</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark711"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="49" class="wp-image-2324" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-286.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 286" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1081"></p>
<p>1 Usa Name Group»&#8230;. Modify Mat 5«ojs MAC A.. Memo</p>
<p>I admin admin Z t Login Local admin&#8217;s account</p>
<p>AiMUfrer</p>
<p>Figure 5-191</p>
<p>for the user account that you want to delete.</p>
<p>A <strong>Message </strong>is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to delete a user account.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark712"></a> Configuring Group Account
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark714"></a> Adding a Group</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>GROUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark716"> Figure 5-192.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="814" height="460" class="wp-image-2325" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 287" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1082" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287.jpeg 814w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 814px) 100vw, 814px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-192</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark716"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark717"> Figure 5-193.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="768" height="428" class="wp-image-2326" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-288.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 288" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1083" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-288.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-288-300x167.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 768px) 100vw, 768px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-193</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark717"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a group. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark718"> Table 5-65.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Group Name</td>
<td>Enter a name for the group.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Memo</td>
<td>Optional.</p>
<p>Enter a description of the account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark718"></a> Authority</td>
<td>In the <strong>Authority </strong>area, select the check boxes in the <strong>System </strong>tab, <strong>Playback </strong>tab, and <strong>Monitor </strong>tab.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-65</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark719"></a> Modifying a Group</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>GROUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark721"> Figure 5-194.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="626" class="wp-image-2327" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 289" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1084" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289-300x232.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289-768x593.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-194</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark721"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="43" height="42" class="wp-image-2328" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-290.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 290" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1085"></p>
<p>for the group account that you want to modify.</p>
<p>Step 3 The <strong>Modify Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark722"> Figure 5-195.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="456" class="wp-image-2329" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 291" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1086" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-195</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark722"></a> Step 4 Change the settings for group name, memo, and authority.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark723"></a> Deleting a Group</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Account ^ Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>GROUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark725"> Figure 5-196.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>USER</td>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td><strong>GlCu® Nd inc</strong></td>
<td>Miriiiy</td>
<td><strong>Ddclc</strong></td>
<td><strong>Memo</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□ROUP</strong></td>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td><strong>admin</strong></td>
<td><strong>z</strong></td>
<td>fl</td>
<td><strong>aAnimâraMr ¡¡roup</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>onvif<strong> use n</strong></td>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td><strong>user</strong></td>
<td><strong>/</strong></td>
<td>fl</td>
<td><strong>user 9*aup</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Add Owp</p>
<p>Figure 5-196</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark725"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="49" class="wp-image-2330" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-292.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 292" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1087"></p>
<p>for the user account that you want to delete.</p>
<p>A <strong>Message </strong>is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to delete a group.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark726"></a> Configuring Onvif Users</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The device manufactured by other company can connect to the Device through Onvif protocol by an authorized Onvif account.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>The admin account is created for Onvif users right after the Device has been initialized</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ ONVIF USER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ONVIF USER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark728"> Figure 5-197.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="839" height="476" class="wp-image-2331" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 293" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1088" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293.jpeg 839w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293-810x460.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 839px) 100vw, 839px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-197</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark728"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add User/Modify </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark729"> Figure 5-198.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="542" height="419" class="wp-image-2332" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-294.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 294" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1089" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-294.jpeg 542w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-294-300x232.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 542px) 100vw, 542px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-198</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark729"></a> Step 3 Enter user name, password, and select the group that you want this account to belong to.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click □ to modify the account; Click Fl</p>
<p>to delete the account.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark730"></a> 5.16 Voice Management</p>
<p>Voice management function manages audio files and configures the playing schedule. When there is an alarm event, the audio file can be activated.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark732"></a> Configuring Audio Files</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the audio volume.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Voice ^ FILE MANAGER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>FILE MANAGER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark734"> Figure 5-199.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="828" height="662" class="wp-image-2333" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 295" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1090" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295.jpeg 828w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295-300x240.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295-768x614.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295-810x648.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 828px) 100vw, 828px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-199</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark734"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark735"> Figure 5-200.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="5">Browse</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">Device Name sdcl(USBUSB) 3.71GB/3.73GB(Free/Total)</td>
<td>Refresh</td>
<td>Format</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="5">Address /</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="5"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
<td>Play</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ (fd2b025a-ac98-e383-13ea-lcf86fc539fb)</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g kmsg_printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g| SmartPlayer.exe.Ink</td>
<td>1.7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>8</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317134749_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>□</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317135000_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>□</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a ty.lnk</td>
<td>L7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>□</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g kmsg_printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>New Folder</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>OK</td>
<td>Back</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-200</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark735"></a> Step 3 Select the audio files that you want to import.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.</p>
<p>If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the <strong>FILE MANAGER </strong>interface. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark736"> Figure 5-201.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="814" height="627" class="wp-image-2334" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 296" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1091" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296.jpeg 814w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296-300x231.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296-768x592.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296-810x624.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 814px) 100vw, 814px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-201</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark736"></a> The imported audio files are automatically saved into the HDD, so you do not need to connect to the USB storage device to get the file next time.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="40" class="wp-image-2335" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-297.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 297" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1092"></p>
<p>to play the audio file.</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="43" height="41" class="wp-image-2336" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-298.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 298" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1093"></p>
<p>to rename the audio file.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click to delete the audio file.</li>
<li>To decrease or increase the playing volume, move the slider to the left or to the right.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark737"></a> 5.16.2 Configuring Playing Schedule for Audio Files</p>
<p>You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Voice ^ SCHEDULE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SCHEDULE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark739"> Figure 5-202.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="702" height="394" class="wp-image-2337" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-299.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 299" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1094" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-299.jpeg 702w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-299-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 702px) 100vw, 702px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-202</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark739"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the schedule parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark740"> Table 5-66.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>In the <strong>Period </strong>box, enter the time. Select the check box to enable the settings.</p>
<p>You can configure up to six periods.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>File Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>File Name </strong>list, select the audio file that you want to play for this configured period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval</td>
<td>In the <strong>Interval </strong>box, enter the time in minutes for how often you want to repeat the playing.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Repeat</td>
<td>Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the defined period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark740"></a> Output</td>
<td>Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC function shares the same port with talkback function and the latter has the priority.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-66</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>• The finish time for audio playing is decided by audio file size and the configured interval.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>Playing priority: Alarm event &gt; Talkback &gt; Trial listening &gt; Audio file.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark741"></a> 5.17 Storage Management</p>
<p>Storage management function manages the stored resources such as recorded video files and storage space. The function aims at providing easier operation and improving the storage efficiency.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="897" height="502" class="wp-image-2338" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 300" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1095" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300.jpeg 897w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 897px) 100vw, 897px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark743"></a> Configuring Basic Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage <em>■+</em> BASIC</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>BASIC </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark745"> Figure 5-203.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="557" class="wp-image-2339" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 301" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1096" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301.jpeg 788w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301-768x543.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-203</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark745"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the basic settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark746"> Table 5-67.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD Full</td>
<td>Configure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Stop Record </strong>to stop recording</li>
<li>Select <strong>Overwrite </strong>to overwrite the recorded video files</li>
</ul>
<p>always from the earliest time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pack Mode</td>
<td>Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark746"></a> Auto-Delete Old Files</td>
<td>Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, configure the N days.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-67</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark747"></a> Configuring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark749"></a> The system starts recording and taking snapshot according to the configured schedule. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">&#8220;5.1.4.10 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">Snapshot Storage ScheduleConfiguring Snapshot Storage Schedule&#8221;</a></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark750"></a> Configuring HDD Manager</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the HDD information, format HDD, and configure the HDD type through HDD manager.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage ^ HDD MANAGER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>HDD MANAGER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark752"> Figure 5-204.</a></p>
<p>In the table, you can view the information of current HDD, such as device name, HDD type, status, total space and free space, and serial number of the HDD port.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="726" height="559" class="wp-image-2340" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-302.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 302" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1097" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-302.jpeg 726w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-302-300x231.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 726px) 100vw, 726px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-204</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark752"></a> Step 2 Configuring the settings for the HDD manager.</p>
<ul>
<li>HDD type setting: In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Read/Write</strong>, <strong>Read-Only </strong>or <strong>Redundant</strong>, and then click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</li>
<li>HDD format: Select the HDD that you want to format, click <strong>Format</strong>, in the pop-up message, click <strong>OK </strong>to start formatting, and then following the onscreen message to complete formatting.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark753"></a> 5.17.4 Configuring HDD Group</p>
<p>You can configure the HDD group to save the specified main stream, sub stream and snapshots</p>
<p>to the designated HDD group.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="76" height="66" class="wp-image-2341" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-303.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 303" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1098"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>If &#8220;Current HDD Mode is Quota Mode&#8221; is shown on the interface, you need to switch to HDD mode.</li>
<li>You can enable either HDD Mode or Quota Mode at one time. The system reboots to activate the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu &gt; STORAGE &gt; ADVANCE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ADVANCE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark755"> Figure 5-205.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="750" height="584" class="wp-image-2342" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-304.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 304" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1099" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-304.jpeg 750w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-304-300x234.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 750px) 100vw, 750px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-205</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark755"></a> Step 2 Select the group for each HDD group, and then click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Step 3 After configuring HDD group, under the <strong>Main Stream </strong>tab, <strong>Sub Stream </strong>tab and <strong>Snapshot </strong>tab, configure settings to save the main stream, sub stream and snapshot to different HDD group as selected by you. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark756"> Figure 5-206,</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark757"> Figure 5-207,</a> and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark758"> Figure 5­208.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BASIC</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td><strong>Main Stream</strong></td>
<td colspan="2">Sub Steam</td>
<td></td>
<td>Snnpshol</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">SCHEDULE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Current HDD Mode is HDD Group.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD MANAGER</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">&gt; ADVANCE</td>
<td colspan="2">Set AJI Charnel* 1</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Adi</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>QUOTA</td>
<td>ÇKırnH</td>
<td>Group Channel</td>
<td>Group</td>
<td colspan="2">Chitnncl</td>
<td>Group</td>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Group</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>1</td>
<td>1 ’ 2</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>3</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD DETECT</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>1 &#8211; §</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>7</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>8</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>REC ESTIMATE</td>
<td>9</td>
<td>1 * 10</td>
<td>1 W</td>
<td>11</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>12</td>
<td>1 *</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>FTP</td>
<td>13</td>
<td>1 * 14</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>15</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 •</td>
<td>Ifl</td>
<td>1 •</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Apply <sup>c</sup>«<sup>n</sup>“<sup>i</sup></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark756"></a> Figure 5-206</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="771" height="599" class="wp-image-2343" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 305" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1100" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305.jpeg 771w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305-300x233.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305-768x597.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 771px) 100vw, 771px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark757"></a> Figure 5-207</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="770" height="597" class="wp-image-2344" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 306" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1101" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306.jpeg 770w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306-300x233.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306-768x595.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 770px) 100vw, 770px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-208</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark758"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark759"></a> 5.17.5 Configuring HDD Detecting Settings</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>HDD detecting function detects the current status of HDD to let you know the HDD performance and replace the defective HDD.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark761"></a> Detecting HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can detect HDD by quick detect and global detect.</p>
<ul>
<li>Quick detect: Detect the files saved in HDD. The detected bad track can be repaired by formatting. If there are no files in HDD, the system cannot detect the bad track.</li>
<li>Global detect: Detect the whole HDD through Windows, which takes time and might affect the HDD that is recording the video.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage ^ HDD DETECT ^ Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Detect </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark763"> Figure 5-209.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="793" height="445" class="wp-image-2345" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 307" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1102" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307.jpeg 793w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 793px) 100vw, 793px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-209</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark763"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Quick Detect </strong>or <strong>Global Detect</strong>; and in the <strong>HDD </strong>list, select the HDD that you want to detect.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Start Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>The system starts detecting the HDD. After detecting is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark764"> Figure 5-210.</a></p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>During detecting, click <strong>Pause </strong>to pause detecting, click <strong>Continue </strong>to restart detecting, and click <strong>Stop Detect </strong>to stop detecting.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="853" height="479" class="wp-image-2346" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 308" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1103" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308.jpeg 853w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 853px) 100vw, 853px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-210</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark764"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark765"></a> View Detecting Results</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>After the detecting is completed, you can view the detecting reports to find out the problem and</p>
<p>replace the defective HDD to avoid data loss.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage ^ HDD DETECT ^ Report</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Report </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark767"> Figure 5-211.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="737" height="416" class="wp-image-2347" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-309.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 309" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1104" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-309.jpeg 737w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-309-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 737px) 100vw, 737px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-211</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark767"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Details </strong>interface is displayed. You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T reports. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark768"> Figure 5-212 </a>and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark769"> Figure 5-213.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="718" height="539" class="wp-image-2348" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-310.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 310" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1105" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-310.jpeg 718w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-310-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 718px) 100vw, 718px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark768"></a> Figure 5-212</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="767" height="562" class="wp-image-2349" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-311.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 311" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1106" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-311.jpeg 767w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-311-300x220.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 767px) 100vw, 767px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-213</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark769"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark770"></a> Configuring Quota Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the quote for each channel to be saved into each HDD.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="76" height="66" class="wp-image-2350" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-312.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 312" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1107"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>If &#8220;Current HDD Mode is HDD Mode&#8221; is shown on the interface, you need to switch to Quota mode.</li>
<li>You can enable either HDD Mode or Quota Mode at one time. The system reboots to activate the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ QUOTA</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>QUOTA </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark772"> Figure 5-214.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BASIC</td>
<td>Current HEX) Mode is</td>
<td>HOD Group</td>
<td>Change lo Quota Mode</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>QUOTA</td>
<td>HEX) Que</p>
<p>SATAI</td>
<td>4a</td>
<td>SATA2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>REC ESTIMATE</p>
<p>FTP</td>
<td>SATA3</p>
<p>SATAS</p>
<p>SATA7</td>
<td></td>
<td>SATA4</p>
<p>SA TAG</p>
<p>SATAS</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Apply</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-214</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark772"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channe</strong>l list, select the channel that you want to configure.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>SATA </strong>list, select the quota for the selected channel.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Statistic</strong>s to view the quota of each channel. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark773"> Figure 5-215.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="466" class="wp-image-2351" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-313.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 313" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1108" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-313.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-313-300x237.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark773"></a> Figure 5-215</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark774"></a> Configuring Record Estimate</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ STORAGE ^ REC ESTIMATE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>REC ESTIMATE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark776"> Figure 5-216.</a></p>
<p>STORAGE Storage / STORAGE / REC ESTIMATE</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BASIC</td>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Edit</td>
<td>Bit Rate(Kb/S)</td>
<td>Record Time</td>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>Frame Rate</td>
<td>•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>■J</em></strong> 1</td>
<td>X</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SCHEDULE</td>
<td><strong><em>■J</em></strong> 2</td>
<td>Z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">HDD MANAGER</td>
<td>V 3</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>V 4</td>
<td>✓&#8221;</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">HDD DETECT</td>
<td><strong><em>•J</em></strong> 5</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><em>•J</em></strong> 6</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">REC ESTIMATE</td>
<td>V 7</td>
<td></td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td>=</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><em>•J</em></strong> 8</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>■J</em></strong> 9</td>
<td></td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 10</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 11</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 12</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>J</em></strong> 13</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280*720{720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 14</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280’720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>15</td>
<td></td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280*720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>16</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280*720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">17 / 2048 24 1280*720(720P)</p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB Select</p>
<p>Time 0 Days</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-216</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark776"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="48" height="41" class="wp-image-2352" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-314.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 314" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1109"></p>
<p>The <strong>Edit </strong>dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark777"> Figure 5-217.</a></p>
<p>You can configure the resolution, frame rate, bit rate and record time for the selected channel.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="531" height="346" class="wp-image-2353" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-315.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 315" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1110" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-315.jpeg 531w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-315-300x195.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 531px) 100vw, 531px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-217</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark777"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to the channels settings and HDD capacity.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark778"></a> Calculating Recording Time</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>REC ESTIMATE </strong>interface, click the <strong>Known Space </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Known Space </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark780"> Figure 5-218.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Capacity 0 TB= 0 GB Select</p>
<p>Time 0 Days</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</p>
<p>Figure 5-218</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark780"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Select</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Select HDD(s) </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="491" height="329" class="wp-image-2354" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-316.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 316" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1111" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-316.jpeg 491w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-316-300x201.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 491px) 100vw, 491px" /></p>
<p>Step 3 Select the check box of the HDD that you want to calculate.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Known Space </strong>tab, in the <strong>Time </strong>box, the recording time is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark781"> Figure</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark781">5-219.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Capacity 2.000 TB= 2000 GB Select</p>
<p>Time 10 Days</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</p>
<p>Figure 5-219</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark781"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark782"></a> Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>REC ESTIMATE </strong>interface, click the <strong>Known Time </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Known Time </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark784"> Figure 5-220.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Time 0 Days</p>
<p>Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</p>
<p>Figure 5-220</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark784"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Time </strong>box, enter the time period that you want to record.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Capacity </strong>box, the required HDD capacity is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark786"> Figure 5-221.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Time 2 Days</p>
<p>Capacity 0.376 TB = 376 GB</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record penod</p>
<p>Figure 5-221</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark785"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark786"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark787"></a> Configuring FTP Storage Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark789"></a> Preparation for Configuration</p>
<p>Purchase or download a FTP server and install it on your PC.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded videos and snapshots will be failed.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark791"></a> Configuration Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage <em>•+</em> FTP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>FTP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark793"> Figure 5-222.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="465" class="wp-image-2355" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 317" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1112" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317.jpeg 822w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 822px) 100vw, 822px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-222</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark793"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the FTP settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark794"> Table 5-68.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the FTP upload function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Host IP</td>
<td>IP address of the PC that is installed with FTP server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>The default is 21.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anonymity</td>
<td>Enter the user name and password to login the FTP server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td>Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td>anonymously without entering the user name and password.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Remote Directory</td>
<td>Create folder on FTP server.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system</li>
</ul>
<p>automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you enter the name of remote directory, the system</li>
</ul>
<p>creates the folder with the entered name under the FTP root directory first, and then automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>File Length(M)</td>
<td>Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the entered length is less than the recorded video length,</li>
</ul>
<p>only a section of the recorded video can be uploaded.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the entered length is more than the recorded video length,</li>
</ul>
<p>the whole recorded video can be uploaded.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be</li>
</ul>
<p>uploaded.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Upload Interval (Sec.)</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system</li>
</ul>
<p>takes the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the recent snapshot every 5 seconds.</p>
<ul>
<li>If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system</li>
</ul>
<p>uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot every 10 seconds.</p>
<ul>
<li>To configure the snapshot interval, select <strong>Main Menu ^</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Week Day</p>
<p>Period 1, Period 2</td>
<td>Select the week day and set the time period that you want to upload the recorded files. You can set two periods for each week day.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark794"></a> Record type</td>
<td>Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you want to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded during the configured time period.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-68</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Test</strong>.</p>
<p>The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, please check the network connection or configurations.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark795"></a> 5.18 Configuring System Settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1005" height="569" class="wp-image-2356" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 318" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1113" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318.jpeg 1005w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318-768x435.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1005px) 100vw, 1005px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark797"></a> Configuring General System Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the device basic settings, time settings, and holiday settings.</p>
<p>For details about basic and time settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark114">&#8220;5.1.4.2 Configuring General Settings&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark119">&#8220;5.1.4.3 Configuring Date and Time Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>To configure the holiday settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System^ GENERAL ^ Holiday</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Holiday </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark799"> Figure 5-223.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="442" class="wp-image-2357" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 319" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1114" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319.jpeg 788w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark799"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add a Holiday</strong>.</p>
<p>Figure 5-223</p>
<p>The <strong>Add a Holiday </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark800"> Figure 5-224.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="675" height="389" class="wp-image-2358" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-320.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 320" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1115" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-320.jpeg 675w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-320-300x173.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 675px) 100vw, 675px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-224</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark800"></a> Step 3 Configure the holiday name, repeat mode, time range according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The added holiday information is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark801"> Figure 5-225.</a> ED NOTE</p>
<p>Enable the <strong>Add More </strong>function, so you can continue adding holiday information.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="808" height="456" class="wp-image-2359" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 321" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1116" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321.jpeg 808w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 808px) 100vw, 808px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-225</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark801"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark802"></a> Configuring RS232 Port Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^System ^ RS232</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>RS232 </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark804"> Figure 5-226.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="577" class="wp-image-2360" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 322" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1117" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322.jpeg 862w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322-300x201.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322-768x514.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322-810x542.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-226</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark804"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for RS232 port parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark805"> Table 5-69.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Function</td>
<td>In the Function list, select the protocol for the port.</p>
<ul>
<li>Console: Debug by connecting a mini terminal software.</li>
<li>Keyboard: Control the Device by connecting a dedicated</li>
</ul>
<p>keyboard.</p>
<ul>
<li>Adapter: Transit data by connecting to PC.</li>
<li>Protocol COM: This function is for card overlay.</li>
<li>NetKeyboard: Control the Device by connecting a dedicated</li>
</ul>
<p>keyboard to the LAN port.</p>
<ul>
<li>PTZ Matrix: Connect the video matrix for control.</li>
</ul>
<p>The default setting is <strong>Console</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Baudrate</td>
<td>In the <strong>Baudrate </strong>list, select a value for baudrate length. The default setting is <strong>115200</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data Bits</td>
<td>In the <strong>Data Bits </strong>list, select <strong>5</strong>, <strong>6</strong>, <strong>7</strong>, or <strong>8</strong>. The default setting is <strong>8</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Stop Bits</td>
<td>In the <strong>Stop Bits </strong>list, select <strong>1</strong>, <strong>1.5</strong>, or <strong>2</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark805"></a> Parity</td>
<td>In the <strong>Parity </strong>list, select <strong>None</strong>, <strong>Odd</strong>, <strong>Even</strong>, <strong>Mark</strong>, or <strong>Null</strong>. The default setting is <strong>None</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-69</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark806"></a> Configuring Security Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>To ensure the network security and protect data, you can configure the access permission to the Device from host IP (host IP means the PC or server that has an IP).</p>
<ul>
<li>White list includes the host IP that are permitted to access the Device.</li>
<li>Back list includes the host IP that are not permitted to access the Device.</li>
<li>Updata time white list includes the host IP that are permitted to sync the Device time.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark808"></a> Configuring Access Right</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Security ^ Access Right</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Access Right </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark810"> Figure 5-227.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="486" class="wp-image-2361" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 323" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1118" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323.jpeg 855w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323-768x437.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323-810x460.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-227</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark810"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the security parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark811"> Table 5-70.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>In the Type list, you can select Limits of network-whitelist, Limits of network-blacklist, or Updata time-whitelist.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the security settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Address</td>
<td>Enter a single IP address or a start IP address of a network segment.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Add IP Address</td>
<td>Click <strong>Add IP Address </strong>to add a single IP address.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>End Address</td>
<td>Enter the end IP address of a network segment.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark811"></a> Add IP Segment</td>
<td>Click <strong>Add IP Segment </strong>to add the IP addresses from the start IP through the end IP.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The system supports up to 64 IP addresses.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-70</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark812"></a> Enabling Password Reset</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Security ^ Password Reset</strong>, the <strong>Password Reset </strong>interface</p>
<p>is displayed. The <strong>Enable </strong>check box is selected by default. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark814"> Figure 5-228.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2362" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-324.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 324" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1119"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>If you clear the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, you can only use the security questions to reset the password. Make sure you have set the security questions before clearing the check box.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="730" height="412" class="wp-image-2363" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-325.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 325" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1120" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-325.jpeg 730w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-325-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 730px) 100vw, 730px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-228</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark814"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark815"></a> Configuring System Maintenance Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the Device has been running for a long time, you can configure the auto reboot when the Device is not working. You can also configure the case fan mode to reduce noise and extend the service life.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> System ^ System Maintain</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SYSTEM MAINTAIN </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark817"> Figure 5-229.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="777" height="436" class="wp-image-2364" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 326" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1121" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326.jpeg 777w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 777px) 100vw, 777px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-229</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark817"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the system maintenance parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark819"> Table 5-71.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto Reboot</td>
<td colspan="2">In the <strong>Auto Reboot </strong>list, select the reboot time.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Case Fan Mode</td>
<td colspan="3">In the <strong>Case Fan Mode </strong>list, you can select <strong>Always run </strong>or <strong>Auto</strong>.</p>
<p>If you select <strong>Auto</strong>, the case fan will stop or start according to the external conditions such as the Device temperature.</p>
<p>CQ <strong>NOTE</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">Not all models support this function, and it is only supported on</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>the local configuration interface.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-71</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark818"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark819"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark820"></a> Exporting and Importing System Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the same setup.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other interfaces.</li>
<li>When you open the <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface, the system refreshes the devices and sets the current directory as the first root directory.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Format </strong>to format the USB storage device.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark822"></a> Exporting System Settings</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ IMP/EXP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark824"> Figure 5-230.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="790" height="447" class="wp-image-2365" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 327" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1122" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327.jpeg 790w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 790px) 100vw, 790px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-230</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark824"></a> Step 2 Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Refresh </strong>to refresh the interface.</p>
<p>The connected USB storage device is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark825"> Figure 5-231.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Ji</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>S Ô</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>SYSTEM</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>System</strong></td>
<td><strong>/ SYSTEM</strong></td>
<td><strong>/ IMP/EXP</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>GENERAL</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Device Name sdal(USBUSB)</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refresh</strong></td>
<td><strong>Format</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>SECURITY</strong></td>
<td><strong>Total Space 3.73 GB</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Free Space 3.27 GB</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>SYSTEM MAINTAIN</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Address /</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>IMP/EXP</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Size</strong></td>
<td><strong>Typ«</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Delete</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>DEFAULT</strong></td>
<td><strong>■ ScreenShot</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Folder</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>&amp; LANl-20180313213059.pcap</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>111.7 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>UPGRADE</strong></td>
<td><strong>® LAN 1-20180313213722.peap</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>182.1 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>■ printf_20180314111548.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>1.2 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>3 kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>19.8 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>® printf.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>1.97 MB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>iffl kmsg_printf.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>LI KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>Rie</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B| printf_20180316153903.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>964 B</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>g) kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2L2KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>K printf_20180316154049.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>1.5 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>@ kmsg_printf_20180316154049.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>21.7 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Q printf_20180316155148.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2.2 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>■ kmsg_printf_20180316155148.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>21.6 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>Fite</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>® printf_20180316161436.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2.5 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>Fite</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2L9KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>New Folder</strong></p>
<p><strong>Import Export</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-231</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark825"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Export</strong>.</p>
<p>There is a folder under the name style of &#8220;Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]&#8221;. Double­click this folder to view the backup files.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark826"></a> Importing System Settings</p>
<p>Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the exported configuration files from another Device) into one of the USB ports on the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Select <strong>Main Menu &gt; SYSTEM &gt; IMP/EXP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Refresh </strong>to refresh the interface.</p>
<p>The connected USB storage device is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click on the configuration folder (under the name style of &#8220;Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]&#8221;) that you want to import.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Import</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device will reboot after the imported is succeeded.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark828"></a> Restoring Default Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Œ NOTE</p>
<p>Only Admin account supports this function.</p>
<p>You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Default</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>DEFAULT </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark830"> Figure 5-232.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="839" height="474" class="wp-image-2366" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 328" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1123" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328.jpeg 839w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 839px) 100vw, 839px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-232</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark830"></a> Step 2 Restore the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the settings that you want to restore, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>. The system starts restoring the selected settings.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Factory Default</strong>, and then click <strong>OK</strong>. The system starts restoring the whole settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark831"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark832"></a> 5.18.7 Upgrading the Device</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark834"></a> Upgrading File</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark836"> Figure 5-233.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="895" height="511" class="wp-image-2367" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 329" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1124" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329.jpeg 895w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329-768x438.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329-810x462.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 895px) 100vw, 895px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-233</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark836"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>System Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>System Upgrade </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark837"> Figure 5-234.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="582" height="413" class="wp-image-2368" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-330.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 330" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1125" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-330.jpeg 582w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-330-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 582px) 100vw, 582px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-234</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark837"></a> Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.</p>
<p>The selected file is displayed in the <strong>Update File </strong>box.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Start</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark838"></a> Performing Online Upgrade</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the system.</p>
<p>Before using this function, you need to check if there is any new version by auto check or manual check.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.</li>
<li>Manual check: Perform real-time check if there is any new version available.</li>
</ul>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the upgrading might be failed.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark840"> Figure 5-235.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="786" height="449" class="wp-image-2369" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 331" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1126" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331.jpeg 786w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331-768x439.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 786px) 100vw, 786px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-235</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark840"></a> Step 2 Check if there is any new version available.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto check: Enable Auto-check for updates.</li>
<li>Manual check: Click Manual Check.</li>
</ul>
<p>The system starts checking the new versions. After checking is completed, the check result is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the &#8220;It is the latest version&#8221; text is displayed, you do not need to upgrade.</li>
<li>If the text indicating there is a new version, please go the step 3. See Figure 5­</li>
</ul>
<p>236.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="883" height="503" class="wp-image-2370" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 332" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1127" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332.jpeg 883w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332-768x437.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332-810x461.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 883px) 100vw, 883px" /></p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Upgrade now</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark841"></a> 5.18.7.3 Uboot Upgrading</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="76" height="66" class="wp-image-2371" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-333.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 333" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1128"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be &#8220;u-bootbin.img&#8221; file and &#8220;update.img&#8221; file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.</li>
<li>Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.</li>
</ul>
<p>When starting the Device, the system automatically check if there is a USB storage device connected and if there is any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark843"></a> 5.19 Viewing Information</p>
<p>You can view the information such as log information, HDD information, and version details</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="894" height="499" class="wp-image-2372" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 334" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1129" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334.jpeg 894w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334-768x429.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334-810x452.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 894px) 100vw, 894px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark845"></a> Viewing Version Details</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the version details such as device model, system version, and build date.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Version</strong>, the <strong>VERSION </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark848"> Figure 5-237.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="473" class="wp-image-2373" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 335" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1130" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335.jpeg 834w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 834px) 100vw, 834px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-237</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark847"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark848"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark849"></a> Viewing Log Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view and search the log information.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>If there is no HDD installed, the system can save up to 10,000 logs.</li>
<li>If there is HDD installed and has been formatted, the system can save up to 500,000 logs.</li>
<li>If there is HDD installed, the logs about system operations are saved in the memory of the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device and other types of logs are saved into the HDD. If there is no HDD installed, the other types of logs are also saved in the memory of the Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>When formatting the HDD, the logs will not be lost. However, if you take out the HDD from the Device, the logs might be lost.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> INFO </strong>^ <strong>LOG</strong>, the <strong>LOG </strong>interface is displayed. See Figure 5­</p>
<p>238.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="473" class="wp-image-2374" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 336" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1131" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336.jpeg 837w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 837px) 100vw, 837px" /></p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select the log type that you want to view (<strong>System</strong>, <strong>Config</strong>, <strong>Storage</strong>, <strong>Record</strong>, <strong>Account</strong>, <strong>Clear</strong>, <strong>Playback</strong>, and <strong>Connection</strong>) or select <strong>All </strong>to view all logs.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Start Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, enter the time period to search, and then click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The search results are displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark851"> Figure 5-239.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="870" height="489" class="wp-image-2375" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 337" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1132" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337.jpeg 870w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 870px) 100vw, 870px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-239</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2376" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-338.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 338" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1133"></p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark851"></a> Click <strong>Details </strong>or double-click the log that you want to view, the <strong>Detailed Information </strong>interface is displayed. Click <strong>Next </strong>or <strong>Previous </strong>to view more log information.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Backup </strong>to back up the logs into the USB storage device.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Clear </strong>to remove all logs.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark852"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark853"></a> Viewing Event Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the event information of the Device and channel.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Event</strong>, the <strong>EVENT </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark855"> Figure 5-240.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="870" height="491" class="wp-image-2377" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 339" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1134" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339.jpeg 870w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 870px) 100vw, 870px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-240</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark855"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark856"></a> Viewing Network Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the online users, network data transmission details, and test network. For details about testing network, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark679">&#8220;5.14.2.1 Testing the Network.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark858"></a> Viewing Online Users</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the online user information and block any user for a period of time.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Network ^ Online users</strong>, the <strong>Online users </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark860"> Figure 5-241.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="469" class="wp-image-2378" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 340" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1135" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340.jpeg 834w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 834px) 100vw, 834px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark860"></a> Figure 5-241</p>
<p>To block an online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The</p>
<p>maximum value you can set is 65535.</p>
<p>The system detects every 5 seconds to check if there is any user added or deleted, and update the user list timely.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark861"></a> Viewing the Network Load</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Info ^ NETWORK ^ Network Load</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Network Load </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark863"> Figure 5-242.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="32" class="wp-image-2379" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-341.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 341" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1136"></p>
<p>VERSION</p>
<p>LOG</p>
<p>EVENT</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> ASO</p>
<p>Info / INFO / NETWORK</p>
<p>Online User</p>
<p>Network Load</p>
<p>Network Test</p>
<p>Name MAC Address Status</p>
<p>LANI 20:18:02:09:11:34 Succeed</p>
<p>IP Address Type</p>
<p>172.8.2.51 Ethernet</p>
<p>MTU</p>
<p>1500</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="627" height="252" class="wp-image-2380" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-342.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 342" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1137" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-342.jpeg 627w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-342-300x121.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 627px) 100vw, 627px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-242</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark863"></a> Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.</p>
<p>The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The default display is LAN1 load.</li>
<li>Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark864"></a> Viewing HDD Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ HDD</strong>, the <strong>HDD </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark866"> Figure 5-243.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="644" class="wp-image-2381" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 343" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1138" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343.jpeg 822w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343-300x235.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343-768x602.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343-810x635.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 822px) 100vw, 822px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-243</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark866"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SATA</td>
<td>Indicates the quantity of HDD that can be installed. The total quantity is different depending on the model you purchased.</p>
<ul>
<li>o: HDD is in normal working status.</li>
<li>-: No HDD is installed.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>No.</td>
<td>Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD. <strong>* </strong>means the current working HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Indicates HDD type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Total Space</td>
<td>Indicates the total capacity of HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Free Space</td>
<td>Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working normally.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>S.M.A.R.T</td>
<td>View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-72</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark867"></a> Viewing Device Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the information such as CPU temperature and memory usage to know the device status.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ INFO ^ DEVICE STATUS</strong>, the <strong>DEVICE STATUS </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark869"> Figure 5-244.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="820" height="637" class="wp-image-2382" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 344" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1139" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344.jpeg 820w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344-300x233.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344-768x597.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344-810x629.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 820px) 100vw, 820px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-244</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark869"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark870"></a> Viewing Channel Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the camera information connected to each channel.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Channel Info</strong>, the <strong>CHANNEL INFO </strong>interface is displayed. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark872">Figure 5-245.</a></p>
<p>VERSION</p>
<p>NETWORK</p>
<p>HDD</p>
<p>DEVICE STATUS</p>
<p>»■ CHANNEL INFO</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="209" height="288" class="wp-image-2383" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-345.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 345" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1140"></p>
<p>Figure 5-245</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark872"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark873"></a> Viewing Data Stream Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the real-time data stream rate and resolution of each channel.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ BPS</strong>, the <strong>BPS </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark875"> Figure 5-246.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="888" height="500" class="wp-image-2384" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 346" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1141" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346.jpeg 888w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 888px) 100vw, 888px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark875"></a> Figure 5-246</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark876"></a> 5.20 Logout the Device</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="38" class="wp-image-2385" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-347.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 347" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1142"></p>
<p>On the top right of the Main Menu interface or on any interface after you have entered the Main</p>
<p>Menu, click</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Logout</strong>, you will log out the device.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Reboot</strong>, the Device will be rebooted.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Shutdown</strong>, the Device will be turned off.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="888" height="500" class="wp-image-2386" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 348" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1143" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348.jpeg 888w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 888px) 100vw, 888px" /></p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark878"></a> Web Operations</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.</li>
<li>The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.</li>
<li>Besides Web, you can use our Smart PSS to login the device. For detailed information, please refer to Smart PSS user’s manual.
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark880"></a> Connecting to Network</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.</li>
<li>The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, fire fox, Google on Apple PC to perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device parameters configurations.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details about network configuration of the Device, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark124">&#8220;5.1.4.4 Configuring Network</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark124">Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using &#8220;ping ************&#8221; Usually the return value of TTL is 255.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark882"></a> Logging in the Web</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Open the IE browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.</p>
<p>The Login in dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark884"> Figure 6-1.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="470" height="423" class="wp-image-2387" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-349.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 349" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1144" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-349.jpeg 470w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-349-300x270.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></p>
<p>Figure 6-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark884"></a> Step 2 Enter the user name and password.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="178" height="35" class="wp-image-2388" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-350.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 350" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1145"></p>
<ul>
<li>The default administrator account is <strong>admin</strong>. The password is the one that was configured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to keep the password properly and change it regularly.</li>
<li>Click to display the password.</li>
<li>If you forgot the password, click <strong>Forgot Password? </strong>to reset the password. For details about resetting the password, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark885">&#8220;6.3 Resetting Password.</a>&#8220;</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Login</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark885"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark886"></a> 6.3 Resetting Password</p>
<p>You can reset the password through the reserved email address when you forget the password of admin account.</p>
<p>Step 1 Login the Web of the Device.</p>
<p>TheLogin in dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark888"> Figure 6-2.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="41" height="33" class="wp-image-2389" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-351.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 351" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1146"></p>
<p>3 <strong>RANGÉ&#8217;</strong></p>
<p><strong>i psci Natru</strong></p>
<p><strong>Login</strong></p>
<p><strong>Cancel</strong></p>
<p>Û</p>
<p>Figure 6-2</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark888"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Forgot Password?</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark889"> Figure 6-3.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="896" height="615" class="wp-image-2390" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 352" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1147" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352.jpeg 896w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-768x527.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-810x556.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-145x100.jpeg 145w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-380x260.jpeg 380w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 896px) 100vw, 896px" /></p>
<p>Figure 6-3</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark889"></a> Step 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to scan the QR code and get the security code.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2391" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-353.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 353" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1148"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to get the security code once again, please refresh the interface.</li>
<li>Please use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p>Wrong security code entrance up to five times will cause the security code locked for five minutes. After five minutes, you can continue to use this security code.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>Security code </strong>box, enter the security code received in your reserved email box.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The new password resetting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark890"> Figure 6-4</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="667" height="470" class="wp-image-2392" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-354.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 354" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1149" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-354.jpeg 667w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-354-300x211.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 667px) 100vw, 667px" /></p>
<p>Figure 6-4</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark890"></a> Step 6 In the <strong>Password </strong>box, enter the new password and enter it again in the <strong>Confirm Password </strong>box.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contain at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and</p>
<p>&#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</p>
<p>Step 7 Click <strong>Save</strong>. The password resetting is started.</p>
<p>After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed to indicate the result and you will see the login interface is displayed. Then you can use the new password to login the Web.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark891"></a> 6.4 Introducing Web Main Menu</p>
<p>After you have logged in the Web, the main menu is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark893"> Figure 6-5.</a></p>
<p>For detailed operations, you can refer to <a href="#post-2037-bookmark84">&#8220;5 Local Configurations.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="764" height="580" class="wp-image-2393" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-355.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 355" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 1150" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-355.jpeg 764w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-355-300x228.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 764px) 100vw, 764px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark893"></a> Figure 6-5</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/cp-plus-xvr-complete-setup-guide.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
